contract provisions - lakewood...contact builders exchange of washington at (425) 258-1303 should...

i

CONTRACT PROVISIONSContract Documents

Bid Proposal andProject Specifications

for

Fort Steilacoom Park – Trail Access UpgradesCity Project Number: #301-014

March 2020

CITY OF LAKEWOOD PARKS, RECREATION, AND COMMUNITY

SERVICES DEPARTMENT6000 Main Street SW Lakewood, WA

98499-5027

ii

CONTRACT PROVISIONSfor

Fort Steilacoom Park – Trail Access UpgradesCity Project Number: #301-014

March 2020

Prepared by:Site Workshop, LLC

Landscape Architecture3800 Woodland Park Ave N, Suite 200

Seattle, WA 98103

Prepared For: City of LakewoodDepartment of Parks Recreation, and Community

Services6000 Main Street SW

Lakewood, WA 98499-5027

The above mentioned Contract Provisions have been reviewed and approved for advertisement. Such review includes all contract documents, specifications, and plans associated with the project.

Prepared by: Stephanie Brucart P.L.A.

Checked by: Clayton Beaudoin, P.L.A.

Approved by: Clayton Beaudoin, P.L.A.

iii

CONTRACT PROVISIONS

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Fort Steilacoom Park – Trail Access Upgrades

City Project Number: #301-014

SECTION PAGE

Title Sheet

Table of Contents iii

Vicinity Map iv

Advertisement for Bids v

Bidders Checklist vi

Bidder Inquiry Form vii

Bid Form ix

Bid Schedule x

Bidder Information and Signature xii

Deposit or Bid Bond Form xiii

Bid Bond xiv

Non-Collusion Declaration xv

Listing of Sub-contractors xvi

Bidder’s Construction Experience xvii

Contract Agreement xviii

Contract Bond (Performance and Payment) xxii

E-Verify Affidavit of Compliance xxiii

Certification of Compliance with Wage Payment Statutes xxv

Technical Specifications

Appendices

A – Inadvertent Discovery Plan

B – Geotechnical Report

iv

VICINITY MAP

v

The City of Lakewoo st interest of the City

ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS

Fort Steilacoom Park – Trail Access Upgrades

City Project Number: #301-014

Sealed bids will be received by the City of Lakewood at the office of the City Clerk at 6000 Main Street SW, Lakewood, Washington 98499-5027, until 2:00 p.m. on Thursday, May 7, 2020, and not later, and will then be opened and publicly read aloud in the Council Chambers, City Hall, 6000 Main St SW, Lakewood WA, 98499.

Project Description:

The work to be performed under this contract shall include improvements of Fort Steilacoom Park, located at 8714 87th

Avenue SW, Lakewood, WA. 98498. Construction includes improvements to the existing park including, but not limited to, erosion and sedimentation control, grading and site preparation, a parking lot with 38 parking stalls and associated storm drainage, a new restroom and storage facility, roadway surfacing and landscape restoration, and all site furnishings including vehicular gates.

Plans, specifications, addenda, and plan holders list for this project are available on-line through Builders Exchange of Washington, Inc. at http://www.bxwa.com. Click on: “Posted Projects”; “Public Works”, “City of Lakewood, WA.” Bidders are encouraged to “Register as a Bidder”, in order to receive automatic email notification of future addenda and to be placed on the “Bidders List”. Contact Builders Exchange of Washington at (425) 258-1303 should you require further assistance. Informational copies of any available maps, plans, and specifications are on file for inspection at the front counter of the first floor, Lakewood City Hall, 6000 Main Street SW, Lakewood, WA 98499.

A non-mandatory Pre-Bid walk-through will be available at the Project Site on Thursday, April 23st between 11:00AM and 2:00PM. Walk-throughs will begin at the intersection of Elwood Drive and Angle Lane. Bidders shall be qualified for the type of work proposed. A Bidder's Construction Experience form is included in the Contract Provisions.

All bids shall be submitted on the prescribed Bid Forms and in the manner as stated in this advertisement and in the Bid Documents, and said bids shall be accompanied by a bid deposit in the form of cash, cashier's check, certified check, postal money order, or a surety bond to the City of Lakewood in the amount of five percent (5%) of the total amount of the bid. Faxed bids and/or surety bonds will not be accepted.

Bids must be submitted in a sealed envelope with the outside clearly marked with the bid opening date and time, the project name and number as it appears in this advertisement and the name and address of the bidder. Bids shall be addressed to the City Clerk, City of Lakewood, 6000 Main Street SW, Lakewood, Washington 98499-5027 or hand delivered to the first floor receptionist.

The City of Lakewood reserves the right to determine and may waive any informalities or minor defects or reject any and all bids. The City of Lakewood reserves the right to determine the lowest responsible bidder based on factors other than price, including but not limited to the following: liability exposure, references and past performance, history of claims with other agencies on similar projects, inadequate or ambiguous specifications, specifications have been revised, lowest responsible bid deemed not best price obtainable, bids not independently arrived or submitted in bad faith (i.e. price fixing), a determination made that all the necessary requirements of bid process have not been met, insufficient competition, and other claims or other indications that cancellation or rejection of all bids is clearly in the best interest of the City. The City of Lakewood expressly reserves the right to accept the bids and award contracts to responsible bidders which are in the best interest of the City, to postpone the acceptance of bids and the award of the contracts for a period not to exceed 30 days, or to reject any and all bids received and to waive irregularities in the bid or in the bidding.

Briana Schumacher City Clerk

Daily Journal of Commerce Publish: April 7, 2020 Tacoma News Tribune Publish: April 7, 2020

vi

BIDDERS CHECKLIST

1. Have the bid forms been properly signed?

2. Have you bid on all items?

3. Is the contractor’s state license number shown on the bid form?

4. Has a Bid Deposit or Bid Bond been included?

5. Have you attached your Non-Collusion Declaration to your bid proposal package?

6. Has the Bidder’s Construction Experience form been filled out?

The following forms are to be executed after the contract is awarded:

A. Contract - To be executed by the successful Bidder and the City.

B. Contract Bond (Performance and Payment Bond) – To be executed on the form provided by the City, by the

successful Bidder and its surety company. To include name and address of surety and power of attorney of

signatory.

C. E -Verify Affidavit of Compliance completed and signed.

D. Certification of Compliance with Wage Payment Statutes

E. Insurance certificate(s).

F. Labor and Industries Forms.

G. City of Lakewood Business License – Copy to be provided by contractor at pre-construction conference.

vii

CITY OF LAKEWOOD

BIDDER INQUIRY FORM

Public Works Department

The responses to Contractor’s inquiries, unless incorporated into a formal addendum to the Contract, are not part of

the Contract and are provided for the Contractor’s convenience only. The responses may be considered along with all

other information furnished to prospective Bidders for the purpose of Bidding on the project. The use of information

provided in the responses to Contractor’s inquiries is not to be construed in any way as a waiver of the provisions nor

excuse the Contractor from full compliance with the Contract requirements. Bidders are cautioned that subsequent

responses or Contract addenda may affect or vary a response previously given and any such subsequent response or

addenda should be taken into consideration when submitting a Bid for the project. Inquiries submitted within forty-

eight (48) hours of the Bid opening might not be addressed.

Bidder inquires may be e-mailed to Doug Fraser, [email protected], or submitted attention Douglas Fraser,

Parks & Recreation Department, 6000 Main St. SW, Lakewood, WA 98499.

Company Name: Contact Name:

Phone Number: e-mail Address:

INQUIRY

Bidder Inquiry No. ___ of ___ (Include specific references to items, Specifications, and/or plan sheets with your inquiry.)

City of Lakewood Response - Name:________________________ Phone: ______________ Date: ________

viii

ADDITIONAL INQUIRIES:





ix

BID FORM

TO: City of Lakewood, City Clerk’s Office

ADDRESS: 6000 Main Street SW, Lakewood, WA 98499-5027

PROPOSAL TO LAKEWOOD CITY COUNCIL, LAKEWOOD, WASHINGTON

PROJECT: Fort Steilacoom Park – Trail Access Upgrades

#301-014

Bidder

Address

Date

Contractor’s State Lic. # ______________________________

Bidders Declaration of Understanding

The Bidder, in compliance with the City’s Advertisement for Bids and Instructions for Bidders for City of Lakewood

Fort Steilacoom Park – Trail Access Upgrades, having examined the specifications, drawings, related documents,

and the site of the proposed work, and being familiar with all of the conditions surrounding the work of the proposed

project including the availability of material and labor, hereby proposes to furnish all labor, materials, tools,

expendable equipment, affidavits of prevailing wages paid, utility and transportation services, and incidentals,

necessary to perform the complete contract, in a workmanlike manner, and as required by and in strict conformance

with the Standard Specifications, Special Provisions, Addenda and plans, all for the rates and lump sum prices listed

below. These prices shall cover all expenses incurred in performing the work required under the contract documents,

for which this bid is a part. All sales tax shall be included in the lump sum and unit prices within this bid.

Completion Time and Liquidated Damages

Once the Notice to Proceed is issued the contractor will have 120 working days to complete all work.

Liquidated damages will be per section 1-08.9 of the 2019 WSDOT Standard Specifications. Scheduling of the

work on Angle Lane, including but not limited to demolition, regrading, paving, and restoration, shall be made

based on the need for the City of Lakewood to have a fully operational road for the annual Summerfest event

scheduled for July 11th. The contractor may elect to undertake and complete this work before or after the

scheduled event.

The liquidated damages do not include, and are in addition to, damages from the costs for legal expense,

administrative and court costs incurred beyond contract completion date. The cost of additional administrative

surveillance, legal expense, and court costs beyond contract completion date shall be billed the contractor at standard

billing rates for said services then in effect.

x

BID SCHEDULE

City Project Number: #301-014Note: Unit prices for all items, all extensions, and the total amount bid must be shown. Where conflict occurs between the unit price and the total

amount named for any item the unit price shall prevail, and totals shall be corrected to conform thereto. All entries must be typed or entered in ink.

A bid must be received on all items. If any unit prices or extensions are left blank or represent $0.00, the bid will be disqualified.

BASE BID

Item No.

Spec. Section Description Quantity Unit Unit Price Total Amount

1 ALL Base Bid (without tax) 1 LS

BASE BID TOTAL AMOUNT (without tax) $____________________

BID ALTERNATE #1

Item No.


1 323119 Provide additional double swing gates to replace gates at field / north parking lot and Waughop Lake Trailhead, to be located by owner.

2 EA

BID ALTERNATE #1 TOTAL AMOUNT (without tax) $____________________

BID ALTERNATE #2

Item No.


1 Ref. detail 2/L3.21

Provide per gate unit price for decorative concrete pilasters. (2) per gate, one at each gate post. Owner will choose which gates (if any) for selective installation.

5 EA (pair)

BID ALTERNATE #2 TOTAL AMOUNT (without tax) $____________________

xi

BIDDER INFORMATION AND SIGNATURE

The Bidder proposes to accept as full payment for the work proposed herein, the amount computed under the provisions of the Contract Documents. The undersigned bids for the following described project:

City of Lakewood Fort Steilacoom Park – Trail Access UpgradesCity Project Number: #301-014

Addenda Acknowledgment

By signing below, Bidder acknowledges receipt and understanding of the following Addenda to the Contract Provisions:

Addendum No. Date ofReceipt

Signature

1

2

3

4

5

Note: Failure to acknowledge receipt of Addenda may be considered as an irregularity in the Bid Proposal and the City reserves the right to determine whether the bid will be disqualified.

The party by whom this bid is submitted and by whom the contract will be entered into, in the event the award is made to this party, is:

Contractor (Firm Name) Signature

Address Name (Print) & Title

Phone Number Date of Signing

Contractor’s Washington State License (Indicate whether contractor is partnership,Number joint venture, corporation, or sole

proprietorship)*

*If Bidder is a corporation, write State of Incorporation under signature. If partnership, give full names of all partners.

xii

The name of the President, Treasurer, and/or Manager of the bidding corporation, or the names of all persons and parties interested in this bid as partners or principals, are as follows:

Name Address

If Sole Proprietor or Partnership

IN WITNESS hereto, the undersigned has set his (its) hand this day of , 20__.

Signature of Bidder

Title

If Corporation

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the undersigned corporation has caused this instrument to be executed by its duly authorized officers this day of ____________________, 20__.

Attest:Name of Corporation

by Secretary

Title

Sworn to me before me this day of

, 20__.Notary Public in and for the State of Washington Residing at

NOTES:If the Bidder is a co-partnership, give firm name under which business is transacted; proposal must be executed by a partner. If the Bidder is a corporation, proposal must be executed in the corporate name by the president or vice-president (or any other corporate officer accompanied by evidence of authority to sign).

xiii

DEPOSIT OR BID BOND FORM

BID DEPOSIT STATEMENT:

A Bid Guaranty in an amount of five percent (5%) of the total amount bid based upon the approximate estimate of quantities at the prices stated in this bid, and in the form identified below, is attached hereto:

Cash in the amount of $

Cashier’s Check in the amount of $ #

Certified Check in the amount of $ payable to the City

Postal Money Order in the amount of $

Bid Bond in the amount of five percent (5%) of the total bid amount (see attached form).

Surety:

If the Bidder is awarded a construction contract on this Bid, the Surety that will provide the Contract Bond will be:

Whose address is:

Street

City State Zip Code

xiv

BID BOND KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That we, as Principal and as Surety, are held and firmly bound unto the CITY OF LAKEWOOD as Obligee, in the penal sum of Dollars, for the payment of which the Principal and the Surety bind themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, by these presents.

The condition of this obligation is such that if the Obligee shall make any award to the Principal for:

according to the terms of the bid made by the Principal, and the Principal shall duly make and enter into a contract with the Obligee in accordance with the terms of said bid and award and shall give bond for the faithful performance thereof, with Surety or Sureties approved by the Obligee; or if the Principal shall, in case of failure so to do, pay and forfeit to the Obligee the penal amount of the deposit specified in the advertisement for bids, then this obligation shall be null and void; otherwise it shall be and remain in full force and effect and the Surety shall forthwith pay and forfeit to the Obligee, as penalty and liquidated damages, the amount of this bond.

SIGNED, SEALED AND DATED THIS _______ day of _______________, 20____.

Principal Surety

BySignature of Authorized Official Attorney in Fact (Attach Power of Attorney)

Title (Typed)

Name and address of localAgent and/or SuretyCompany:

Surety companies executing bonds must appear on the current Authorized Insurance List in the State of Washington per Section 1-02.7 of the Standard Specifications.

xv

Failure to return this Declaration as part of the bid proposal packagewill make the bid nonresponsive and ineligible for award.

NON-COLLUSION DECLARATION

I, by signing the proposal, hereby declare, under penalty ofperjury under the laws of the United States that the followingstatements are true and correct:

1. That the undersigned person(s), firm, association or corporation has(have) not, either directly or indirectly, entered into any agreement,participated in any collusion, or otherwise taken any action in restraint offree competitive bidding in connection with the project for which thisproposal is submitted.

2. That by signing the signature page of this proposal, I amdeemed to have signed and to have agreed to the provisionsof this declaration.

NOTICE TO ALL BIDDERS

To report rigging activities call:

1-800-424-9071

The U.S. Department of Transportation (USDOT) operates the above toll-free“hotline” Monday through Friday, 8:00 a.m. to 5:00 p.m., eastern time. Anyonewith knowledge of possible bid rigging, bidder collusion, or other fraudulentactivities should use the “hotline” to report such activities.

The “hotline” is part of USDOT’s continuing effort to identify and investigatehighway construction contract fraud and abuse and is operated under thedirection of the USDOT Inspector General. All information will be treatedconfidentially and caller anonymity will be respected.

xvi

LISTING OF SUB-CONTRACTORS

IF THERE IS NO SUB-CONTRACTORS USED, WRITE NO SUB-CONTRACTORS WILL BE USED.

Failure to list subcontractors who are proposed to perform the work of HVAC (heating, ventilation and air condition), plumbing, as described in Chapter 18.106 RCW, and electrical as described in Chapter 19.28 RCW, or naming more than one subcontractor to perform the same work will result in your bid being non-responsive and therefore void.

Subcontractor(s) that are proposed to perform the work of heating, ventilation, and air condition, plumbing as described in chapter 18.106 RCW, and electrical as described in chapter 19.28 RCEW must be listed below. The work to be preformed is to be listed beside the subcontractor(s) name. The requirement to name the prime contract bidder’s proposed HAVAC, plumbing and electrical subcontractors applies only to proposed HAVAC, plumbing, and electrical subcontractors who will be contract directly with the prime contract bidder submitting the bid to the public entity.

NAME AND ADDRESS DESCRIPTION OF WORK

Signed by__________________________________Title______________________________________

xvii

BIDDER'S CONSTRUCTION EXPERIENCE

All questions must be answered and the data given must be clear and comprehensive. If necessary, add separate sheets for items marked "*".

1. Name of Bidder:

2. Permanent main office address:

3. When organized:

4. Where incorporated:

5. How many years have you been engaged in the contracting business under your present firm name?

6. *Contracts on hand. (Schedule these, showing gross amount of each contract and the approximate anticipated dates of completion.)

7. *General character of work performed by your company:

8. *Have you ever failed to complete any work awarded to you? If so, where and why?

9. *Have you ever defaulted on a contract?

10. *List the more important projects recently completed by your company, stating approximate cost for each, and the month and year completed.

11. *List your major equipment available for this contract:

12. *Experience in construction work similar in importance to this project:

13. Will you, upon request, fill out a detailed financial statement and furnish any other information that may be required by the City?

14. The undersigned hereby authorizes and requests any person, firm or corporation to furnish any information requested by the City of Lakewood.

Bidder: _______________________________

Date: By: _____

Title: _________________________________

xviii

CONTRACT AGREEMENT

THIS AGREEMENT, made and entered into this day of , 20 , by and between the CITY OF LAKEWOOD, Washington, a municipal corporation, hereinafter referred to as the City, and_____________________, hereinafter called the Contractor,.

WITNESSETH:

WHEREAS, the City desires to have certain services and/or work performed as hereinafter set forth requiring specialized skills and other supportive capabilities; and,

WHEREAS, the Contractor represents that the Contractor is qualified and possesses sufficient skills and the necessary capabilities, including technical and professional expertise where required, to perform the services set forth in this Agreement.

NOW THEREFORE, in consideration of the terms, conditions, covenants, and performance contained herein, the parties hereto agree as follows:

1. SCOPE OF SERVICES.The Contractor shall perform such services and accomplish such work, including the furnishing of all

materials and equipment necessary for full performance thereof, as are identified and designated as Contractor responsibilities throughout this Agreement and as detailed in the attached plans, specifications, addenda, and the 2019 Standard Specifications for Road, Bridge, Municipal Public Works Construction prepared by the Washington State Department of Transportation and the Washington State Chapter of the American Public Works Association herein after called the Standard Specification, and shall perform any alterations in or additions to the work provided under this contract and every part thereof.

2. TIME FOR PERFORMANCE AND LIQUIDATED DAMAGES.

A. The Contractor shall perform the work of the scope of service in accordance with the time for performance as specified in the Contract Provisions.

B. Liquidated damages shall apply as specified in the Contract Provisions.

3. COMPENSATION AND METHOD OF PAYMENT.

A. Payments for services provided hereunder shall be made following the performance of such services, unless otherwise permitted by law and approved in writing by the City.

B. No payment shall be made for any service rendered by the Contractor except for services identified and set forth in this agreement.

C. The City shall pay the Contractor for work performed under this Agreement as detailed in the Bid Schedule which is incorporated herein and made a part hereof by this reference.

D. The Contractor shall submit to the City, in accordance with the procedures specified in the Standard Specifications, and on forms approved by the City, a voucher or invoice for services rendered during the pay period. The City shall initiate authorization for payment after receipt of said approved voucher or invoice and shall make payment to the Contractor within approximately thirty (30) days thereafter.

4. INDEPENDENT CONTRACTOR RELATIONSHIP.A. The parties intend that the relationship of an independent Contractor between the Contractor and

the City will be created by this Agreement. The City is interested primarily in the results to be achieved.

xix

The implementation of services will lie solely with the Contractor. No agent, employee, servant or representative of the Contractor shall be deemed to be an employee, agent, servant or representative of the City for any purpose, and the employees of the Contractor are not entitled to any of the benefits the City provides for its employees. The Contractor will be solely and entirely responsible for its acts and for the acts of its agents, employees, servants, subcontractors or representatives during the performance of this Agreement.

B. In the performance of the services herein contemplated the Contractor is an independent contractor with the authority to control and direct the performance of the details of the work, however, the results of the work contemplated herein must meet the approval of the City and shall be subject to the City’s general rights of inspection and review to secure the satisfactory completion thereof.

5. CONTRACTOR’S EMPLOYEES – PREVAILING WAGE REQUIREMENTS.The Contractor shall be responsible for payment of wages and salaries, plus all appropriate and

timely employment related contributions, for all employees of the Contractor, including but not limited to Workers Compensation Insurance and Unemployment Insurance. The Contractor shall also comply with applicable prevailing wage requirements, and shall document the same to the City upon request, and shall file with the City appropriate affidavits, certificates and/or statements of compliance with the prevailing wage requirements. The Contractor shall also ensure that any sub-contractors or agents of the Contractor shall comply with the requirements hereof.

6. CONTRACTOR’S EMPLOYEES – EMPLOYMENT ELIGIBILITY REQUIREMENTSThe Contractor and any subcontractors shall comply with E-Verify as set forth in Lakewood

Municipal Code Chapter 1.42. E-Verify is an Internet-based system operated by United States Citizenship and Immigration Services in partnership with the Social Security Administration. E-Verify is free to employers and is available in all 50 states. E-Verify provides an automated link to federal databases to help employers determine employment eligibility of new hires and the validity of their Social Security numbers. The Contractor shall enroll in, participate in and document use of E-Verify as a condition of the award of this contract. The Contractor shall continue participation in E-Verify throughout the course of the Contractor’s contractual relationship with the City. If the Contractor uses or employs any subcontractor in the performance of work under this contract, or any subsequent renewals, modifications or extension of this contract, the subcontractor shall register in and participate in E-Verify and certify such participation to the Contractor. The Contractor shall show proof of compliance with this section, and/or proof of subcontractor compliance with this section, within three (3) working days of the date of the City’s request for such proof.

7. BOND REQUIREMENTS. The Contractor shall provide and deliver to the City, through its Contract Administrator identified below, such Performance Bond(s) as may be required by the City, in such amount(s) and form(s) as required by the City.

8. HOLD HARMLESS AND INDEMNIFICATION.The Contractor shall indemnify and hold the City and its agents, employees, and/or officers, harmless

from and shall process and defend at its own expense any and all claims, demands, suits, at law or equity, actions, penalties, losses, damages, or costs, of whatsoever kind or nature, brought against the City arising out of, in connection with, or incident to the execution of this Agreement and/or the Contractor’s performance or failure to perform any aspect of this Agreement; provided, however, that if such claims are caused by or result from the concurrent negligence of the City, its agents, employees, and/or officers, this indemnity provision shall be valid and enforceable only to the extent of the negligence of the Contractor; and provided further, that nothing herein shall require the Contractor to hold harmless or defend the City, its agents, employees and/or officers from any claims arising from the sole negligence of the City, its agents, employees, and/or officers. No liability shall attach to the City by reason of entering into this Agreement except as expressly provided herein.

xx

9. INSURANCE.The Contractor shall obtain, and keep in force during the full term of this Agreement, Public Liability

and Property Damage Insurance in accordance with Sections 1-07.18 of the APWA General Special Provisions to the Standard Specifications and the following additions:

A. The City shall be specifically named as ADDITIONAL INSURED in the insurance coverage required hereinabove. A certificate of such insurance or a copy of such insurance policy or policies shall be provided to the City within ten (10) working days after the execution of the Agreement. The Contractor’s insurer shall agree to give the City thirty (30) days written notice of cancellation or reduction in coverage below the limits set forth herein. Coverage in the minimum amount set forth herein shall not be construed to relieve the Contractor from liability in excess of such coverage. Further, the City reserves all claims or rights of action against the Contractor as if the City were not named in the subject policy or policies.

10. COMPLIANCE WITH LAWS.A. The Contractor, in the performance of the Agreement, shall comply with all applicable federal,

state or local laws and ordinances, including regulations for licensing, certification and operation of facilities, programs and accreditation, and licensing of individuals, and any other standards or criteria as described in this Agreement to assure quality of services.

B. The Contractor specifically agrees to pay any applicable business and permit fees and taxes which may be due on account of this Agreement.

11. NONDISCRIMINATION.A. The City is an equal opportunity employer.B. In the performance of this Agreement, the Contractor will not discriminate against any employee

or applicant for employment on the grounds of race, creed, color, national origin, sex, marital status, age, or the presence of any sensory, mental or physical handicap; provided that the prohibition against discrimination in employment because of handicap shall not apply if the particular disability prevents the proper performance of the particular worker involved. The Contractor shall ensure that applicants are employed, and that employees are treated during employment without discrimination because or their race, creed, color, national origin, sex, marital status, age, or the presence of any sensory, mental or physical handicap. Such action shall include, but not be limited to: employment, upgrading, demotion or transfers, recruitment or recruitment advertising, layoff or termination, rates of pay or other forms of compensation, and programs for training including apprenticeships. The Contractor shall take such action with respect to this Agreement as may be required to ensure full compliance with Chapter 49.60 Revised Code of Washington, Law Against Discrimination.

C. The Contractor will not discriminate against any recipient of any services or benefits provided for in this Agreement on the grounds of race, creed, color, national origin, sex, marital status, age or the presence of any sensory, mental or physical handicap.

D. If any assignment and/or subcontracting has been authorized by the City, said assignment or subcontract shall include appropriate safeguards against discrimination. The Contractor shall take such action as may be required to ensure full compliance with the provision in the immediately preceding paragraphs herein.

12. RESTRICTION AGAINST ASSIGNMENT.The Contractor shall not assign this Contract or any interest herein, nor any money due or to become

due hereunder without first obtaining the written consent of the City, nor shall the Contractor subcontract any part of the services to be performed hereunder, without first obtaining the consent of the City.

13. CONTINUATION OF PERFORMANCE.In the event that any dispute or conflict arises between the parties while this Contract is in effect, the

Contractor agrees that, notwithstanding such dispute or conflict, the Contractor shall continue to make a good

xxi

faith effort to cooperate and continue work toward successful completion of assigned duties and responsibilities.

14. CONTRACT ADMINISTRATION.This Contract shall be administered by ________________________________ on behalf of the

Contractor and by the City Manager or designee on behalf of the City. Any written notices required by terms of this Contract shall be served or mailed to the following address(es):

If to the City: If to the Contractor:City of Lakewood6000 Main Street SW Lakewood, WA 98499

15. CONSTRUCTION AND VENUE.This Contract shall be construed in accordance with laws of the State of Washington. In the event of

any litigation regarding the construction or effect of this Contract, or the rights of the parties pursuant to this Contract, it is agreed that venue shall be Pierce County, Washington.

16. TERMINATION AND SUSPENSION.A. The City may terminate this Agreement upon not less than fifteen (15) days written notice to the

Contractor if the services provided for herein are no longer needed from the Contractor.B. If this Agreement is terminated through no fault of the Contractor, the Contractor shall be

compensated for services performed prior to termination in accordance with the rate of compensation provided in the Contract Documents incorporated herein.

17. MERGER AND AMENDMENT.This Contract contains the entire understanding of the parties with respect to the matters set forth

herein and any prior or contemporaneous understandings are merged herein. This contract shall not be modified except by written instrument executed by all parties hereto.

IN WITNESS WHEREOF the parties hereto have caused this agreement to be executed the day and year first above written.

CITY OF LAKEWOOD, OWNER CONTRACTOR

John J. Caulfield, City Manager Name: ___________________________

Title: ____________________________

ATTEST:

____________________________________Alice M. Bush, MMC, City Clerk

APPROVED AS TO FORM:

Heidi Wachter, City Attorney

xxii

CONTRACT BOND (PERFORMANCE and PAYMENT BOND)

Bond to the City of LakewoodBond #

KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS:

That we, the undersigned, as Principal, and a corporation, organized and existing under the laws of the State of Washington, as a surety corporation, and qualified under the laws of the State of Washington to become surety upon bonds of contractors with municipal corporations as surety, are jointly and severally held and firmly bound to the City of Lakewood in the penal sum of $ for the payment of which sum on demand we bind ourselves and our successors, heirs, administrators or personal representatives, as the case may be.

This obligation is entered into pursuant to the statutes of the State of Washington and the ordinances of the City of Lakewood.

Dated at , Washington, this day of , 20 .

The conditions of the above obligation are such that:

WHEREAS, the City of Lakewood has let or is about to let to the said the above bounded Principal, a certain contract, the said contract being numbered 302.0005(2015), and providing for construction of City of Lakewood 2015 Chip Seal Program (which contract is referred to herein and is made a part hereof as though attached hereto), and

WHEREAS, the said Principal has accepted, or is about to accept, the said contract, and undertake to perform the work therein provided for in the manner and within the time set forth; now, therefore,

If the said Principal, , shall faithfully perform all of the provisions of said contract in the manner and within the time therein set forth, or within such extensions of time as may be granted under said contract, and shall pay all laborers, mechanics, subcontractors and materialmen, and all persons who shall supply said Principal or subcontractors with provisions and supplies for the carrying on of said work, applicable taxes, and workers compensation premiums, and shall indemnify and hold the City of Lakewood harmless from any damage or expense by reason of failure of performance as specified in said contract or from defects appearing or developing in the material or workmanship provided or performed under said contract within a period of one year after its acceptance thereof by the City of Lakewood, then and in that event, this obligation shall be void; but otherwise, it shall be and remain in full force and effect.

Executed at ______________________________, Washington this day of , 20 .

Principal

__________________________________________Signature of Authorized Official__________________________________________Title

Name and address of local Office of agent And/or Surety Company:

Surety

__________________________________________Signature of Authorized Official__________________________________________Attorney in Fact (Attach Power of Attorney)______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Surety companies executing bonds must appear on the current Authorized Insurance List in the State of Washington per Section 1-02.7 of the Standard Specifications.

xxiii

CITY OF LAKEWOOD

E-VERIFY REQUIREMENTS FOR CONTRACTORS

By Ordinance, the City of Lakewood requires that all contractors who enter into agreements to provide services or products to the City use the Department of Homeland Security’s E-Verify system when hiring new employees for the term of the contract.

E-Verify is an electronic system designed to verify the documentation of job applicants. It is run by the Department of Homeland Security.

Who is affected? All contractors doing business for the City of Lakewood. There is no minimum dollar value

for contracts affected. All subcontractors employed by the general contractor on these contracts.

Are there exceptions? Contracts for “Commercial-Off-The-Shelf” items are exempted from this requirement. Individuals, Companies, or other organizations who do not have employees.

How long must the contractor comply with the E-Verify system? For at least the term of the contract.

Are there other stipulations? E-Verify must be used ONLY for NEW HIRES during the term of the contract. It is NOT to

be used for EXISTING EMPLOYEES. E-Verify must be used to verify the documentation of ANY new employee during the term of

the contract, not just those directly or indirectly working on deliverables related to the City of Lakewood contract.

How will the City of Lakewood check for compliance? All contractors will retain a copy of the E-Verify Memorandum of Understanding that they

execute with the Department of Homeland Security AND Sign and submit to the City an Affidavit of Compliance with their signed contract. All General Contractors will be required to have their subcontractors sign an Affidavit of

Compliance and retain that Affidavit for 4 years after end of the contract. The City of Lakewood has the right to audit the Contractor’s compliance with the E-Verify

Ordinance.

Further information on E-Verify can be found at the following website:

http://www.uscis.gov/e-verify

If you have questions about the City’s E-Verify Ordinance, please contact the City of Lakewood’s legal department prior to contracting with the City.

http://www.uscis.gov/e-verify

xxiv

CITY OF LAKEWOOD

AFFIDAVIT OF COMPLIANCE WITH LAKEWOOD MUNICIPAL CODE 1.42“E-VERIFY“

As the person duly authorized to enter into such commitment for

______________________________________________________________________,(Company or Organization Name)

I hereby certify that the Company or Organization named herein will

(check one box below)

Be in compliance with all of the requirements of City of Lakewood Municipal Code Chapter 1.42 for the duration of the contract entered into between the City of Lakewood and the Company or Organization.

OR

Hire no employees for the term of the contract between the City and the Company or Organization.

NAME

TITLE

DATE

xxv

Certification of Compliance with Wage Payment Statutes

The contractor hereby certifies that, within the three-year period immediately preceding the bid solicitation date of ______________, the contractor is not a “willful” violator, as defined in RCW 49.48.082, of any provision of chapters 49.46, 49.48, or 49.52 RCW, as determined by a final and binding citation and notice of assessment issued by the Department of Labor and Industries or through a civil judgment entered by a court of limited or general jurisdiction.

I certify under penalty of perjury under the laws of the State of Washington that the foregoing is true and correct.

Contractor’s Business Name

Signature of Authorized Official*

Printed Name

Title

Date City State

Check One:Sole Proprietorship ☐ Partnership ☐ Joint Venture ☐ Corporation ☐

State of Incorporation, or if not a corporation, State where business entity was formed:

If a co-partnership, give firm name under which business is transacted:

* If a corporation, proposal must be executed in the corporate name by the president or vice-president (or any other corporate officer accompanied by evidence of authority to sign). If a co-partnership, proposal must be executed by a partner.

TECHNICALSPECIFICATIONS

SPECIFICATIONS. The following Specifications shall apply to all construction work performed for the Cityof Lakewood Parks, Recreation and Community Services Department associated with the Fort SteilacoomPark - Trail Access Upgrades project.

STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS. The Standard Specifications (that are not attached, but are bound under aseparate cover) are the 2020 Standard Specifications for Road, Bridge, and Municipal Construction, from theWashington State Department of Transportation. All work shall be completed in accordance with theStandard Specifications, unless otherwise noted in the Contract Provisions.

PROJECT SPECIFICATIONS. Several types of specifications may be included in this project, such asSpecial Provisions and Technical Provisions. These specifications modify or supplement the WSDOTStandard Specifications as provided below:

TECHNICAL PROVISIONS. The Technical Provisions are unique specifications in that the format istypically note the same as the Standard Specifications. Generally, the Technical Provisions specify only thematerials and construction requirements for items of work not typically described in the StandardSpecifications.

In the case of this project the owner has elected to supplement the Standard Specifications Division 1 GeneralRequirements with their own CSI formatted “front-end.” Included here are General Conditions, standardforms, insurance requirements and the like.

Fort Steilacoom Park – Trail Access Upgrades Project DirectoryMarch 16, 2020 Bid Set 000103

PROJECT DIRECTORY 000103 - 1

Project Directory

OWNER:City of LakewoodMary [email protected]) 983-7887

Douglas [email protected](253) 983-7852

LANDSCAPE ARCHITECT:Clayton Beaudoin, PLASite Workshop, LLC3800 Woodland Park Ave N, Suite 200Seattle, WA 98103206.285.3026

CIVIL ENGINEER:Courtney Dale, PEReid Middleton, Inc.728 134th St SW Suite 200Everett, WA 98204-7332425.741.5017

ELECTRICAL ENGINEER:Steven L. Hubbs, PECross Engineers923 Martin Luther King Jr. WayTacoma, WA 98405253.759.0118

ARCHITECT:Geoffrey Piper, RAFivedot1221 E Pike St., Suite 300Seattle, WA 98122206.274.6300

STRUCTURAL ENGINEER:Dan J. Say, PESwenson Say Faget2124 3rd Ave, Suite 100Seattle, WA 98121206.443.6212

Fort Steilacoom Park – Trail Access Upgrades Project DirectoryMarch 16, 2020 Bid Set 000103

PROJECT DIRECTORY 000103 - 2

MECHANICAL ENGINEER:Dylan R. Turner, PEThe Greenbusch Group1900 W Nickerson Street, Suite 201Seattle, WA 98119206.378.0569

Fort Steilacoom Park – Trail Access Upgrades Professional SealsMarch 16, 2020 Bid Documents 000107

PROFESSIONAL SEALS 000107 - 1

LANDSCAPE ARCHITECT:Clayton Beaudoin, PLASite Workshop, LLC3800 Woodland Park Ave N, Suite 200Seattle, WA 98103206.285.3026

DIVISION 01 – General Requirements015639 Temporary Tree and Plant Protection

DIVISION 02 – Existing Conditions024113 Selective Site Demolition

DIVISION 12 – Furnishings129300 Site Furnishings

DIVISION 31 – Earthwork311100 Clearing and Grubbing

DIVISION 32 - Exterior Improvements321313 Concrete Paving321540 Crushed Rock Paving323119 Metal Vehicular Gates323129 Wood Fences 329115 Soil Preparation329200 Turf and Grasses329300 Landscape Planting



ARCHITECT:Geoffrey Piper, RAFivedot1221 E Pike St., Suite 300Seattle, WA 98122206.274.6300

DIVISION 03 – Concrete030013 Building Concrete

DIVISION 05 – Metals051200 Structural Steel Framing055000 Metal Fabrications

DIVISION 06 – Wood and Plastic061000 Rough Carpentry061500 Wood Decking061739 Shop Fabricated Wood Trusses

DIVISION 07 – Thermal and Moisture Protection072700 Weather Resistive Barriers074646 Mineral-Fiber Cement Siding076100 Sheet Metal Roofing076200 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim

Division 08 – Doors and Windows081113 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames087100 Door Hardware087300 Door and Hardware Installation088000 Glazing

Division 09 – Finishes096723 Resinous Flooring097733 Reinforced Plastic Panel Wall Coverings099000 Painting and Coating

Division 10 – Specialties101473 Code Signage102813 Toilet Accessories



108113 Bird Control Devices109013 Miscellaneous Specialties

Fort Steilacoom Park – Trail Access Upgrades Professional Seals

March 16, 2020 Bid Documents 000107


STRUCTURAL ENGINEER:

Dan J. Say, PE

Swenson Say Faget

2124 3rd Ave, Suite 100

Seattle, WA 98121

206.443.6212

Fort Steilacoom Park – Trail Access Upgrades Professional Seals

March 16, 2020 Bid Documents 000107


MECHANICAL ENGINEER:

Dylan R. Turner, PE

The Greenbusch Group

1900 W Nickerson Street, Suite 201

Seattle, WA 98119

206.378.0569

DIVISION 22 – Plumbing

220500 Common Work Results Plumbing

220700 Plumbing Insulation

221000 Domestic Water Piping

223400 Electric Water Heaters

223200 Plumbing Fixtures

DIVISION 23 – HVAC

233100 Air Distribution

Fort Steilacoom Park – Trail Access Upgrades Table of ContentsMarch 16, 2020 Bid Set 000110

TABLE OF CONTENTS 000110 - 1

Division 00 – Procurement and Contracting Requirements000103 Project Directory000107 Professional Seals000110 Table of Contents

Division 01 – General Requirements011100 Summary of Work012300 Price and Payment Procedures013000 Administrative Procedures013100 Project Management & Coordination013300 Submittal Procedures014000 Quality Requirements014200 References015000 Temporary Facilities & Controls015639 Temporary Tree and Plant Protection015713 Temporary Erosion and Sediment Control016000 Product Requirements016300 Product Substitution Request017700 Project Closeout Procedures

Division 02 – Existing Conditions024113 Selective Site Demolition

Division 03 – Concrete030013 Building Concrete

Division 05 – Metals051200 Structural Steel Framing055000 Metal Fabrications

Division 06 – Wood and Plastic061000 Rough Carpentry



061500 Wood Decking061739 Shop Fabricated Wood Trusses

Division 07 – Thermal and Moisture Protection072700 Weather Resistive Barriers074646 Mineral-Fiber Cement Siding076100 Sheet Metal Roofing076200 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim079200 Joint Sealants

Division 08 – Doors and Windows081113 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames087100 Door Hardware087300 Door and Hardware Installation088000 Glazing

Division 09 – Finishes096723 Resinous Flooring097733 Reinforced Plastic Panel Wall Coverings099000 Painting and Coating

Division 10 – Specialties101473 Code Signage102813 Toilet Accessories108113 Bird Control Devices109013 Miscellaneous Specialties

Division 12 – Furnishings129300 Site Furnishings

Division 22 – Plumbing220500 Common Work Results Plumbing



220700 Plumbing Insulation221000 Domestic Water Piping223400 Electric Water Heaters223200 Plumbing Fixtures

Division 23 – HVAC233100 Air Distribution

Division 26 – Electrical260126 Maintenance Testing for Electrical Systems260500 Common Work Results for Electrical Systems260519 Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables260526 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems260533 Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems262416 Panelboards262726 Wiring Devices265000 Lighting

Division 31 – Earthwork311100 Clearing and Grubbing312000 Earth Moving

Division 32 – Exterior Improvements321216 Asphalt Paving321313 Concrete Paving321540 Crushed Rock Paving321610 Cement Concrete Curb321723 Pavement Markings323119 Metal Vehicular Gates323129 Wood Fences 329115 Soil Preparation329200 Turf and Grasses



329300 Landscape Planting

Division 33 – Utilities334000 Storm Drainage Utilities

Fort Steilacoom Park – Trail Access Upgrades Summary of WorkMarch 16, 2020 Bid Set Section 011100

SUMMARY OF WORK 011100 - 1

SECTION 011100 — SUMMARY OF WORK

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes:1. Project information2. Contact award and time of completion3. Work covered by contract documents4. Work under separate contracts5. Future work6. Owner-furnished and Owner-installed products7. Access to site8. Work restrictions9. Specification and drawing conventions10. Use of site by Owner11. Applicable standards12. Existing soils

B. Related Section:1. Section 01500 – Temporary Facilities for limitations and procedures governing temporary

use of Owner's facilities.

C. This Section applies to all Specification Sections and supplements to the General and Supplemental Conditions.

1.2 PROJECT INFORMATION

A. Project Identification: Fort Steilacoom Park – Trail Access Upgrades1. Project Location: 8714 87th Avenue SW, Lakewood, WA 98498

B. Owner: City of Lakewood, 6000 Main Street SW, Lakewood, WA 98499.1. Owner's Representative: Mary Dodsworth; Phone: (253) 589-2489; E-mail:

[email protected].

C. Landscape Architect: Clayton Beaudoin; Phone: (206) 285-3026.

1.3 CONTRACT AWARD AND TIME OF COMPLETION

A. Single Contract Award: It is the Owner's intent to award a single prime contract for the improvements. B. Time of Completion: See Bid Form.

1.4 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

A. The work to be performed under this contract shall include improvements of Fort Steilacoom Park, located at 8714 87th Avenue SW, Lakewood, WA. 98498. Construction includes improvements to the existing park including, but not limited to, erosion and sedimentation control, grading and site preparation, a parking lot with 38 parking stalls, a new restroom and storage facility, roadway surfacing and associated storm drainage and landscape restoration, and all site furnishings including vehicular gates.

mailto:[email protected]



B. Type of Contract:1. Project will be constructed under a single prime contract.

1.5 WORK UNDER SEPARATE CONTRACTS

A. None.

1.6 FUTURE WORK

A. The Contract Documents include requirements that will allow the Owner to carry out future work following completion of this project.

1.7 OWNER-FURNISHED AND OWNER-INSTALLED PRODUCTS

A. Some products and equipment will be furnished and installed by the Owner. Items include, but are not limited to, the following:1. Park Signs2. Padlocks3. New Park Benches

1.8 ACCESS TO SITE

A. General: The trail will be closed but the balance of the park will be kept open. The Contractor shall have full use of the of the project site for construction operations during the construction period.

B. Use of Site: Limit use of Project site to areas within the Contract limits indicated. Do not disturb portions of Project site beyond areas in which the Work is indicated.

1.9 WORK RESTRICTIONS

A. Work Restrictions, General: Comply with restrictions on construction operations.1. Comply with limitations on use of public streets and other requirements of authorities

having jurisdiction.2. Noise Restrictions: Conform to City of Lakewood's residential neighborhood noise

ordinances.

B. On-Site Work Hours: Limit work in the existing building to normal business working hours of 7 a.m. to 6 p.m., Monday through Friday, except as otherwise indicated.

C. Existing Utility Interruptions: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after providing temporary utility services according to requirements indicated:1. Notify Owner not less than five (5) days in advance of proposed utility interruptions.2. Obtain Owner's written permission before proceeding with utility interruptions.

D. Nonsmoking Site: Smoking is not permitted within any City property.

E. Controlled Substances: Use of tobacco products and other controlled substances on the Project site is not permitted.



F. Employee Identification: Provide identification tags for Contractor personnel working on the Project site. Require personnel to utilize identification tags at all times.

1.10 SPECIFICATION AND DRAWING CONVENTIONS

A. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations. These conventions are as follows:1. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications. The

words"shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context, are implied where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase.

2. Specification requirements are to be performed by contractor unless specifically stated otherwise.

B. Division 1 General Requirements: Requirements of Sections in Division 1 of these specifications apply to the Work of all Sections in these Specifications.

C. Drawing Coordination: Requirements for materials and products identified on the Drawings are described in detail in the specifications. One or more of the following are used on the Drawings to identify materials and products:1. Terminology: materials and products are identified by the typical generic terms used

in the individual Specifications Sections.2. Abbreviations: Materials and products are identified by abbreviations scheduled on

Drawings.

1.11 USE OF SITE BY OWNER

A. The park outside of the project limits will be in operation during the project.

B. Do not affect safe and convenient access to any of the facilities at any time.

1.12 APPLICABLE STANDARDS

A. Prior to commencing construction, Contractor shall contact all reviewing agencies, utility companies, and governmental agencies having jurisdiction over the Project site, and obtain all standards and requirements for work that will satisfy those requirements, including purchasing necessary construction permits and being placed on any and all "approved contractors" lists.

1.13 EXISTING SOILS

A. The Contractor shall visit the site prior to bidding to familiarize oneself with the site and soil conditions. Bidders may coordinate with the Owner to excavate their own test holes.

B. It shall be the Contractor's sole responsibility, prior to bidding, to determine what soil conditions may be encountered. Investigation of the soil condition and associated costs by the Contractor shall be considered incidental to the bid price(s).

C. See Appendix for test pit locations and logs.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

Not used.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

Not used.

END OF SECTION 011100

Fort Steilacoom Park – Trail Access Upgrades Price & Payment ProceduresMarch 16, 2020 Bid Set Section 012300

PRICE & PAYMENT PROCEDURES 012300 - 1

SECTION 012300 – PRICE & PAYMENT PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. Bidders shall submit a proposal for the base bid and alternates. The Owner reserves the right to award the base bid only if considered to be in the Owner's best interest. Only basic information concerning Base Bid and Alternates is listed in the proposal. No attempt has been made to list all items or details. Refer to technical sections of the Specifications and Plans for detailed information.

1.2 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. Not used.

1.3 SITE WORK

A. Base Bid:1. Includes all labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals required for completion of the

work drawn and specified, together with the necessary appurtenant work.2. Work not included in the Base Bid: Work noted as "Not in Contract" – abbreviated N.I.C. –

or work included under alternates is not included in the Base Bid.

B. Alternates:1. Additive and deductive alternate bids shall include work described in the proposal and shall

include modifications, adjustments and revisions to the Base Bid or other work necessary to incorporate such alternate work into the project. The sum shown on the Contractor's Proposal shall cover all costs or credits of the work affected by such alternate work to integrate the alternate work in to the completed project.

ADDITIVE ALTERNATE 1 –

Alternate bid includes: Provide unit price for additional double swing gates to replace gates at field / north parking lot and Waughop Lake Trailhead, to be located by owner.

ADDITIVE ALTERNATE 2 –

Alternate bid includes: Provide per gate unit price for decorative concrete pilasters. (2) per gate, one at each gate post. Owner will choose which gates (if any) for selective installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

Not used.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

Not used.

Fort Steilacoom Park – Trail Access Upgrades Price & Payment ProceduresMarch 16, 2020 Bid Set Section 012300

PRICE & PAYMENT PROCEDURES 012300 - 2


Fort Steilacoom Park – Trail Access Upgrades Administrative Procedures

March 16, 2020 Bid Set Section 013000

ADMINISTRATIVE PROCEDURES 013000 - 1

SECTION 013000 – ADMINISTRATIVE PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT

A. Contractor shall familiarize himself thoroughly with all conditions of the specifications, as well as

technical sections.

1.2 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS FOR CONSTRUCTION

A. The Architect will provide the Contractor with an electronic copy of project documents (drawings

and specifications) for construction. Any printing of project documents shall be paid for by the

Contractor.

1.3 PERMITS

A. The Owner will obtain and pay for Site Development Permit. The Owner will apply and pay for

the permit for the restroom. The Contractor shall provide shop drawings and structural

calculations sealed by a Washington licensed engineer and provide any necessary coordination

with the City to obtain the Building Permit for the restroom. The Contractor shall obtain and pay

for any other permits required.

B. The Contractor shall notify the Owner and coordinate with the permitting authority for extension

of all permits that expire prior to final acceptance. The Owner will be responsible for permit fees

and/or related extension costs for the Owner furnished permits only.

C. The Contractor shall comply with the requirements / conditions of the permits.

1.4 SIGNS

A. No signs of contractor, subcontractor, or advertising of any kind are to be erected.

1.5 PROTECTION OF MATERIALS

A. The Contractor is responsible for protection of materials and completed work from vandalism

until the work is accepted.

1.6 DUST CONTROL

A. The Contractor shall be responsible for alleviation or prevention of any dust nuisance arising

from the work on this project, by the use of water or dust palliatives as required and as approved

by the Owner.

1.7 VANDALISM

A. The Contractor is hereby advised to take all lawful and prudent precautions against vandalism on

any work and equipment connected with this project. The Owner will not in any way be held

responsible or accountable for vandalism, either financially or be responsible to repair or replace.




1.8 WEATHER

A. Since work will be done during inclement weather, each bidder shall satisfy himself before

submitting his bid to the hazards likely to arise from weather conditions. Complete weather

records and reports may be obtained from any U.S. Weather Bureau Office. No additional

payment will be made for any conditions caused by inclement weather.

1.9 EROSION CONTROL

A. The Contractor shall be responsible at all times for erosion control during construction and for

repair of any completed work damaged by erosion - until final acceptance.

1.10 MAINTENANCE OF STREETS, UTILITIES, ETC.

A. The Contractor shall be responsible at all times for the maintenance of streets and other utilities

affected by construction operations. Streets and utilities shall be kept in full operation during the

entire course of the project. Debris and rubbish shall not be permitted to accumulate, and all

premises shall be maintained in a neat and workman-like condition, as determined by the Owner.

B. In the event the Contractor fails to conform to these requirements, the Owner shall have the right

to have the work done by others and the cost will be deducted from monies due the Contractor.

1.11 STATE LICENSING LAW

A. The Contractor agrees and covenants to furnish the Owner proper evidence that the Contractor

has fully complied with the State Licensing Law as specified in Chapter 77, Laws of the State of

Washington, of 1963, as amended; and a Contractor's Certificate of Registration shall be in full

force and effect throughout the work project hereinabove enumerated. The contractor shall

include his Contractor’s license number on the space provided in the Proposal Form.

1.12 EXISTING SITE TOPOGRAPHY

A. The existing topography is shown as contour lines and spot elevations as indicated in the legend

on the grading plans. Notify Owner immediately should actual conditions vary significantly from

those shown.

1.13 SURVEY DATA/EXISTING CONDITIONS

A. The Contractor's licensed surveyor shall establish and stake out control points and all coordinate

points provided for the various parts of the work for location, lines, and grades from the base line

as shown on the plans. An electronic file of the layout and grading drawings will be provided to

the surveyor upon request.

1.14 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS

A. The Contractor shall keep one set of drawings and specifications at the site for the purpose of

recording all changes made during construction as changes occur. All changes shall be noted on

the drawings as changes occur.

B. In addition, the drawings and specifications shall be marked to record all materials used where

options or alternates were indicated or specified and dimensional changes made during the course

to the work shall be drawn to scale.




1.15 LIQUIDATED DAMAGES

A. See Bid Form.

1.16 ARTIFACTS

A. Should artifacts of historical significance (i.e. Native American artifacts) be unearthed, stop work

and notify the Owner or the Owner's Representative immediately.

1.17 TOBACCO PRODUCTS, DRUGS, AND ALCOHOL

A. Tobacco products, drugs, and alcohol are strictly prohibited on school property, inside and

outside of buildings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

Not used.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

Not used.


Fort Steilacoom Park – Trail Access Upgrades Project Management & CoordinationMarch 16, 2020 Bid Set Section 013100

PROJECT MANAGEMENT & COORDINATION 013100 - 1

SECTION 013100 - PROJECT MANAGEMENT & COORDINATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Coordination with work by the Owner

B. Coordination.

C. Field engineering.

D. Pre-construction conference.

E. Progress meetings.

F. Pre-installation conferences.

1.2 COORDINATION WITH WORK BY THE OWNER

A. See Parts 1.3 of Section 011100 – Summary of Work.

1.3 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate scheduling, submittals, and Work of the various Sections of Specifications to assure proper, efficient, and orderly sequence of surface preparation and installation of interdependent construction elements, with provisions for accommodating items installed later by Owner.

B. Coordinate completion and clean up of Work of separate sections in preparation for Completion.

C. After Owner occupancy of premises, coordinate access to site for correction of defective Work and Work not in accordance with Contract Documents, to minimize disruption of Owner's activities.

1.4 FIELD ENGINEERING

A. See Parts 1.13 and 1.14 of Section 013000 – Administrative Procedures.

1.5 PRE-CONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE

A. Owner will schedule a conference after Notice of Award.

B. Attendance Required: Owner, Owner's Representative, and Contractor.

C. Agenda:1. Execution of Owner-Contractor Agreement.2. Submission of executed bonds and insurance certificates.3. Distribution of Contract Documents including permit documents and requirements.4. Submission of list of Subcontractors, list of Products, schedule of values, and progress

schedule.



5. Designation of personnel representing the parties in Contract, and the Owner's Representative.

6. Procedures and processing of field decisions, submittals, substitutions, applications for payments, proposal request, Change Orders, and Contract closeout procedures.

7. Inspection Procedure and Testing.8. Scheduling.9. Coordination with Owner.10. Notice to Proceed.

1.6 PROGRESS MEETINGS

A. Owner will schedule and administer meetings throughout progress of the work at weekly intervals.

B. Contractor shall attend meetings.

C. Attendance Required: Job superintendent, major Subcontractors and suppliers, Owner, Owner's Representative, Engineer, as appropriate to agenda topics for each meeting.

D. Agenda:1. Review minutes of previous meetings.2. Review of submittals and status of submittals.3. Review of RFI's (Requests for Information and Status).4. Review of change orders.5. Review of schedule and maintenance of schedule.6. Review plans and specifications related to anticipated work.7. Review of Work progress. Field observations, problems, and decisions.8. Review of as-built drawings9. Other business relating to Work.

1.7 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCES

A. When required in individual specification Section, convene a pre-installation conference at work site prior to commencing work of this Section.

B. Require attendance of parties directly affecting, or affected by, work of the specific section

C. Notify Owner seven (7) days in advance of meeting date.

D. Prepare agenda, preside at conference.

E. Review conditions of installation, preparation, and installation procedures, and coordination with related work.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

Not used.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

Not used.


Fort Steilacoom Park – Trail Access Upgrades Submittal ProceduresMarch 16, 2020 Bid Set Section 013300

SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 1

SECTION 013300 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Submittal procedures.

B. Construction progress schedules.

C. Subcontractor’s list.

D. Shop drawings

E. Product data.

F. Samples.

G. Manufacturer's instructions,

H. Manufacturer's certificates.

1.2 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

A. A list of required submittal items will be provided by the Architect following award of the contract. Transmit each submittal item with the Architects assigned item number written on each copy of each submittal and separate transmittal form included in these specifications.

B. Transmit each submittal with a transmittal form.

C. Identify Project, Contractor, Subcontractor, or Supplier; pertinent Drawing sheet and detail number(s), and specification Section number, as appropriate.

D. Apply Contractor's stamp, signed or initialed certifying that review, verification of Product required, field dimensions, adjacent construction work, and coordination of information is in accordance with the requirements of the work and Contract Documents. This shall be done prior to submitting to Owner’s Representative.

E. Schedule submittals to expedite the Project, and deliver to Owner’s Representative. Coordinate submission of related items. Note: Allow one (1) weeks for the Owner’s Representative to review the submittals from the date they receive the submittal.

F. Identify the appropriate specification section title and number to which the submittal applies, as well as variations from Contract Documents and Product or system limitation that may be detrimental to successful performance of the completed work.

G. Provide space for Contractor and Owner’s Representative review stamps.

H. After review, distribute in accordance with Article on Procedures above and provide copies for Record.



I. Revise and resubmit submittals as required, identifying all changes made since previous submittal.

J. Distribute copies of reviewed submittals to concerned parties. Instruct parties to promptly report any inability to comply with provisions.

1.3 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULES

A. Submit initial progress schedule in duplicate (4 copies) within 5 days after date of Owner-Contractor Agreement, for Owner’s Representative information.

B. Revise and resubmit monthly (with each pay request) 4 copies. Post 1 on site.

C. Submit a time scaled CPM precedence diagram with separate line for each section of Work, identifying first workday of each week.

D. Show complete sequence of construction by activity, identifying Work of separate stages and other logically-grouped activities. Indicate the early and late start, early and late finish, float dates, and duration.

E. Indicate estimated percentage of completion for each item of work at each submission.

F. Indicate submittal dates required for shop drawings, product data, samples, pre-installation meeting and product delivery dates, including those furnished by Owner and under Allowances.

G. If the Contractor submits a schedule which indicates a construction completion date prior to the advertised contract completion date, it is understood that the Owner shall not be obligated for any costs associated with any extensions of the contractor's schedule which is still within the stipulated contract completion period. No contract time extension shall be granted until the contractor demonstrates that the Critical Path is directly impacted, and the construction completion date must be extended past the stipulated contract completion date.

1.4 SUBCONTRACTORS LIST

A. Within 5 days after date of Owner-Contractor Agreement, submit complete list of subcontractors and major material suppliers with addresses and telephone numbers. Use form included in these specifications.

1.5 SHOP DRAWINGS

A. Submit the number of copies that the contractor requires, plus three (3) copies that will be retained by the Owner.

B. After review, reproduce and distribute in accordance with Article on Procedures above and for Record Documents described in Section 01770 – Closeout Procedures.

1.6 PRODUCT DATA

A. Submit all required submittals.



B. Mark each copy to identify applicable specification section title and number, products, models, options, and other data. Supplement manufacturers' standard data to provide information unique to this Project.

1.7 SAMPLES

A. Submit samples to illustrate functional and aesthetic characteristics of the Product, with integral parts and attachment devices. Coordinate sample submittals for interfacing work.

B. Submit samples of finishes from the full range of manufacturers' standard colors and custom colors selected, textures, and patterns for Owner’s Representative’s selection.

C. Include identification on each sample, with full Project information.

D. Submit the number or samples specified in individual specification Sections; one of which will be retained by the Owner’s Representative.

E. Reviewed samples which may be used in the work are indicated in individual specification Sections.

1.8 MANUFACTURERS' INSTRUCTIONS

A. When specified in individual specification Sections, submit manufacturers' printed instructions for delivery, storage, assembly, installation, start-up, adjusting, and finishing, in quantities specified for Product Data.

B. Identify conflicts between manufacturer's instructions and Contract Documents.

1.9 MANUFACTURERS' CERTIFICATES

A. When specified in individual specification Sections, submit manufacturer's certificate to Owner’s Representative for review, in quantities specified for Product Data.

B. Indicate material or Product conforms to or exceeds specified requirements. Submit supporting reference data, affidavits, and certifications as appropriate.

C. Certificates may be recent or previous test results on material or Product, but must be acceptable to Owner’s Representative.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

Not used.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

Not used.


SUBMITTAL TRANSMITTAL

TransmittalA

To:

From: (Contractor)AddressCity, State, Zip

By:

Project: Date:

A/E Project Number:

Resubmission

Qty. Item No. DescriptionSpec. Section Title and Paragraph /Drawing Detail Reference

Submitted for review and approval Substitution involved – Substitution request attached with point-by-point comparative data or preliminary details.

Resubmitted for review and approval

Will be available to meet construction scheduleComplies with contract requirements

One copy retained by sender

Other remarks on above submission:

Transmittal To: (Contractor) Attn: Date Received by A/E:B

From: By: Date Transmitted by A/E:

Approved Approved as noted / Resubmit

Approved as noted Rejected / Resubmit

Not subject to review Revise / Resubmit

No action required Submission Incomplete / Resubmit

Other remarks on above submission:

Copies: Owner Consultants One copy retained by sender

SUBCONTRACTORS AND MAJOR MATERIALS SUPPLIERS LIST

Project: From (Contractor):

To:

Date:

A/E Project Number:

Contract For:

List Subcontractors and Major Material Suppliers proposed for use on this Project as required by the Construction Documents. Attach supplemental sheets if necessary.

Section Section PhoneNumber Title Firm Address Number Contact E-Mail Address

Attachments

Signed by: Date: ________________________

Copies: Owner Consultants File

Fort Steilacoom Park – Trail Access Upgrades Quality RequirementsMarch 16, 2020 Bid Set Section 014000

QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000 - 1

SECTION 014000 – QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Quality Assurance/Control of Installation

B. References.

C. Inspection and Testing Laboratory Services.

1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE/CONTROL OF INSTALLATION

A. Monitor quality control over suppliers, manufacturers, products, services, site conditions, and workmanship, to produce Work of specified quality.

B. Comply fully with manufacturer's instructions, including each step in sequence.

C. Should manufacturer's instructions conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Owner’s Representative before proceeding.

D. Comply with specified standards as a minimum quality for the Work except when more stringent tolerances, codes, or specified requirements indicate higher standards or more precise workmanship.

E. Perform work by persons qualified to produce workmanship of specified quality.

F. Secure Products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized to withstand stresses, vibration, physical distortion, or disfigurement.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. Conform to reference standard by date of issue current on date for receiving bids.

B. Should specified reference standards conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Owner’s Representative before proceeding.

C. The contractual relationship of the parties to the Contract shall not be altered from the Contract Documents by mention or inference otherwise in any reference document.

1.4 INSPECTION AND TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES

A. Owner will appoint, employ, and pay for services of an independent firm to perform inspection and testing of subgrade and crushed rock, concrete, and asphalt, and other work requested by the owner.

B. That independent firm will perform inspections, tests, and other services except those specifically required of the Contractor in individual specification Sections.

Fort Steilacoom Park – Trail Access Upgrades Quality RequirementsMarch 16, 2020 Bid Set Section 014000

QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000 - 2

C. Reports will be submitted by the independent firm to the Owner’s Representative and Owner indicating observations and results of tests and indicating compliance or noncompliance with Contract Documents.

D. Cooperate with independent firm; furnish samples of materials, design mix, equipment, tools, storage, and assistance as requested.1. Notify Owner’s Representative and independent firm 24 hours prior to expected time for

operations requiring service.2. Make arrangements with independent firm and pay for additional samples and tests beyond

the Owner’s use required for Contractor's use.

E. Re-testing and site visits required because of nonconformance to specified requirements and scheduling shall be performed by the same independent firm on instructions by the Owner’s Representative. Payment for redesign and site visits will be charged by the Owner to the Contractor by deducting inspection or testing charges from the Contract Sum/Price.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

Not used.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

Not used.


Fort Steilacoom Park – Trail Access Upgrades ReferencesMarch 16, 2020 Bid Set Section 014200

REFERENCES 014200 - 1

SECTION 014200 – REFERENCES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 NUMBER OF SPECIFIED ITEMS REQUIRED

A. Wherever these specifications, an article, device, or piece of equipment is referred to in the singular number, such reference applies to all and as many such articles as are shown on the drawings, or required to complete the installation.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. "Owner:" City of Lakewood or their representative.

B. "Owner's Representative" (Architect, Engineer, Landscape Architect): an employee of or consultant to the City of Lakewood.

C. "Provide" shall mean "furnish and install" or "furnish labor and materials required for installation, ready for use, and under the terms of the contract drawings." "As shown," "as indicated," "as detailed," "as noted," or words of similar meaning refer to contract drawings.

D. "The work" means "the work to be accomplished under this contract."

E. "Approved" means "approved by the owner or designated authority." "For approval" means "for owner approval, or designated authority."

F. Where the words "or equal" are used, the Owner is the sole judge of the quality and suitability of the proposed substitution.

G. The term "products" means new material, machinery, components, equipment, fixtures, and systems forming the Work. It does not include machinery and equipment used for preparation, fabrication, conveying, and erection of the Work. "Products" may also include existing materials or components required for reuse.

1.3 ABBREVIATIONS

A. See Legends on the Contract Drawings.

1.4 ORGANIZATION OF SPECIFICATIONS

A. Divisions and sections of these specifications conform generally to customary trade practice. They are intended for convenience only. The Owner and Owner's Representative are not bound to define the limits of any subcontract.

1.5 DIMENSIONS AND MEASUREMENTS

A. Dimensions govern. Do not scale drawings, unless so indicated on the plans. Check all dimensions in the field and verify them with respect to the adjacent or incorporated work.

Fort Steilacoom Park – Trail Access Upgrades ReferencesMarch 16, 2020 Bid Set Section 014200

REFERENCES 014200 - 2

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

Not used.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

Not used.


Fort Steilacoom Park – Trail Access Upgrades Temporary Facilities & ControlsMarch 16, 2020 Bid Set Section 015000

TEMPORARY FACILITIES & CONTROLS 015000 - 1

SECTION 015000 – TEMPORARY FACILITIES & CONTROLS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 CONTRACTOR'S WORK

A. All work specified under this Section shall be provided by the Contractor.

1.2 TEMPORARY POWER

A. Contractor to provide sufficient electric power of capacity necessary and make it available to all those connected with the work. The Contractor is to pay for all temporary transformers, lines, poles, meters, and other changes and all charges connected with the use of the permanent facilities until accepted by the Owner. All costs and other charges in providing electric power to be paid by Contractor until acceptance of project by Owner.

1.3 TEMPORARY TELEPHONE SERVICE

A. Provide a list of and contact information for all key personnel.

1.4 TEMPORARY DRINKING WATER

A. Make necessary arrangements and provide drinking water from a proven safe source required during entire construction period. Comply with state and local health requirements. Serve in single service containers or sanitary drinking fountain.

1.5 WATER FOR CONSTRUCTION

A. Contractor to provide water and make it available to all those connected with the work. Obtain a temporary hydrant permit if required--if any hydrants are used. Water used to construct the site shall be metered and paid by the contractor.

1.6 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES

A. Provide adequate toilet facilities for all those connected with work. Locate inside the construction area and keep in sanitary condition. Remove when directed by Owner and disinfect premises.

1.7 TEMPORARY SHEDS

A. Construct and maintain such temporary sheds as may be required for the use of workmen, for tool cribs, and for the storage of materials, project plans and documents.

B. Provide temporary light in all areas of the sheds. All sheds shall be maintained at all times in good repair and in a clean and sanitary condition. Upon completion of the work, all sheds shall be removed and the premises cleaned.

Fort Steilacoom Park – Trail Access Upgrades Temporary Facilities & ControlsMarch 16, 2020 Bid Set Section 015000

TEMPORARY FACILITIES & CONTROLS 015000 - 2

1.8 STAGING AREA

A. The Contractor staging area to be agreed upon by the Contractor and the Owner. Submit a proposed location to the Owner for approval. All disturbed areas shall be cleaned up, fine graded, seeded, and otherwise restored to its original condition as determined by the Owner.

1.9 FIELD OFFICE

A. The Contractor shall provide a substantial, weather-tight office building capable of seating a minimum of 10 people on the premises adjacent to the staging area. The field office shall remain on site through substantial completion. Remove office at completion of work.

1.10 DAILY CLEAN UP

A. See General Conditions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

Not used.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

Not used.


Fort Steilacoom Park – Trail Access Upgrades Temporary Tree and Plant ProtectionMarch 16, 2020 Bid Set Section 015639

TEMPORARY TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION 015639 - 1

SECTION 015639 – TEMPORARY TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, and other Division 01 Specification Sections of these Technical Specifications, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Work of this Section consists of the protection, trimming, and maintenance of existing trees, shrubs, and groundcover that interfere with or are affected by execution of the Work, whether temporary or permanent construction.

B. Related Documents and Sections: Examine Contract Documents for requirements that directly affect or are affected by Work of this Section. A list of those Documents and Sections include, but is not limited to the following:1. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary

Conditions and General Requirements, DIVISION 01 Specification Sections.2. Section 011000 "Summary" for limits placed on Contractor's use of the site.3. Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls".

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Tree Protection Zone: Area surrounding individual trees or groups of trees to remain during construction, and defined by critical root zone of individual trees or the perimeter critical root zone of groups of trees, unless otherwise indicated.1. Critical Root Zone is defined as the area equal to one foot for every inch of tree diameter-

at-breast-height or otherwise determined by a qualified arborist.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Tree Pruning Schedule: Written schedule from arborist detailing scope and extent of pruning trees to remain that interfere with or are affected by construction.

C. Qualification Data: For tree service firm and arborist.

D. Certification: From arborist, certifying that trees indicated to remain have been protected during construction according to recognized standards and that trees were promptly and properly treated and repaired when damaged.

E. Maintenance Recommendations: From arborist, for care and protection of trees affected by construction during and after completing the Work.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Field review all trees and plants to be protected that have been tagged or designated by Architect. Plants to protect will be indicated on the Drawings.



B. Before tree protection and trimming operations begin, meet with representatives of authorities having jurisdiction, Owner, Architect, consultants, and other concerned entities to review tree protection and trimming procedures and responsibilities.

C. Tree Service Firm Qualifications: An experienced tree service firm that has successfully completed tree protection and trimming work similar to that required for this Project and that will assign an experienced, qualified arborist to Project site during execution of tree protection and trimming.

D. Arborist Qualifications: An arborist certified by ISA or licensed in the jurisdiction where Project is located. Engage arborist prior to commencement of demolition work.

E. Tree Pruning Standard: Comply with ANSI A300 (Part 1), "Tree, Shrub, and Other Woody Plant Maintenance--Standard Practices (Pruning)."

F. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Drainage Fill: Selected crushed stone, or crushed or uncrushed gravel, washed, ASTM D 448, Size 24, with 90 to 100 percent passing a 2-1/2-inch sieve and not more than 10 percent passing a 3/4-inch sieve.

B. Planting Soil: Refer to Section 32 93 00 “Landscape Planting” and Section 32 91 15 “Soil Preparation”.

C. Filter Fabric: Manufacturer's standard, nonwoven, pervious, geotextile fabric of polypropylene, nylon, or polyester fibers. Mirafi N-Series or Approved Equal.

D. Chain-Link Fence: Metallic-coated steel chain-link fence fabric of 0.120-inch- diameter wire; a minimum of 6 feet high; with 1.9-inch- diameter line posts; 2-3/8-inch- diameter terminal and corner posts; 1-5/8-inch diameter top rail; and 0.177-inch-diameter bottom tension wire; with tie wires, hog ring ties, and other accessories for a complete fence system.

E. Treatment Materials:1. Anti-dessicant: ‘Wiltpruf’ as manufactured by Wiltpruf Products, Inc. P.O. Box 4280,

Greenwich, CT 06830, (203) 531-4740, or equal. 2. Hog fuel: wood chips free of non-wood material. 3. Wetting Agent: PHC BioPak™ with Yuccah™.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Temporary Fencing: Install temporary fencing around tree protection zones to protect remaining trees and vegetation from construction damage. Refer to tree protection details for fence location



requirements. Review fence locations with Owner and Arborist prior to installation. Maintain temporary fence and remove when construction is complete.1. Install chain-link fence according to ASTM F 567 and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Protect tree root systems from damage caused by runoff or spillage of noxious materials while mixing, placing, or storing construction materials. Protect root systems from ponding, eroding, or excessive wetting caused by dewatering operations.

C. Where clearing and grubbing has been directed within tree protection zones, place 4- to 6-inch thick layer of mulch within drip line of trees to remain.1. Do not place mulch over existing vegetation in tree protection zones that have not been

cleared and grubbed. 2. Do not place mulch within 6 inches of tree trunks.3. Mulch to be wood chips created from clearing and grubbing operation, hog fuel, or as

approved.

D. Maintain tree protection zones free of weeds and trash.

E. Do not allow fires within tree protection zones.

3.2 WORK WITHIN DRIPLINE

A. Where work must occur within the tree protection zone, the Contractor shall employ all methods to minimize adverse impact to these existing trees including limbs and roots. These methods include but are not limited to:1. Temporary chain link construction fencing.2. Temporary tie-up of low limbs.3. Application of a 4- to 6-inch thick layer of mulch (or wood chips salvaged from clearing

and grubbing operations) within the drip-line of trees.4. Timber or steel planking for protection of surface roots from Equipment.5. Tree root pruning or other tree root treatment as directed by the Landscape Architect

and/or Urban Forester.

B. The Contractor shall notify the Landscape Architect of any construction work within the drip-line of trees at least (5) Working Days before the scheduled activity.

C. No storage of equipment or materials shall be allowed within the dripline of trees not designated for removal. Steel planking, or timber planking made of 4-inch thick material, each plank covering a minimum of 8 square feet, shall be used to support backhoe and other Equipment stabilizers when set within the drip-line of a tree to remain.

D. Pavement removal and placement operations that occur within the dripline shall be reviewed, approved, and performed under the supervision of Arborist.

3.3 EXCAVATION AROUND TREES

A. Where trenching for utilities is required within drip line, tunnel under or around roots by hand digging. Do not cut main lateral roots or tap roots. The Contractor shall notify the Owner’s representative prior to cutting roots over 3/4” in diameter. Certified arborist shall cut roots larger than 3/4”. Contractor may be allowed to prune roots with approval and direction from certified arborist.



B. Do not leave roots exposed to sun or drying for more than 24 hours. Protect all exposed roots with moist soil backfill as soon as possible.

C. Where excavating for new construction is required within drip line of tree, excavate by hand to minimize damage to roots and perform as follows:1. Use narrow tine spading forks and comb soil to expose roots.2. If main lateral roots are immediately adjacent to location of new construction cut roots

three (3) inches from new construction.3. Do not allow exposed roots to dry out before permanent backfill is placed.4. Provide temporary earth cover, or pack with peat moss and wrap with burlap.5. Water and maintain in moist condition until covered with backfill.

D. Air spading1. Engage a certified arborist to air spade. Air spade to decompact soils for existing trees and

new understory plantings. 2. Amend with materials per plans and Soils specification.

3.4 REGRADING

A. Grade Lowering: Where new finish grade is indicated below existing grade around trees, slope grade away from trees as recommended by Arborist.1. Root Pruning: Prune tree roots exposed during grade lowering. Do not cut main lateral

roots or taproots; cut only smaller roots. Cut roots with sharp pruning instruments; do not break or chop.

B. Minor Fill: Where existing grade is 6 inches or less below elevation of finish grade, fill with topsoil. Place topsoil in a single uncompacted layer and hand grade to required finish elevations.

3.5 TRIMMING OF EXISTING TREES

A. General: Engage a qualified arborist to selectively remove branches from trees. Do not prune unless approved and directed by the Owner’s representative.

B. Pruning: Cut branches with sharp pruning instruments and do no break or chop. Prune to outside edge of branch collar per ANSI pruning standards.

3.6 TREE REPAIR AND REPLACEMENT

A. Plant material protected within fencing that becomes damaged or dies shall be replaced with plant material of the same species and equal size.

B. Contractor to engage and pay for a certified and licensed arborist to perform tree repair work damaged by construction operations. Make repairs promptly after damage occurs to prevent progressive deterioration of damaged trees.

C. Damaged and destroyed trees which cannot be replaced shall be paid for at the rate of $50.00 per square inch of cross sectional area measured three (3) feet above existing grade for trees up to and including six (6) inch caliper. This amount shall be credited to the Owner. Remove any damaged and destroyed trees from the site as determined by the arborist to be incapable of restoration to a normal growth pattern. Grub stumps and repair the ground surface. All costs shall be borne by the Contractor. For trees greater than six (6) inch caliper and cannot be replaced, the



Owner shall be credited the appraised value as determined by the International Society of Arboriculture’s “Guide for Plant Appraisal.”

D. Replacement plants shall be in good health and approved by Owner before installation.

3.7 IRRIGATION OF TREES DURING CONSTRUCTION

A. Ensure trees are irrigated during construction to maintain health of the tree.

B. Contractor to establish temporary automatic irrigation system. Temporary system may tie into adjacent Owner irrigation mainlines. System to be “Design Build” and shall operate through the duration of construction.

C. Water trees deeply at regular intervals and a minimum of once every two weeks during the growing season (March through October). The water should penetrate the soil to a depth of at least six (6) inches.

D. Take necessary precautions to prevent over-watering, excessive runoff, and erosion from occurring.

E. Do not irrigate if specified irrigation requirements occur naturally through rainfall.


Fort Steilacoom Park – Trail Access Upgrades Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control


TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL 015713 - 1

SECTION 015713 – TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Silt control measures.

2. Maintaining, monitoring, and supplementing silt control.

3. Stormwater runoff control measures.

4. Sawcutting and surfacing pollution prevention measures.

5. Temporary construction entrance.

B. Related Sections

1. Section 312000 – Earth Moving

2. Section 334000 – Storm Drainage

1.2 REFERENCES

A. City of Lakewood Engineering Standards Manual, 2019 Edition.

B. WSDOT Standard Specifications - Washington State Department of Transportation 2018

Standard Specifications for Road, Bridge, and Municipal Construction.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Grit: Soil particle sizes sand and larger per Unified Soil Classification System, ASTM D2487

and ASTM D2488.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Comply with Section 013300.

B. Product Submittals: Product catalog cuts for products in this section; silt fence, protective orange

fencing.

C. Aggregate Materials: Quarry spalls.

1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. Comply with City of Lakewood standards and requirements.

B. Comply with state of Washington Department of Ecology NPDES General Permit for

Construction.

1.6 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING

A. Install erosion control measures in Work areas before any clearing, grubbing, demolition, general

site grading, or other construction in area. Install and remove erosion control items at various

times throughout the duration of the project in coordination with sequencing of the Work.




PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Filter Fabric for Silt Fence: Per WSDOT Standard Specifications Section 9-33, Temporary Silt

Fence, (Table 6).

B. Straw Mulching: Per WSDOT Standard Specifications Section 9-14.4(1).

C. Polyethylene (PE) Sheeting: Per WSDOT Standard Specifications Section 9-14.5(3).

D. Quarry Spalls: Per WSDOT Standard Specifications Section 9-13.1(5).

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify survey benchmarks, property corners, horizontal control and intended elevations for the

Work are as indicated.

B. Identify existing survey monuments, benchmarks, and survey control points that may be

disturbed by Work.

C. Verify vegetation to remain is protected and prominently marked.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Locate existing utilities; avoid damage or disturbance. Call “811” service 48 hours (two working

days) before beginning construction.

B. Employ and pay for a locator service to locate and mark utilities in addition to “811” service.

C. Survey limits of Work to install silt fence.

D. Protect and maintain existing utilities that are to remain.

E. Identify existing and proposed structural foundations near excavations. Verify excavation will

not undermine footings or supports and cause damage to structures.

F. Protect pavement or paved areas intended to remain from damage.

G. Perform demolition, clearing, or other work required to installing erosion control.

3.3 CONSTRUCTION

A. Silt Fence: Field adjust location to perimeter of clearing and stripping. Location shown on

Drawings is schematic. Cast trench excavation soils from fence installation to construction side

of fence. Overlap filter fabric fence joints minimum 1 foot before backfilling trench. Seal joints

to ensure runoff passes through fabric.




B. Polyethylene (PE) Sheeting:

1. Overlap joints minimum 28 inches. Overlap in direction of drainage and prevent water

from draining onto material being protected.

2. Secure sheeting in place to prevent movement and damage.

3. Provide sandbags at 2.5 feet spacing. Tie sandbags together with rope on slopes greater

than 4:1.

4. Minimize driving stakes through plastic.

C. Mulch: Mulch exposed soils not protected by other means with straw mulching. Provide

continuous covering minimum 2 inches thick.

3.4 ADJUSTMENTS AND REVISIONS

A. Adjust or move silt fences as necessary during construction.

B. Move, reconstruct, or replace erosion and sediment control measures as necessary to maintain

removal of sediment.

3.5 PROTECTION AND MAINTENANCE

A. Protection:

1. Where possible, maintain natural vegetation for silt control.

2. Prevent silt-laden water from leaving site or from entering off-site storm sewer systems.

3. Stabilize slopes, cut, or fill areas where Work stops for more than 30 calendar days by

covering with PE sheeting or other method to prevent erosion and sediment transport.

4. Keep off-site adjacent parking areas and access roads clean from construction activities.

Paved surfaces shall be kept clean using mechanical sweeping equipment, hand shovels,

brooms, or other accepted methods suitable for removing dirt, rock, silt, and sand. No

street washing is allowed.

B. Supplementary Measures: Provide additional silt control and temporary erosion control measures

as required to protect soils and prevent silt-laden runoff from leaving Project site.

C. Maintenance:

1. Monitor and maintain silt control measures. Remove accumulations of sediment when

more than 50 percent of silt storage capacity is filled.

2. Maintain temporary erosion control facilities until need for each facility is replaced by

other stabilization methods and Owner authorizes removal.

3. Inspect and repair temporary erosion control facilities. Inspect entire system to ensure

proper operation a minimum of once per week, during and after storms, and before

weekends and holidays.

3.6 CLEAN UP

A. Obtain Owner’s approval for final removal of silt control. Remove erosion control measures

after permanent erosion control is complete and risk for silt erosion and silt-laden runoff is past.

Dispose of material and debris at Contractor provided disposal site

B. Restore site improvements to remain.


Fort Steilacoom Park – Trail Access Upgrades Product RequirementsMarch 16, 2020 Bid Set Section 016000

PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000 - 1

SECTION 016000 – PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Products.

B. Transportation and handling.

C. Storage and protection.

D. Product options.

E. Substitutions.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 01400 – Quality Requirements.

1.3 PRODUCTS

A. Products: Means new material, machinery, components, equipment, fixtures, and systems forming the Work. Does not include machinery and equipment used for preparation, fabrication, conveying, and erection of the Work. Products may also include existing materials or components required for reuse.

B. Provide interchangeable components of the same manufacturer, for similar components.

1.4 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING

A. Transport and handle Products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Promptly inspect shipments to assure that Products comply with requirements, quantities are correct, and Products are undamaged.

C. Provide equipment and personnel to handle Products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement, or damage.

1.5 STORAGE AND PROTECTION

A. Store and protect Products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, with seals and labels intact and legible. Store sensitive Products in weather-tight, climate-controlled enclosures.

B. For exterior storage of fabricated products, place on sloped supports, above ground.

C. Provide off-site storage and protection when site does not permit on-site storage or protection.

D. Cover Products subject to deterioration with impervious sheet covering. Provide ventilation to avoid condensation.



E. Store loose granular materials on solid flat surfaces in a well-drained area. Prevent mixing with foreign matter.

F. Provide equipment and personnel to store Products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement, or damage.

G. Arrange storage of Products to permit access for inspection. Periodically inspect to assure Products are undamaged and are maintained under specified conditions.

1.6 PRODUCT OPTIONS

A. Products Specified by Reference Standards or by Description Only: Any Product meeting those standards or descriptions.

B. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers with or without a Provision for Substitutions: Submit a request for substitution for any manufacturer not named.

1.7 SUBSTITUTIONS

A. The Owner's representative will consider requests for Substitutions up to five (5) days prior to bid opening date. Approved Substitutions will be listed on Addenda.

B. Substitutions may be considered after bid opening only when a Product becomes unavailable through no fault of the Contractor.

C. Document each request with complete data substantiating compliance of proposed Substitution with Contract Documents.

D. A request constitutes a representation that the Bidder/Contractor:1. Has investigated proposed substitution Product and determined that it meets or exceeds the

quality level of the specified Product.2. Will provide the same warranty for the substitution as for the specified Product.3. Will coordinate installation and make changes to other work that may be required for the

Work to be complete with no additional cost to Owner.4. Waives claims for additional costs or time extension that may subsequently become

apparent.5. Will reimburse Owner for review or redesign services associated with re-approval by

authorities.

E. Substitutions will not be considered when they are indicated or implied on shop drawing or product data submittals.

F. Substitution Submittal Procedure:1. All substitution requests shall be accompanied with the Substitution Request Form,

completely filled out. Substitution Request Forms are found in the Specifications in Section 016300 – Product Substitution Request.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

Not used.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

Not used.


Fort Steilacoom Park – Trail Access Upgrades Product Substitution RequestMarch 16, 2020 Bid Set Section 016300

PRODUCT SUBSTITUTION REQUEST 016300 - 1

SECTION 016300 – PRODUCT SUBSTITUTION REQUEST

TO:

PROJECT NAME:

CONTRACTOR:

We hereby submit for consideration the following product instead of specified item for above project:

Section Paragraph Specified Item

Proposed Substitution:

Attach complete dimensional information and technical data, including laboratory tests, if applicable.

Include complete information on changes to Drawings and/or Specifications which proposed substitution will require for its proper installation.

Submit with request all necessary samples and substantiating data to prove equal quality, performance, and appearance to that which is specified. Clearly mark manufacturer's literature to indicate equality performance. Differences in quality of materials and construction shall be indicated.

Fill in blanks below:

A. Reason for substitution request:

B. Does the substitution affect dimensions shown on Drawings: Yes No If yes, clearly indicate changes.

C. Will the undersigned pay for changes to the design, including engineering and detailing costs caused by the request substitution:

Yes No Comment:

Fort Steilacoom Park – Trail Access Upgrades Product Substitution RequestMarch 16, 2020 Bid Set Section 016300

PRODUCT SUBSTITUTION REQUEST 016300 - 2

D. What affect does this substitution have on other trades, other Contracts, and Contract completion date:

E. What affect does this substitution have an applicable code requirements:

F. Differences between proposed substitution and specified item:

G. Manufacturer's guarantee of the proposed and specified items are:Same Different (explain): H. List of names and addresses of three similar projects on which product was used, date of installation, andArchitect's name and address:

I. Cost and supplier of specified product: _________________________________________________

J. Cost and supplier of proposed substitution product: _______________________________________

The undersigned attests function and quality equivalent or superior to specified items.

CERTIFICATION OF EQUAL PERFORMANCE FOR USE BY OWNER’S REPRESENTATIVE: AND ASSUMPTION OF LIABILITY FOR Accepted: EQUAL PERFORMANCE. Accepted as Noted:

Not Accepted: Submitted By: Received Too Late:

By: Signature Title Date:

Remarks: ________________________________Firm

Address

Telephone

Date

Signature must be by person having authority to legally bind his firm to the above term.

Concurrence by Owner’s Representative: _____________________________________________________

Fort Steilacoom Park – Trail Access Upgrades Project Closeout ProceduresMarch 16, 2020 Bid Set Section 017700

PROJECT CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700 - 1

SECTION 017700 – PROJECT CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED

A. Related Requirements.

B. Closeout Procedures.

C. Certification that Work is Complete.

D. Final Statement of Acceptance.

E. Maintenance Materials.

F. Certification of Required Training

G. Project Record Documents.

H. Maintenance Data Binder.

I. Warranties and Bonds.

J. Final Cleaning.

1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. General Conditions: Fiscal provisions, legal submittals, and other administrative requirements.

B. Section 015000 – Temporary Facilities and Controls: Cleaning during construction.

1.3 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

A. Comply with procedures stated in General Requirements (General Provisions – Construction) of the Contract for issuance of Certificate of Substantial Completion. Upon issuance of Certificate of Substantial Completion, the Contractor shall complete all punch lists within thirty (30) consecutive days from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Owner will occupy designated portion of Project for the purpose of conduct of business, under provision stated in Certificate of Substantial Completion.

1.4 CERTIFICATION THAT WORK IS COMPLETE

A. When Contractor considers Work has reached final completion, submit written certification that Contract Documents have been reviewed, Work has been inspected, and that Work is complete in accordance with Contract Documents and ready for Owner’s Representative’s inspection.



1.5 FINAL STATEMENT OF ACCEPTANCE

A. In addition to submittals required by the conditions of the Contract, provide submittals required by governing authorities, and submit a final statement of accounting giving total adjusted Contract Sum, previous payments, and sum remaining due.

B. Owner will issue a final Change Order reflecting approved adjustments to Contract Sum not previously made by Change Order.

1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS

A. Provide products, spare parts, and maintenance materials in quantities specified in each Section, in addition to that used for construction of Work. Coordinate with Owner, deliver to Project site and obtain receipt prior to final payment.

1.7 CERTIFICATION OF REQUIRED TRAINING

A. Certification that all required training of Owner's maintenance and operating personnel has been completed.

1.8 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

A. General:1. Store project Record Documents separate from those used for construction.2. Keep documents current; Record information concurrently with construction progress, do

not conceal any work until required information is recorded.3. Record final information by transferring information onto one (1) clean set of construction

drawings and in a copy of a Project Manual provided by the Owner.4. Provide felt tip marking pens, maintaining separate colors for each major system, for

recording information on copies of construction drawings used during the course of construction.

5. Record information concurrently with construction progress. Do not conceal any work until required information is recorded.

6. Review the as-built drawings with the Owner’s Representative to review accuracy and completeness. Make revisions as required.

B. Submit Record Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings: Legibly mark each item to record actual construction, including:1. Measured depths of elements.2. Measured horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities and appurtenances,

referenced to permanent surface improvements.3. Measured locations of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed on construction,

referenced to visible and accessible features of construction.4. Field changes of dimension and detail.5. Changes made by Modifications.6. Details not on original Contract Drawings.

C. Submit Record Specifications: Legibly mark each item to record actual construction, including:1. Manufacturer, trade name, and catalog number of each Substitute item.2. Changes made by Addenda and Modifications.



1.9 MAINTENANCE DATA BINDER

A. Submit four (4) sets prior to final inspection, bound in 8-1/2 x 11 inch (216 x 279 mm) three-ring hard cover side binders with clear view, and durable plastic covers with title inserts.1. Part 1: Directory, listing names, addresses, and telephone numbers of:

a. Owner, Architect, and Contractor.b. Subcontractors and Suppliers.

2. Part 2: Tab each specification section/product as specified in the technical sections and in Division 1-General Requirements:a. Name, address, phone number of contractor/supplier.b. Written warranties (see 1.10).c. Maintenance instructions.d. Parts lists.e. Instructions and operation manuals.

B. Submit material prior to final application for payment. For equipment put into use with Owner's permission during construction, submit within ten (10) days after first operation. For items of Work delayed materially beyond Date of Substantial Completion, provide updated submittal within ten (10) days after acceptance, listing date of acceptance as start of Warranty period.

1.10 WARRANTIES AND BONDS

A. Manufacturer, Supplier, Subcontractor Warranties & Bonds1. Provide duplicate, notarized copies executed by subcontractors, suppliers, and

manufacturers.2. Warranty to include the periods of time specified, beginning from date of substantial

completion. Warranty letter to be substantially as follows:

(Owner)(Address) RE: (Project)

Gentlemen:We as Subcontractor and Contractor, do hereby warrant for a period of ( ) year(s) from the date of substantial completion that portion of the work incorporated in the project by (subcontractor) as described below:

( )

We will remedy at our expense any defects appearing during that period due to poor or defective materials and/or workmanship and will pay for any damage resulting from occurrence of said defects of the correction of same.

This warranty shall not be interpreted as holding the Contractor responsible for normal wear or any deterioration of work due to abuse of the work by the Owner.

Sincerely,_____________________________________ Subcontractor_____________________________________Contractor



1.11 FINAL CLEANING

A. Execute prior to final inspection by Owner.

B. Clean interior and exterior surfaces exposed to view; remove temporary labels, stains, and foreign substances, polish transparent and glossy surfaces. Clean equipment and fixtures to a sanitary condition, clean or replace filters of mechanical equipment. Clean drainage systems and structures.

C. Clean site; sweep paved areas, rake clean other surfaces.

D. Legally dispose of all debris and construction materials not retained by Owner, off site. Owner shall review final cleaning for approval.

1.12 FINAL INSPECTION

A. After final cleaning the contractor shall call for final inspection.

B. The architect will provide a punch list of incomplete or unacceptable items.

C. Once the contractor has completed the punch list corrections the contractor shall request a follow up inspection. Any items still found incomplete or unacceptable will be corrected within 7 working days.

D. The punch list correction must be completed within the contract time of completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

Not used.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

Not used.


Fort Steilacoom Park – Trail Access Upgrades Selective Site DemolitionMarch 16, 2020 Bid Set Section 024113

SELECTIVE SITE DEMOLITION 024113 - 1

SECTION 024113 – SELECTIVE SITE DEMOLITION

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:1. Selective Demolition of sidewalks, cast-in-place concrete, utilities, utility structures, piping

and other appurtenances.


A. In addition to the Sections listed below, all work of the Contract shall be performed in compliance with the requirements of this Section.

Section 01 50 00 - Temporary Facilities and ControlSection 01 56 39 - Temporary Tree & Plant Protection

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE & SUBMITTALS

A. For the handling and disposal of Hazardous and/or Dangerous Waste materials the following requirements shall apply:

B. The Contractor’s disposal company and transporter shall have their TSD State and Federal Waste Generation ID’s and shall be currently certified to handle the specified waste substances.

C. The Contractor or disposal sub-contractor shall be capable of both recycling of usable materials and recovery/disposal of Hazardous/Dangerous Waste substances.

1.4 PAYMENT & MEASUREMENT

A. The City of Lakewood standard requirement for HazMat transactions is one-third of the payment will be withheld until all required paperwork is received.

1.5 EXISTING CONDITIONS

A. Underground utilities and elements: Locate all underground utilities and elements prior to digging and/or driving stakes. Take care, to neither disturb nor damage any existing above ground or underground utilities or elements. The Contractor shall call Utility Notification Center @ (811) or (800) 424-5555 or click www.callbeforeyoudig.org for utility location at or near the Public Rights-of-Way / Property Lines, and can also call Locating, Inc. @ (425) 392-6412, CNI @ (206) 255-8650 or Applied Professional Services @ (425) 313-1034 for location of utilities within the site. (Note: these firms will charge for services rendered). The Contractor shall pay for all fees and costs associated with utility disconnect, capping of lines and meter removals required within the Public Rights-of-Way.

B. The Contractor shall meet with the Engineer to verify location of utilities with the Contractor’s location services. To make arrangements the Contractor shall contact the City of Lakwood’s

http://www.callbeforeyoudig.org/



Project Manager to request the meeting and also arrange for underground utility location services.Verify that all appropriate services have been disconnected.

C. Utility Shutoffs: Coordinate all work with other Division 01 requirements. Do not shut off or cap utilities without prior notice. Keep streets, sidewalks and site clean and free from debris at all times. Keep both street and site drainage systems open for free passage of runoff at all times. Provide siltation control and catch basin protection as required by Best Managements Practices and Drainage Codes as required and/or directed by the Engineer.

D. Objectionable Noises: Limit use of air hammers, back-up alarms and other noisy equipment as much as possible. Conform to local governing requirements.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS (Not Used)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PROTECTION OF FACILITIES

A. Follow all procedures in WSDOT Standard Specifications, 2016 Edition, for protection of drainage structures, utilities, trees, and other facilities during demolition work.

3.2 DEMOLISH ASPHALT PAVING

A. Identify areas of existing AC paving to be removed for approval of the Engineer prior to commencing this work. When markings are approved, provide a clean, sawn edge through a minimum of 2/3 of the thickness of the material to be removed to protect adjacent paving to remain. Use care to protect edge to remain as saw-cut edge will remain as a finished edge against new Asphalt Paving work (Section 32 12 16.13). Completely remove AC paving, including base rock, to a total depth as required to complete the work.

3.3 DEMOLISH CONCRETE PAVING

A. Identify areas of existing Concrete Paving to be removed for approval of the Engineer prior to commencing this work. When markings are approved, provide a clean, sawn edge through a minimum of 2/3 of the thickness of the material to be removed to protect adjacent paving to remain. Use care to protect edge to remain as saw-cut edge will remain as a finished edge against new Concrete work (Section 32 13 13). Completely remove Concrete paving, including base rock.

3.4 DEMOLISH CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

A. Identify areas of existing Cast-in-Place Concrete to be removed by marking and offsetting as appropriate with grease pencil or paint for approval of the Engineer prior to commencing this work. When markings are approved, provide a clean, saw-cut edge through a minimum of 2/3 of the thickness of the material to be removed to protect adjacent concrete to remain. Use care to protect edge to remain as saw-cut edge will remain as a finished edge against new Concrete work (Section 03 30 00). Completely remove Concrete including base rock.

3.5 DEMOLISH TREES



A. Where indicated on drawings, remove trees as described in the project details. Salvage wood as described for re-use. Trunks and stumps to be removed to a depth of 12” below proposed grades. Where necessary to protect adjacent features, stump-grinding may be necessary. Unless otherwise noted for re-use all debris associated with the demolition to be removed from the site and disposed of appropriately. Reference Section 311100 Clearing and Grubbing.

3.6 DISPOSAL OF MATERIALS

A. The Contractor, in a manner consistent with all government regulations, shall dispose of the refuse resulting from demolition. In no case shall refuse material be left on the project site, or be buried in embankments or trenches on the project site. All effort shall be made to recycle materials whenever possible. Maintain hauling routes clean and free of any debris resulting from work of this Section.


Fort Steilacoom Park- Trail Access Upgrades Building ConcreteMarch 16, 2020 Bid Set Section 030013

BUILDING CONCRETE 030013-1

SECTION 030013 – BUILDING CONCRETE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:1. Cast-in-place concrete. 2. Concrete accessories.3. Formwork, shoring, bracing, and anchorage. 4. Concrete reinforcement. 5. Underslab vapor retarder.6. Concrete Sealer.

B. Related Sections:1. 079200 - Joint Sealants: Expansion joint fillers. 2. 096723 - Resinous Flooring: Finish at concrete slab.3. 312000 - Earth Moving: Fill under slabs on grade. 4. 321313 – Concrete Paving: Site concrete and patio.

C. Drawings, the provisions of the Agreement, the General Conditions, and Division 1 specification sections apply to all work of this Section.

D. Substitutions: Substitute products will be considered only under the terms and conditions of Section 016000.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. American Concrete Institute (ACI):1. 117 - Standard Specification for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials. 2. 301-05 - Specifications for Structural Concrete. 3. 315 - Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement.

B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):1. A615 - Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel for Concrete Reinforcement. 2. C33 - Specifications for Concrete Aggregates. 3. C94 - Specifications for Ready Mixed Concrete. 4. C132 - Test for Slump of Portland Cement Concrete. 5. C150 - Specification for Portland Cement. 6. C156 - Test Method for Water Retention by Concrete Curing Materials. 7. C171 - Specification for Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete. 8. C260 - Specifications for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete. 9. C309 - Specification for Liquid Membrane Forming Compounds for Curing Compounds. 10. C494 - Specifications for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete. 11. C618 - Specification for Fly Ash and Raw or Natural Pozzolan for Use as a Mineral Admixture

in Portland Cement Concrete. 12. C939 - Test Method for Flow of Grout for Preplaced-Aggregate Concrete13. C1107 - Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic-Cement Grout (Non-shrink)14. C1315 - Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds Having Special Properties for

Curing and Sealing Concrete.

C. U.S. Army Corps of Engineers: CRD-C-621-83 - Specifications for Non-Shrink Grout.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Make submittals in accordance with Section 013300.

B. Product Data: Submit data for each accessory, admixture, and curing material proposed for the work.



C. Shop Drawings:1. Reinforcing:

a. Detail reinforcing in accordance with ACI 315. Indicate reinforcement sizes, spacings, locations and quantities of reinforcing, bending and cutting schedules, splicing, and supporting and spacing devices.

b. Indicate embedded items. 2. Slab Layouts: Dimension locations of control, expansion, and construction joints.

D. Quality Control Submittals:1. Mix Designs: Prior to concrete work, submit mix designs for approval. 2. Test Results: Submit test results per ASTM C311 performed less than 6 months prior to use for

approval by Architect. 3. Certifications: Submit mill certificates for cement, aggregates, and reinforcing.


A. Perform work in accordance with ACI 301.

B. Concrete work is subject to special testing and inspection as specified in 014500. Notify Architect at least 48 hours before concrete is poured.

C. Pre-Installation Conference:1. At least 35 days prior to start of concrete work the Contractor shall hold, in accordance with

Section 013119, a meeting to review the detailed requirements of the concrete design mixes and to determine the procedures for producing proper concrete construction.

2. Required in attendance:a. Contractor's superintendent. b. Testing Laboratory representative. c. Concrete subcontractor. d. Ready-mix producer. e. Admixtures manufacturer's representative. f. Architect/Engineerg. All subcontractors with work to be installed in, or affected by concrete work.

3. Notify Architect 10 days prior to the scheduled date of the meeting. 4. Agenda: Include the following.

a. Installation scheduling and coordination; scheduling of mock-up construction and review. b. Classes of concrete required; mix designs; applicable references. c. Formwork. d. Reinforcement and placement. e. Climatic conditions; hot and/or cold weather concreting procedures (as appropriate);

unusual placing conditions. f. Substrate preparation; placement methods; construction joints. g. Flatwork; flatness and levelness requirements; finishing; criteria for acceptance; remedies. h. Curing and protection proceduresi. Site quality control; inspection and testing requirements. j. Sealers; locations and coverage rates

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FORM MATERIALS

A. Unless specified otherwise, conform to ACI 301.

B. Plywood: 1. APA rated High Density Overlay, or Plyform Class 1. EXT.

C. Form Ties: Snap-off metal; metal washer ends.



D. Chamfers and Rustication Strips: Wood or plastic; fabricate to the shapes indicated.

2.2 REINFORCING

A. Reinforcing Steel: Types as indicated on the structural drawings

B. Chairs, Bolsters, Bar Supports, and Spacers: Sized and shaped for strength and support of reinforcement during installation and placement of concrete.

2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS

A. Cement: ASTM C150, normal - Type 1 Portland, grey color.

B. Fly Ash: ASTM C618, Class C or F; loss on ignition (LOI) not to exceed 1 percent. Use fly ash from one single source for the whole Project.

C. Normal Weight Fine and Coarse Aggregates: ASTM C33; severe weather exposure.

D. Water: ASTM C94, para. 5.1.3

2.4 ADMIXTURES

A. Air-Entrainment: ASTM C 260; Master Builders Inc. "Micro-Air" or "MBVR", Euclid Chemical Co. "Air Mix," or approved.

B. Water Reducer Normal: ASTM C 494, Type A; Master Builders Inc. "Pozzolith/Polyheed," Euclid Chemical Co. "Eucon WR 75," or approved.

C. High Range Water Reducer (Superplasticizer): ASTM C 494, Type F or G and shall be of the second or third generation type. Shall be batch plant added, extend plasticity time, reduce water 20 to 30 percent. Master Builders Inc. "Rheobuild," Euclid Chemical "Eucon 37," or approved.

D. Accelerator: ASTM C 494, Type C or E, non-corrosive, non-chloride; Master Builders "Pozzutech 20," Euclid Chemical Co. "Accelgard 90," or approved.

E. Set Retarder: ASTM C494, Type B.

F. Shrinkage Reducing Admixture: Eclipse by W.R. Grace Company.

2.5 ACCESSORIES

A. Bonding Agent: Acrylic type; Sonneborn "Sonnocrete", W.R. Grace "Duraweld C", Euclid Chemical Co. "Flex-con", or approved.

B. Non-Shrink Grouts: ASTM C1107, Grade B; non-shrink non-catalyzed natural aggregate grout; minimum compressive strength of 7000 PSI at 28 days; 25 to 30 second flow when tested in accordance with ASTM C939 at 45 to 90 degrees F; cement gray in color; Master Builders Inc. "Masterflow 928," Euclid Chemical Co. "HiFlow Grout," or approved.

C. Form Coatings: Provide commercial formulation form-coating compounds that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces, and will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces when applied to forms or form liners.

D. Curing Materials: 1. Waterproof Sheet Material: Waterproof paper in accordance with ASTM C171; reinforced

waterproof kraft paper; white color at exterior applications; Burke Kraft Curing Paper Type I-SK-30, or approved.

2. Mats and Burlap: Fabric covering composed of quilted polyethylene sheeting laminated to outer covering of burlap, cotton, or other approved fabric; outer covering shall weigh not less than 6 ounces per square yard.

3. Curing Compound: ASTM C309; clear or translucent with fugitive dye; moisture loss not more than 0.055 gr./sq.cm. when tested in accordance with ASTM C156 and applied in a single coat at the manufacturers recommended rate. Euclid Chemical Co. "SuperFloor Coat" or "Floorcoat,"



or approved. Curing compounds shall be compatible with subsequently applied waterproof membranes and finishing systems.

4. Curing/Sealing Compound: ASTM C309; water based curing compound; Euclid Chemical Company "Aqua-Cure," Sonneborn "Kur-N-Seal WB," Burke by Edoco "Spartan-Cote WB II," or approved; ASTM C1315, Type I Clear, class A non-yellowing.]

E. Underslab Vapor Retarder: ASTM E1745, 15 mil minimum thickness; one of the following:1. "Stego Wrap 15 Mil" by Stego Industries, LLC (877-464-7834). 2. "Vapor Block VB15" by Raven Industries (800-635-3456).3. "Griffolyn 15 MIL Green" by Reef Industries, Inc. (800-231-6074).4. “Perminator 15 Mil” by WR Meadows, Inc. (847-214-2100)5. “Florprufe 120” by Grace Construction Products.

F. Finishing Aid: Evaporation retardant for preventing rapid drying during hot windy weather, Master Builders "Confilm."

2.6 CONCRETE MIX

A. Mix concrete in accordance with ASTM C94, and in accordance with the requirements indicated on the structural drawings.

B. Concrete at slabs on grade shall have a maximum water/cement ration of 0.45.

C. Admixtures:1. All concrete shall contain the specified water reducing or high range water reducing admixture,

except concrete with a required water/cement ratio of 0.45 or lower shall contain a high range water reducing admixture.

2. All concrete required to be air entrained shall contain air entraining admixture to produce 4% to 6% air.

3. All concrete placed in ambient temperatures from 40 degrees F to 20 degrees F, and all slab concrete placed in ambient temperatures below 50 degrees F, shall contain an accelerator at the manufacturer's required dosage.

4. All concrete placed in ambient temperatures of 90 degrees F or above, shall contain a set retarder at the manufacturer's required dosage.

D. Provide 28 day compressive strengths as indicated on the Structural Drawings. Where not indicated on the Structural Drawings, provide minimum 3000 psi compressive strength unless indicated otherwise.

E. Fly Ash: A minimum of 15 percent and a maximum of 50 percent by weight of cementitious materials.

2.7 REINFORCEMENT FABRICATION

A. Fabricate as indicated and in accordance with ACI 315.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Prior to starting work, carefully inspect installed work of other trades and verify that such work is complete to the point where work of this Section may properly commence. Notify the Architect in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work.

B. Do not begin installation until all unsatisfactory conditions are resolved. Beginning work constitutes acceptance of site conditions and responsibility for defective installation caused by prior observable conditions.



3.2 FORMWORK ERECTION

A. Verify lines, levels, and measurement before proceeding with formwork. Align form joints.

B. Use plywood forms, unless other systems are approved by the Architect.

C. Use form coating on forms in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Verify that form coatings will not affect the bond of subsequent concrete surface treatments.

D. Coordinate with work of other Sections in forming and setting openings, slots, recesses, chases, sleeves, bolts, anchors, and other inserts.

E. Tolerances: Comply with ACI 117.

F. Where earth forms are used, hand trim sides and bottoms of earth forms. Remove loose dirt.

3.3 UNDERSLAB VAPOR RETARDER

A. Place, protect, and repair vapor-retarder sheets according to ASTM E 1643 and manufacturer's written instructions under all interior slabs-on-grade.

B. Lap and seal all seams a minimum of 6 inches, seal around all penetrations, lap and seal against foundation walls and footings with manufacturer’s recommended sealing tape or mastic.

3.4 REINFORCEMENT

A. Place, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement.

B. Locate reinforcing splices not indicated on the drawings at points of minimum stress.

C. Provide laps and concrete cover as indicated in the Drawings.

3.5 PLACING CONCRETE

A. In accordance with ACI 301.

B. Bonding Agent: Mix thoroughly and apply strictly in accord with the manufacturer's instructions; do not use when ambient temperature is below 45 degrees F. Place concrete in contact immediately while bonding agent is still tacky.

3.6 SUBSEQUENT TREATMENT FOR FORMED SURFACES

A. Provide smooth form finish for concrete to remain exposed in the finished work; rough form finish for concrete to remain concealed in the finished work.

3.7 SLABS

A. Expansion Joints for Slabs on Grade:1. Place expansion joints at locations indicated and where exterior slabs abut concrete walls, the

building perimeter, and other fixed objects abutting or within the slab area.2. Form joints 1/2 inch wide x full depth of slab.3. Form expansion joints with preformed joint filler. Install strippable joint at joints to receive

sealant specified in Section 079200.4. Tool expansion joints to 1/4 inch radius.5. Discontinue reinforcing at the expansion joint. 6. Place perpendicular to longitudinal axis of wall and curbs. Where possible, make joints of curbs

coincide with joints in walks.

B. Control Joints for Slabs on Grade:1. Make joints straight; perpendicular or parallel to building lines and slab edges, as appropriate. 2. Control joints shall be saw cut or tooled, unless indicated otherwise. 3. Radius tooled control joints to match expansion joints.



4. Control joints shall penetrate the slab a minimum of 1/4 the thickness of the slab and shall be 3/16 inch in width minimum..

5. Space control joints at the locations indicated, except when not indicated locate in at 32 times the slab thickness.

6. Align joints with column lines when ever possible. Joints shall form rectangular panels with the long side less than 1-1/2 times the length of the short side. Provide circular or diamond shaped joint lines around columns. Locate control joints at reentrant corners.

C. Tooled Joints for Slabs on Grade: Provide tooled joints to match control joints. Tooled joints do not need to penetrate the slab 1/4 the depth of the slab.

D. Construction Joints: Place at either expansion or control joint locations for slab on grade construction.

E. Curing:1. Moisture cure all concrete for a minimum of 7 days, unless approved or specified otherwise. 2. Use waterproof sheet material or mats and burlap at surfaces to receive subsequent bonded finish

materials. A curing compound may be used on surfaces to receive subsequent bonded finish materials, including resinous flooring, provided the curing compound is approved in writing by the manufacturer of the adhesive or the bonding finish material. Curing compound may also be used on surfaces to receive subsequent bonded finish materials, provided the curing compound is removed with shot blasting or other approved method prior to installation of bonded materials.

3. Maintain concrete temperatures above 50 degrees F.

F. Finishes: 1. Full Trowel finish interior floor slab surfaces, unless specified otherwise.

END OF SECTION

Fort Steilacoom Park- Trail Access Upgrades Structural Steel FramingMarch 16, 2020 Bid Set Section 051200

STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 051200-1

SECTION 051200 – STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Elements indicated on the Structural Drawings, including the following:

a. Structural steel.b. Structural welding.c. Baseplate grouting.

2. Priming of structural steel.

B. Related Sections:1. 014500 - Quality Control: Requirements for testing and inspection. 2. 030013 - Concrete: Placement of structural steel to be embedded in concrete. 3. 055000 - Metal Fabrications: Steel fabrications not indicated on the Structural Drawings. 4. 099000 - Painting: Field painting of structural steel elements.

C. Drawings, the provisions of the Agreement Conditions of the Contract, and Division 1 specification sections apply to all work of this Section.


1.2 REFERENCES

A. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC):1. Specification for Structural Steel Buildings, 2010. 2. Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges, 2010.3. Manual of Steel Construction, 14th Edition 2010. 4. Specifications for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts, 2014.

B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):1. A36 - Structural Steel. 2. A53 - Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc Coated Welded and Seamless. 3. A108 - Steel Bars, Carbon, Cold-Finished, Standard Quality. 4. A569 - Steel, Carbon (0.15 Maximum, Percent), Hot-Rolled Sheet and Strip, Commercial

Quality.5. A572 - High-Strength Low-Alloy Columbium-Vanadium Steels of Structural Quality. 6. A992 - Standard Specification for Steel for Structural Shapes For Use in Building Framing 7. C1107 - Packaged Dry, Hydraulic-Cement Grout (Nonshrink).

C. American Welding Society (AWS): D1.1 - Structural Welding Code - Steel.

D. Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC): "Steel Structures Painting Manual, Volume 2, Systems and Specifications."

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data:1. Shop applied primers.2. Non-shrink grout.

C. Shop Drawings:1. Indicate profiles, sizes, spacing, and locations of structural members, connections, attachments,

fasteners, cambers, loads.



2. Indicate welded connections using standard AWS welding symbols. Indicate net weld lengths. 3. Indicate types and locations of field welds. 4. Indicate members to be shop primed.

D. Quality Control Submittals:1. Certifications: Submit certification of materials with copies of mill reports for each heat of steel

used.


A. The work of this Section is subject to testing and inspection as specified in Section 014500.

B. Use only certified welders approved by the jurisdictional code authorities.

C. Unless specified or indicated otherwise, work shall comply with AWS and AISC Standards.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 STRUCTURAL STEEL

A. Types as indicated on the Structural Drawings.

2.2 ACCESSORIES

A. Non-Shrink Grout: BASF "Masterflow 713 Plus," Sonneborn "Sonogrout," or approved; non-shrink, non-metallic grout in compliance with ASTM C1107.

B. Welding Electrodes: E-70 series, low hydrogen, appropriate for use.

C. Shop Primers:1. Special Zinc Primer: “Series 394 PerimePrime" by Tnemec Company Inc. (Kansas City, MO;

816-483-3400).2. Special Epoxy Primer (Tie-Coat): Tnemec Series N69 Epoxoline, or approved.

D. Special Exterior Primers: 1. First Primer: One of the following; provide product from same manufacturer selected for finish

systems specified in Section 099000.a. “Series 394 PerimePrime" by Tnemec Company Inc. (Kansas City, MO; 816-483-3400).b. "Carbozinc 859" by Carboline Company (St. Louis, MO; 314-644-1000; 800-848-4645);

organic zinc-rich epoxy primer.c. "68HS" by Ameron Protective Coatings (Brea, CA; 714-529-1951); organic zinc-rich epoxy

primer.d. "Catha-Coat 302H" by ICI Devoe; "reinforced" inorganic zinc-rich epoxy primer.

2. Epoxy Tie-Coat Primer: One of the following; provide product from same manufacturer selected for first primer specified above:a. "Hi-Build Epoxoline II" Series N69 by Tnemec Company Inc. (Kansas City, MO; 816-483-

3400).b. "Carboline 888 " by Carboline Company (St. Louis, MO; 314-644-1000; 800-848-4645);

organic zinc-rich epoxy primer.c. "Amercoat 385." by Ameron Protective Coatings (Brea, CA; 714-529-1951); organic zinc-

rich epoxy primer.d. "Devran 224HS," "Bar-Rust 231," or "Bar-Rust 233H." by ICI Devoe; "reinforced"

inorganic zinc-rich epoxy primer.

2.3 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate structural steel items in accordance with AISC and AWS Standards and in accordance with approved shop drawings. Properly mark and match-mark all materials for field assembly. Fabricate for delivery sequence that will expedite erection and minimize field handling.



B. Shop Assembly: Fabricate units in as large a part or section as practicable.

C. Structural Steel to be Exposed in the Finished Work:1. Comply with provisions of AISC "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges"

Section 10 "ARCHITECTURAL EXPOSED STRUCTURAL STEEL."2. Grind welds smooth with adjacent surfaces. Grind butt welds flat and perpendicular to the weld

direction.3. All welds for structural steel elements to receive organic zinc primer shall be continuous.4. The cross section of abutting members shall match.

D. Fabrication of Elements to Receive Galvanized Coatings:1. Fabricate in accordance with the applicable requirements of ASTM A143, A384, and A385. 2. All welding slag and burrs shall be removed prior to galvanizing. 3. Take care to avoid fabrication techniques which could cause distortion or embrittlement of the

steel.

E. Hot Dip Galvanizing:1. Steel Fabrications: In accordance with ASTM A123. 2. Bolts, Nuts, Washers, and Other Hardware: In accordance with ASTM A153. 3. Surface Finish: Galvanized coatings shall be continuous, firmly adhered, smooth, evenly

distributed, and free from defects detrimental to performance or appearance. 4. Locations: Provide at all structural steel fabrications indicated to be exposed to the weather, and

as indicated. Unless otherwise approved by the Architect, plug and cold galvanize ventilation and lifting holes which will be exposed to moisture penetration in the finished work.

F. Shop Primer Application:1. Prepare surfaces in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, and as specified

below. 2. Solvent clean in accordance with SSPC SP-1; near white blast ungalvanized ferrous metal

surfaces in accordance with SSPC SP-10. 3. Spray apply one coat organic zinc primer and one intermediate coat epoxy primer in accordance

with the manufacturer's recommendations. Apply primers to receive field application of finish coats as specified in Section 099000.

4. Maintain at least one coat of primer at all times during installation. Immediately patch damaged coatings.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION



3.2 ERECTION

A. Embedded Items: Provide anchor bolts and templates, and other items as indicated, to other Sections for installation prior to placement of cast-in concrete.

B. Temporary Shoring and Bracing: Provide as required with connections of sufficient strength to bear imposed loads. Remove temporary members when permanent members are in place and final connections are made.



C. Erect structural steel in accordance with approved shop drawings and AISC "Code of Standard Practice," Section 7.

D. Welds shall be in accordance with AWS D1.1.

E. Cut holes by drilling only.

F. Tolerances: Maximum deviation from plumb, level, and alignment shall not exceed 1 to 500.

G. Base Plate Grouting: Set on leveling nuts to accurate elevations and grout solid with non-shrink grout.

H. Cleaning and Touch-Up:1. Clean steel of oil or other contaminants as specified under Fabrication. 2. Columns, beams, girders, and other members which are to receive sprayed-on fireproofing shall

be cleaned free of loose rust, heavy mill scale, oil, dirt or other foreign substances prior to application of fireproofing materials.

3. Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and touch-up factory primed surfaces with same primer as used in shop; touch-up galvanized surfaces with zinc-rich primer.

END OF SECTION

Fort Steilacoom Park- Trail Access Upgrades Metal FabricationsMarch 16, 2020 Bid Set Section 055000

METAL FABRICATIONS 055000-1

SECTION 055000 – METAL FABRICATIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Fabricated metal items indicated on the Architectural Drawings.

B. Related Sections:1. 014500 - Quality Control: Requirements for testing and inspections. 2. 030013 - Concrete: Embedment of metal fabrications; foundations and fill at pipe bollards. 3. 051200 - Structural Steel Framing: Steel elements indicated on the Structural Drawings.4. 099000 - Painting: Field painting of metal fabrications shop primed in this section.



1.2 REFERENCES

A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):1. A36 - Specification for Structural Steel. 2. A53 - Specification for Welded and Seamless Steel Pipe. 3. A123 - Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. 4. A143 - Safeguarding Against Embrittlement of Hot Dipped Galvanized Structural Steel Products

and Procedures for Detecting Embrittlement. 5. A153 - Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware. 6. A307 - Specification for Carbon Steel Externally Threaded Standard Fasteners. 7. A366 - Specification for Carbon Steel Cold Rolled Sheet. 8. A384 - Safeguarding Against Warpage and Distortion During Hot Dip Galvanizing of Steel

Assemblies. 9. A385 - Providing High Quality Zinc Coatings (Hot Dip). 10. A500 - Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in

Rounds and Shapes. 11. A501 - Specification for Hot-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing. 12. A569 - Specification for Commercial Quality Hot Rolled Sheet and Strip Carbon (0.15

Maximum Percent) Steel. 13. A570 - Specification for Hot-Rolled Carbon Steel Sheet and Strip, Structural Quality.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Literature: Submit product literature for all prefabricated products.

C. Shop Drawings: 1. Show details of fabrication and installation; indicate materials, thicknesses, dimensions, methods

of reinforcement and embedment, attachments, shop finishes, provisions for work of other trades, and other pertinent information as requested by Architect.

D. Closeout Submittal:1. In accordance with Section 017700.




A. Fabricator Qualifications: Experienced and regularly engaged in producing metal fabrications of the type specified; must employ only skilled personnel using proper equipment to produce work.

B. Testing and Inspection: All metal fabrications are subject to special inspection as specified in Section 014500.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Carbon Steel:1. Structural Shapes, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A36. 2. Sheet: ASTM A366. 3. Pipe: ASTM A53, seamless, Type S, plain end; schedule 40 unless indicated otherwise.

B. Fasteners: Types as indicated, specified, or required for the assembly and installation of fabricated items. 1. Bolts: ASTM A307, unless indicated otherwise; include nuts and plain hardened washers. 2. Drilled-In Concrete Anchors: Ramset "Trubolt Stud Anchor," Hilti Fastening Systems

"Kwikbolt," or approved.

C. Steel Primers:1. Manufacturer: Tnemec Company Inc. (Kansas City, MO; 816-483-3400). 2. Zinc Primer: "Series 394 PerimePrime"; single component moisture cured primer3. Epoxy Tie-Coat Primer: Tnemec Series 69 Epoxoline.”

D. Miscellaneous Materials: Furnish incidental accessory materials, tools, and equipment as necessary for fabrication and installation of miscellaneous metal items as indicated on the Drawings. 1. Non-Shrink Grout: Master Builder's "Master Flow 713," Sonneborn "Sonogrout," or approved.

2.2 PREFABRICATED COMPONENTS

A. Welded Wire Mesh: 1. Wire mesh, square, galvanized steel, hot dipped, mill finish, welded. 2. Trimmed, 2" x 2" spacing;3. 0.120" Thick (11 Gauge) Wire Diameter.4. Provide 1” wide U-edging all edges.5. McNichols Company (Seattle, WA; 877-759-5128) ITEM 342025B048.

B. Unistrut: Unistrut Corporation (Wayne, MI), or approved. Furnish manufacturer's standard components corresponding to "P" numbers indicated on the drawing. Include 1/4 inch thick steel connecting hardware, and 1/2" diameter bolts, nuts, and lock washers.

2.3 FABRICATION

A. General Fabrication Requirements: Fabricate as follows, unless specified or indicated otherwise. 1. Verify all dimensions and fabricate to detail with accurate sizes and shapes, straight lines,

smooth curves, and sharp angles. 2. Welds shall have sufficient strength to withstand the loads applied. 3. For items exposed to view or subject to contact, grind welds smooth and level with adjacent

surfaces; remove all burrs from cut edges. Fill imperfections with body putty as necessary for a smooth even finish.

4. Bend curved sections to a smooth radius free from buckles and twists. 5. Fabrications in exterior locations shall be fabricated to shed water. 6. All welds on fabrications to receive organic zinc primer shall be continuous, full length of joint.



2.4 SHOP FINISHES

A. Painted Finish:1. Prepare surfaces in accordance with the finish coat manufacturer's recommendations, and as

specified below. 2. Commercial blast ungalvanized ferrous metal surfaces in accordance with SSPC SP10. Abrade

galvanized surfaces with 3M "Scotchbrite Heavy Duty" (brown) pad, or as necessary to achieve sufficient profile for paint adhesion.

3. At non-galvanized steel, spray apply organic zinc and epoxy primer intermediate coat in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Apply primers to receive field application of finish coats as specified in Section 099000.

4. At galvanized surfaces, spray apply epoxy primer in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.

5. Except for surfaces indicated to be field welded, coat all surfaces of fabrication, whether or not exposed to view in installed position.

6. Maintain at least one coat of primer at all times during installation. Immediately patch damaged coatings.

7. Finish coat shall be free of dirt, flow lines, sags, blisters, pinholes, and other surface imperfections.

8. Locations: Provide at all metal fabrication exposed to view, and other fabrications as scheduled. Do not prime surfaces to be field welded.

B. Stainless Steel: #4 finish in accordance with the NAAMM "Metal Finishes Manual."

2.5 PROTECTION

A. For metal in contact with concrete, masonry, and other dissimilar materials, coat contact surfaces with zinc-rich primer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


B. Do not begin installation until all unsatisfactory conditions are resolved. Beginning work constitutes acceptance of conditions as satisfactory.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install metal fabrications in accurate locations shown. Unless indicated otherwise, fabrications shall be installed plumb and level.

B. Provide all anchorage devices as indicated and required for a secure installation.

C. Touch-up all surfaces damaged during installation. Patch all welds and damage marks with matching primer.

D. Coordinate with Section 030013 for foundations, installation, and concrete fill at pipe bollards.

END OF SECTION

Fort Steilacoom Park- Trail Access Upgrades Rough CarpentryMarch 16, 2020 Bid Set Section 061000

ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000-1

SECTION 061000 – ROUGH CARPENTRY

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:1. Dimensional wood framing. 2. Sheathing. 3. Blocking, nailers, and curbing. 4. Plywood terminal back boards.

B. Related Sections:1. 061500 - Wood Decking 2. 061739 - Shop Fabricated Wood Trusses 3. 072700 - Weather Resistive Barriers4. 074646 - Mineral-Fiber Cement Siding5. 076200 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim.


D. Substitutions: Substitutions will be considered only under the terms and conditions of Section 016000.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. American Plywood Association (APA)

B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):1. D2898 - Test Method for Accelerated Weathering of Fire-Retardant Treated Wood for Fire

Testing. 2. E84 - Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.

C. American Wood Preservers' Association: Book of Standards (AWPA).

D. National Lumber Grading Authority of Canada (NLGA).

E. Product Standard (PS): PS-20 - American Softwood Lumber Standard.

F. Southern Pine Inspection Bureau (SPIB).

G. West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau (WCLB): Standard Grading Rules for West Coast Lumber.

H. Western Wood Products Association (WWPA).

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Submit complete technical and product data on the following:1. Preservative wood treatments. 2. Framing and sheathing accessories.


A. Regulatory Requirements: Work shall conform to the requirements of the currently enforced International Building Code as adopted by the jurisdiction.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Store and protect products under provisions of Section 016000.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 DIMENSION LUMBER

A. Lumber shall be manufactured in accordance with PS 20, and shall be stamped and graded in accordance with WWPA, WCLB, NLGA, or SPIB grading rules.

B. Moisture Content: Kiln dried to 19% maximum moisture content, except for material whose least dimension is 4 inches thick or greater.

C. Species: Hem-Fir, Spruce-Pine-Fir (SPF), or Douglas Fir Larch, unless indicated or specified otherwise.

D. Structural Lumber Grades: As indicated on the Structural Drawings.

E. Architectural Lumber Grades: Unexposed non-structural wood framing and blocking indicated on the Architectural Drawings shall be graded as follows:1. Non-Structural Framing (2" to 4" thick, 2" to 6" wide): "Construction - Light Framing," "Stud,"

or better. 2. Blocking and Nailers: "Utility - Light Framing," or better.

2.2 PANEL MATERIALS

A. Wall and Roof Sheathing: APA Rated Sheathing; Structural I; CD grade; Exterior; plywood, unless approved otherwise; thicknesses as indicated.

B. Terminal Backboards: APA AC grade exterior; fire retardant treated.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Fasteners: 1. For Use With Preservative Treated Wood: 300 Series stainless steel. 2. Screws: Self tapping; countersunk or low profile head.

B. Metal Connectors: Simpson Company, Silver Metal Products, Inc, USP Structural Connectors, or approved; types as indicated on the Drawings; minimum G-185 galvanized coating.

C. Sill Gasket: Closed cell polyethylene foam, or approved; continuous rolls; width of sill plate.

D. Strip Flashing: "Grace Ultra" by WR Grace., 800-444-6459, or "Moistop E-Z Seal" by Fortifiber Corporation 800-343-3972.

2.4 WOOD TREATMENT

A. Wood Preservative (Pressure Treatment): 1. Preservative treat all exterior lumber, including roofing nailers, curbs and other wood in contact

with concrete, masonry, and moist conditions.2. For above ground use, use AWPA certified Ammonium Copper Quaternium (ACQ) or Copper

Hydroxide Sodium Dimethyldithiocarbamate (CDDC) waterborne preservative with 0.25 pounds per cubic foot of wood retention.

3. Approved Product: “Wolmanized Natural Select” by Arch Wood Protection, Inc.(Smyrna, GA; 770-801-6600); copper azole (CA) fungicide.

4. For ground contract use, use AWPA Treatment C-22 using CCA waterborne preservative with 0.40 pounds per cubic foot of wood retention. ]

5. Treated lumber shall be kiln dried to a maximum moisture content of 19%; treated plywood shall be kiln dried to a maximum moisture content of 15%.

6. Treated lumber shall bear the quality stamp of an inspection agency approved by the jurisdictional code authorities.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION



3.2 FRAMING

A. Erect as indicated.

B. Erect wood framing members level and plumb unless indicated otherwise.

C. Place horizontal members crown side up.

D. Nailing shall be in accordance with appropriate IBC table, unless indicated otherwise.

E. Use framing members full length without splices.

F. Tolerances:1. Maximum 1/4 inch from true position. 2. Maximum 1/4 inch in 10 feet from true plumb or level.

G. Site treat cut ends of field cut pressure preservative treated lumber with compatible material as recommended by the treatment materials manufacturer.

H. Place sill gasket directly on concrete foundation. Puncture gasket clean and fit tight to protruding foundation anchor bolts.

3.3 SHEATHING

A. Install sheathing as indicated. When not indicated, install as follows:1. Secure sheathing with edges on firm bearing. [Provide solid edge blocking between sheets,

except use galvanized steel sheathing clips at unsupported edges between sheets at roof sheathing.

2. Secure roof sheathing perpendicular to framing members with ends staggered.

B. Fastening shall be in accordance with code requirements.

C. Allow 1/8 inch spacing at ends and edges between panels, unless otherwise recommended by panel manufacturer.

3.4 BLOCKING, NAILERS, AND CURBS

A. Provide blocking, nailers, and curbs for sheathing, roof construction, metal flashing, and other construction as indicated, and as necessary for firm support. Unless otherwise indicated, solid wood backing shall be minimum 2 inch nominal thickness; plywood shall be minimum 3/4 inch thick.

B. Blocking: Install wood blocking to receive mechanical fasteners for support of plumbing and electrical fixtures and equipment, cabinets, door stop plates, wood base, wainscots, coat hooks, toilet and bath accessories, kitchen equipment, and all other wall and ceiling mounted components.



C. For attachment of plywood backing, kerf plywood 1/4" (3/8", maximum if required for heavy gage studs) to receive flange return (or crimp the return closed); provide supplementary sheet metal angle attached to back of stud where necessary to support backing. Screws into edge of plywood are unacceptable.

3.5 PLYWOOD TERMINAL BACKBOARDS

A. Provide a fire retardant treated plywood terminal backboard for telephone systems where indicated on the drawings.

B. Mechanically apply directly over gypsum backing board.

END OF SECTION

Fort Steilacoom Park- Trail Access Upgrades Wood DeckingMarch 16, 2020 Bid Set Section 061500

WOOD DECKING 061500-1

SECTION 061500 – WOOD DECKING

PART 1 - GENERAL1.1 SUMMARYA. This Section includes design, fabrication and erection of tongue-and-groove wood decking using solid

wood decking. B. Connectors, anchors, and accessories for the framing are specified in Section 061000.C. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 6 Section “Rough Carpentry” for dimension lumber items associated with structural solid wood decking construction.

D. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 REFERENCESA. Solid Wood Decking: AITC 112-93: Standard for Tongue-and-Groove Heavy Timber Roof Decking

1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTSA. Structural Performance: Provide solid wood decking, including connectors, capable of withstanding

structural loads shown on Drawings without exceeding allowable design working stresses or allowable deflections per the International Building Code or its reference standards.1. Seismic Performance: Provide solid wood decking, including connectors, capable of withstanding

the effects of earthquake motions determined according to seismic design criteria shown on the Drawings.

1.4 SUBMITTALSA. Manufacturers Data: Grade of timber used and allowable stresses for it.B. Shop Drawings: Show layout of wood decking and full dimensions of each member.

1. Indicate configuration, span, and slope.2. For installed products indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis data

signed and sealed by the licensed professional engineer responsible for their preparation. The engineer will be licensed in the state where the Project is located.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Manufacturer Qualifications: Provide solid wood decking produced by an AITC- or APA-licensed

firm, who is licensed to use the “AlTC Quality Inspected” mark and ensure AlTC Certificate of Compliance.1. For wood decking, form units from lumber graded in accordance with requirements of American

Lumber Standards Committee and PS 20-94, American Softwood Lumber Standard.B. Quality Standard: Comply with AlTC 112-93.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLINGA. Provide water-resistant wrapping.B. Use non-marring slings for loading, unloading, and handling members to prevent damage to surfaces

and wrapping. Unload at site, place on level supports with members off of ground surface, and adequately cover to protect from weather and site debris.

C. All timber members that are stored inadequately to prevent damage, left in contact with earth, or which have damage or staining will be rejected. Such members must be replaced with in-kind timber members at the sole expense of the Contractor.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS2.1 WOOD DECKINGA. Species shall be Douglas-Fir/Larch minimum E=1,800,000 psi.B. Moisture content shall be a maximum of 12%.C. Grade: Select Grade for Douglas-Fir Larch.D. Surface Texture: Smooth Sanded Surface.E. Decking pattern shall have standard V-joint one side, and shall and have tongue and grooves along

both of the long sides and both of the ends.F. End Sealer: Manufacturers standard, transparent, colorless wood sealer that is effective in retarding

the transmission of moisture at cross-grain cuts and is compatible with Indicated finish.G. Penetrating Sealer: Manufacturers standard, transparent, penetrating wood sealer that will not interfere

with application of wood stain and transparent finish.H. Stain: Semi-transparent water-based stain as specified in Section 099000.I. Sealant: Latex Sealant Caulk: Provide exterior use caulk of one of the following manufacturers or

approved equal:1. Chem-Calk 600; Bostic Inc.2. NuFlex 300; Nuco Industries Inc.3. Tremflex 834; Tremco

2.2 FABRICATIONA. Timber Grades:

1. Decking: Select GradeB. Minimum Stress Values: The following values are for primary load carrying members that collect

loads from other members and transfer them to trusses or columns. Other secondary timber members may be designed using allowable stresses and material grade that are compatible with the applied secondary loads. Higher stress grade may be required to meet structural loads, as determined by the manufacturer’s structural engineer.1. 2400 psi in bending2. 1600 psi in tension3. 1500 psi in compression parallel to grain4. 165 psi in shear parallel to grain5. 650 psi in tension and compression perpendicular to grain6. 1,800,00 psi modulus of elasticity

C. Conditions of Service:1. Fabricate interior components for dry condition of service2. Fabricate exterior components for wet condition of service

D. Adhesive: Bond laminated members with waterproof adhesive.E. Decking: Use random length wood decking with tongue and groove (T&G) edges and ends. Provide

12 percent maximum moisture content, MC-1 5 or CK on grade stamp, single T&G edges for 2” thick decking; double T&G edges for 3” and 4” thicknesses.1. Decking dimensions as indicated on the Drawings.

F. Factory Finishes:1. Apply a coat of end sealer to all members as soon as practical after end trimming.2. After fabricating, sanding, and end-coat sealing each unit, apply a heavy saturation coat of

penetrating sealer to surfaces of each unit, except for treated wood where treatment has included water repellant.



3. Stain Finish: Apply semi-transparent water based stain specified to decking.G. Factory-Applied Protection: Before shipping or exposing to outdoor conditions, bundle-wrap wood

members with manufacturer’s standard, opaque, durable, water-resistant, plastic-coated paper covering with water-resistant seams.

PART 3 - EXECUTION3.1 EXAMINATIONA. Examine substrates in areas to receive structural decking, with Installer present, for compliance with

requirements, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance of decking. If substrates are unsatisfactory, provide written notification to General Contractor.1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATIONA. General: Erect decking true and plumb, with uniform, close-fitting joints.

1. Lift with padded slings and protect comers with wood blocking.2. Install decking to comply with Shop Drawings.3. Install timber connectors as indicated on Shop Drawings.

B. Sealant: Apply a continuous bead of latex sealant caulk between the outermost timber edge supporting member and the underside of the wood decking to provide an airtight seal.

C. Wood Deck Nailing: Nail decking to supports according to AITC recommendations.D. Cutting: Avoid cutting after fabrication. Where field fitting is unavoidable, comply with requirements

for shop fabrication.1. Where surface-treated members must be cut during erection, apply a heavy brush coat of the same

preservative to comply with AWPA M4.2. Coat cuts with end sealer of paragraph 2.1 .C. This is not required at field drilling for bolts.

3.3 ADJUSTINGA. Repair damaged surfaces after completing erection. Replace damaged decking if repairs are not

approved by Architect.3.4 PROTECTIONA. Wood Deck Protection: Provide temporary waterproof covering to protect exposed decking prior to

installation of roof.

END OF SECTION

Fort Steilacoom Park- Trail Access Upgrades Shop Fabricated Wood TrussesMarch 16, 2020 Bid Set Section 061739

SHOP FABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES 061739-1

SECTION 061739 – SHOP FABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES

PART 1 - GENERAL1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Complete design, furnishing and installation of open web wood chord (plate-connected) trusses for roof framing, as indicated, and as necessary to complete the work.

B. Related Sections1. 051200 - Structural Steel Framing: Supporting structure. 2. 061000 - Rough Carpentry: Plywood decking.



1.2 REFERENCESA. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):

1. A307 - Carbon Steel Threaded Standard Fasteners. 2. A653: Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated by the hot-Dip Process.

B. International Building Code (IBC). 1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Make submittals in accordance with Section 013300. B. Shop Drawings:

1. Indicate standard designations, configuration, sizes, spacing, and locations of trusses, truss coding, bridging, connections, attachments, cambers, and attachment details.

2. Reference dimensions to gridlines and layout working points indicated in the documents.3. Prepare shop drawings under the seal of a professional structural engineer registered in the State

of Washington. C. Calculations: Submit design calculations for open web trusses to the Authority Having Jurisdiction

and to Structural Engineer, and provide two informational copies to the Architect for the project records. Calculations shall bear the seal of a professional structural engineer registered in the State of Washington.

D. Quality Control Submittals: Certification: Submit written certification that the open web wood chord trusses have been designed to meet the specified requirements.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Design: Structural design of the wood chord trusses shall be by a Structural Engineer Licensed to

practice in the State of Washington. B. Code Approvals: Trusses shall be designed and manufactured to comply with the International

Building Code. C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with building department requirements for review of truss shop

drawings. D. Design of the trusses shall comply with the loading requirements indicated on the Structural

Drawings, and the Architectural requirements indicated.1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. In accordance with Section 016000.



B. Store open web trusses in a vertical position and protected from the weather. 1.6 WARRANTY

A. Submit in accordance with Section 017700.B. The products, when correctly installed and maintained, shall be warranted free from manufacturing

errors or defects in workmanship and material, and shall be warranted to perform as designed for the normal and expected life of the building.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS2.1 MATERIALS

A. Open Web Truss Members: Style as indicated on the Drawings. B. Lumber: In accordance with Section 061000.

2.2 CONNECTORS:A. Plywood Connectors: Plywood in accordance with Section 061000.B. Steel Connectors: Hot-dipped galvanized steel sheet, ASTM A653; die-stamped with integral teeth.C. Truss Bridging: Type, size and spacing as indicated on approved shop drawings.D. Bolts, Nuts and Washers: ASTM A307.

2.3 FABRICATIONA. Fabricate trusses to achieve structural and architectural requirements indicated.B. Tolerances

1. Length bearing to bearing: ± 1/4"2. Depth ± 1/4"

C. Provide chord extensions and braces as indicated. D. Identification: Each of the trusses shall be identified by a stamp indicating the truss series,

manufacturer's name, plant number, and date of manufacture. 2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Trusses shall be inspected for compliance with specifications and manufacturer's standards for structural integrity, under manufacturer's ongoing program for observation by an independent inspection agency.

PART 3 - EXECUTION3.1 EXAMINATION



3.2 ERECTIONA. Erect open web trusses in accordance with the Structural Drawings.



B. During erection, provide temporary bracing for induced loads and stresses to keep the trusses straight and plumb as required and to assure adequate lateral support for the individual trusses and the entire system until the sheathing material has been applied.

C. Coordinate placement of anchorages construction for securing bearing plates and angles. D. Finish trusses as indicated on the Drawings and specified in Section 099000.

3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROLA. After completion of installation and prior to enclosing the trusses, notify the manufacturer's

representative for review of installation.

END OF SECTION

Fort Steilacoom Park- Trail Access Upgrades Weather Resistive BarriersMarch 16, 2020 Bid Set Section 072700

WEATHER RESISTIVE BARRIERS 072700-1

SECTION 072700 – WEATHER RESISTIVE BARRIERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:1. Building paper weather barrier systems.2. Related weather barrier accessories and components.

B. Related Sections:1. 061000 - Rough Carpentry: Sheathing substrate.2. 076200 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Flexible flashing provided with separate sheet metal

flashing systems.



1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. For the work of this Section, weather barrier systems shall consist of the following:1. Building paper layer over solid substrates on the exterior building enclosure. 2. Sealing of penetrations in the building exterior building weather barrier envelope, including

windows, doors, plumbing elements, electrical elements, and mechanical components, including duct penetrations at rooftop mechanical unit.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Catalog cuts and installation instructions for specified manufactured products.


A. Applicator: Work of this section shall be performed by a single applicator, unless specifically approved otherwise by the Architect.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Building Paper: DuPont Company (800-448-9835) "Commercial Wrap”.1. Include manufacturer’s standard tape for sealing joints and penetrations.2. Include manufacturer’s standard washered fasteners for installation. Staples are not acceptable.

B. Flexible Flashing:1. DuPont Company "Tyvek FlexWrap"2. W.R. Grace "Grace Ultra". 3. Henry Company "Blueskin" 40 mil thickness.

C. Flexible Seal: Ethylene Propylene Diene Terpolymer ( EPDM ) black membrane, reinforced or non-reinforced, nominal 0.045 inch thick; complete with manufacturer's recommended splicing materials.

D. Weather Barrier Sealant: Single component urethane gun grade sealant.



E. Sheet Metal Closures:1. Minimum 24 gage prefinished galvanized steel.2. Custom fabricated to fit the conditions.

F. Accessories: Provide surface conditioners, primers, mastic, tape, and other accessories as specified by or acceptable to the manufacturer of each product.

G. Fasteners: Copolymer coated galvanized steel, or stainless steel.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION



3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Coordinate work with other trades as necessary to form a continuous air barrier envelope for the building.

B. Building Paper Weather Barrier Installation:1. Apply building paper over solid exterior substrates in accordance with the manufacturer’s

recommendations; lapped to weather.2. Apply layer complete to form a continuous air barrier. Tape seal all joints and penetrations with

manufacturer’s recommended tape.3. Coordinate installation of windows and other wall penetrations with the installation of flexible

flashing and building paper as shown.4. Secure building paper with screws and washers as recommended by manufacturer.5. Sequence with installation of flexible flashing and metal flashing elements as shown and as

necessary to form a continuous air and weather barrier.6. Install a single building paper layer at soffits, soffit enclosure and the occupied building spaces,

and other surfaces as necessary to form a continuous building paper envelope.

C. Flexible Flashing:1. Install flexible flashing as indicated and as specified below.2. Trim flexible flashing so that it will not be exposed in the finished work. 3. Coordinate installation of flexible flashing with installation of building paper and sheet metal

flashing elements.4. Install in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations for each condition.5. Provide flexible flashing as indicated and in the following locations to seal joints and

penetrations between building paper base layer and the following:a. Concrete foundation walls.b. Pipe, conduit, and electrical box penetrations.c. Window and door frames.d. Penetrations through the sheathing separation between the drive up canopy soffit enclosure

and the occupied building spaces.6. Provide flexible flashing to seal the joint between sheet metal closure angles and building paper

layer.



D. Special Construction:1. Provide custom fabricated sheet metal enclosures around recessed light fixtures and similar

elements which penetrate building paper barrier assemblies.

END OF SECTION

Fort Steilacoom Park- Trail Access Upgrades Mineral-Fiber Cement SidingMarch 16, 2020 Bid Set Section 074646

MINERAL-FIBER CEMENT SIDING 074646-1

SECTION 074646 – MINERAL-FIBER CEMENT SIDING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:1. Exterior siding and soffits.2. Exterior trim.3. Related flashings, accessories, and fastenings.

B. Related Sections:1. 061000 - Rough Carpentry: Substrate. 2. 076200 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Metal flashing.. 3. 079200 - Joint Sealants: Joint fillers. 4. 099000 - Painting: Finishing of panel siding.

C. Drawings, the provisions of the Agreement, including bonds and certificates, the General Conditions, and Division 1 specification sections apply to all work of this Section.


1.2 SUBMITTALS


B. Submit product data for panel siding, including installation instructions.

1.3 DELIVERY AND STORAGE

A. Deliver products to site under provisions of Section 016000.

B. Wood materials shall be allowed to acclimate to the site prior to work under this section. Wood materials shall be stored, stickered, and under cover at the site for a minimum of seven days prior to priming, finishing and installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURER

A. As specified: James Hardie Building Products (800/942-7343).

B. Alternate Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, products by the following may be considered by substitution request.1. Cemplank, Inc. (877/236-7526)2. CertainTeed Corp. (800/233-8990)

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Fiber-Cement Panel Siding:1. "Hardipanel"; 5/16" thick, smooth surface, factory primed.

B. Fiber Cement Trim (Battens): 1. "Harditrim XLD Planks," 3/4" thick, smooth surface, factory primed.2. Widths as indicated.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Siding Screws: “Dacrotized”, “Rustpert”, or hot dip galvanized; ribbed bugle-head; self tapping for steel framing; sufficient length to penetrate metal framing a minimum of 1/2 inch.

Fort Steilacoom Park- Trail Access Upgrades Mineral-Fiber Cement SidingMarch 16, 2020 Bid Set Section 074646

MINERAL-FIBER CEMENT SIDING 074646-2

B. Weather Barrier: As specified in Section 072700.

C. Flexible Flashing: As specified in Section 072700.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Prior to starting work, carefully inspect installed work of other trades and verify that such work is complete to the point where work of this section may properly commence. Notify the Architect in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Weather Barrier: Verify that weather barrier has been installed in accordance with Section 072700.

B. Install metal flashings at sills, and head of wall openings to ensure water flow to the exterior. Provide “Z” and drip flashing at non-lapping horizontal joints to prevent water penetration.

C. Flexible Flashing:1. Provide 6 inch wide flexible flashing strips at all penetrations. 2. Lap to the frame of the penetrating element as necessary seal perimeter joint, but not so that the

membrane will be exposed in the finished work. 3. Install strips in sequence; first at the sill, next at the jamb, and last at the head condition. Lap all

strips to weather. 4. Integrate flexible flashing with building paper and related metal flashing as necessary to shed

water and lap to weather.

D. General Installation Requirements for Panel Siding: 1. Install in accordance with manufacturers specific recommendations for non-shear installation.2. Install using screws into framing.3. Arrange components to encourage watershed. Securely fasten in place, aligned, level, and

plumb. Cut panel ends over bearing surfaces. 4. Exercise care when site cutting. Cut edges shall be smooth and clean. 5. Allow 1/8 inch space for sealant at adjacent construction. 6. Allow 1/2 inch space between panels. 7. Use single full sheets to the greatest extent possible to minimize joints. 8. Fabricate exposed surfaces of special shapes to a uniform profile free of saw marks and other

surface irregularities. 9. Components shall be plumb and level unless indicated otherwise.

E. Board and Batten Siding: 1. Unless indicated otherwise, provide panel siding with 1x3 battens over at spacing indicated. 2. Install siding vertically in continuous lengths unless approved otherwise. 3. Nail along the center of each batten at 24 inches on center. Nail into framing provided under

Section 061000. Do not double nail boards, unless approved otherwise. Size nails to shall penetrate 1-1/2 inches into framing member.

4. Center battens over each gap between panels and at regular spacing between joints. 5. Provide 1 x 3 fillets at inside corners as indicated.

END OF SECTION

Fort Steilacoom Park- Trail Access Upgrades Sheet Metal RoofingMarch 16, 2020 Bid Set Section 076100

SHEET METAL ROOFING 076100-1

SECTION 076100 – SHEET METAL ROOFING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Standing seam metal roofing, including sheet metal flashing, gutters and downspouts, and

accessories directly related to the metal roofing system.

B. Related Sections:1. 061000 - Rough Carpentry: Roof sheathing. 2. 061739 - Shop Fabricated Wood Trusses: Roof framing.3. 076200 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Flashing for sheet-metal roofing; materials specified

under this Section.



1.2 REFERENCES

A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):1. A653 - Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated, (Galvanized), or Zinc-Iron Alloy Coated by the Hot Dip

Process. 2. D659 - Method for Evaluating Degree of Chalking of Exterior Paints. 3. D2244 - Method for Instrumental Evaluation of Color Differences of Opaque Materials.

B. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA): Architectural Sheet Metal Manual.


A. System shall be designed and installed to preclude entrance of water to the building interior.

B. Installed system shall be capable of resisting wind uplift equivalent to that required for Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. Class 90.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Submit for all materials and proprietary systems proposed for the work. Include published literature on UL wind uplift classification for roofing system, if available.

C. Shop Drawings: 1. Indicate material profile, jointing pattern, jointing details, fastening methods, flashings,

penetrations, and installation details. 2. Include manufacturer's installation instructions for manufactured items incorporated in work.

D. Samples: Submit a minimum of 3 samples of roofing material, with finish and texture proposed for the work.


A. Installer: Company specializing in sheet metal roofing installation with minimum three years documented experience in installations of type and scope similar to that of this project.

B. Pre-Installation Meeting: In accordance with Section 013119. 1. Administer a pre-roofing meeting prior to starting the work of this Section.



2. Require in attendance the following parties:a. Ownerb. Architectc. General Contractord. Roofing Installere. Sheet Metal Installerf. Roofing manufacturer's representative

3. Agenda: Review field conditions, procedures, details, anchorage methods including details of fixed and sliding connections, provisions for thermal movement, and sequence of construction. Discuss and determine responsibility for protection of the work during and after construction, and subsequent maintenance of the roofing system.


A. Store products in accordance with Section 016000.

B. Stack preformed and prefinished material to prevent twisting, bending, or abrasion, and to provide ventilation.

C. Protect stored materials from heat and direct sunlight.

D. Prevent contact with materials during storage which may cause discoloration or staining.

1.7 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Do not apply waterproofing during inclement weather or when air temperature is below 40 degrees F.

1.8 GUARANTEE/WARRANTY

A. Furnish in accordance with Section 017700.

B. Installer Guarantee: Furnish guarantee from the installer that metal roofing system will be watertight under all weather conditions, for a minimum period of 2 years from the date of Substantial Completion.

C. Manufacturer’s Warranty: Furnish manufacturer’s warranty against defects in materials.

D. Finish Warranty: Furnish non-prorated 5 year warranty covering loss of film integrity, color change, and chalking. Finish on installed materials shall not show a color change greater than 5 NBS color units, per ASTM D2244, and shall not show chalking in excess of 8, per ASTM D659.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SHEET METAL ROOFING SYSTEM

A. Manufacturer - One of the following, subject to compliance with Drawings and specifications:1. AEP Span "Snap Seam". 2. Petersen Aluminum Corporation "Snap Clad"3. Berridge "Cee-Lock."4. Tomen TBC SS-200 Snap Seam Series.

B. Roofing System: .System shall consist of cleat retained standing seam metal roofing pans; 18" nominal width; seam height 1" to 1-3/4".

2.2 SHEET MATERIALS

A. Galvanized Steel: 24 gage core steel with ASTM A653 G90 galvanized coating; flat surface.

B. Finish: Minimum 70 percent resin Kynar 500 or Hylar 5000 fluoropolymer system; standard color as selected by the Architect.

C. Protective Backing Paint: Manufacturer's standard wash coat finish.



2.3 ACCESSORY MATERIALS

A. Fasteners: 1. Exposed Applications: Galvanized steel with soft neoprene washers, factory prefinished to

match roofing color. 2. Nailers, Cleats, and Other Concealed Applications: Hot dip galvanized; sizes as recommended

by the roofing materials manufacturer.

B. Underlayment: Self-adhering high-temperature membrane; one of the following:1. GAF “Stormguard” 2. Certainteed “Metalayment”.3. Henry Company “Blueskin PE200HT”

C. Sealant: As recommended by the manufacturer of the roofing materials.

D. Touch-up Paint: Manufacturer's special color-matched material, formulated for retouching fluoropolymer finishes.

2.4 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate cleats and starter strips from minimum 20-gage galvanized steel sheet material, unless recommended otherwise by the metal roofing manufacturer.

B. Apply strippable film for protection during shipping, fabrication and installation].

C. Cut and form in accordance with approved shop drawings, using recognized sheet metal practices. Perform cutting with clean, sharp properly aligned shearing tools; do not saw or file edges of sheets.

D. Form pieces in longest practical lengths.

E. Fabricate flashing and sheet metal, including gutters, in accordance with the requirements specified in Section 076200.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Prior to starting work, carefully examine installed work of other trades and verify that such work is complete to the point where work of this section may properly commence, Notify the Architect in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work.


C. Verify that substrate is clean, dry, and smooth, free of depressions, waves, and projections. Verify that items required to penetrate roof are solidly set.

3.2 ROOFING INSTALLATION

A. Underlayment:1. Apply underlayment shingle fashion to form a continuous weather barrier.2. Fasten each layer securely in position.3. Lap each layer a minimum of 2 inches; provide minimum 6 inch side laps; lap a minimum of 2

inches over waterproof membrane.

B. Perform metal roofing work in accordance with roofing manufacturer's instructions.

C. Install starter strips, edge strips, flashing receivers, valley liners, and cleats before starting installation of roofing sheets; nail cleats at 12 inches on center, using two nails per cleat, or, where cleats are continuous, space nails two per foot.



D. Install each roofing pan as a single continuous piece. Install systems to allow for expansion of the panels.

E. Install ridge caps, valley pans, and other flashing and sheet metal as single continuous lengths to the greatest extent possible.

F. Conceal fasteners wherever possible.

G. Seal all joints, except for factory sealed standing seams; seal intersections of standing seams.

H. Install cap flashings into receivers and secure with color matched neoprene gasketed screws at maximum 24" o.c.

I. Touch-up all scratched and damaged surfaces with matching material. Replace all components which cannot be touched up or otherwise repaired with new conforming materials.

END OF SECTION

Fort Steilacoom Park- Trail Access Upgrades Sheet Metal Flashing and TrimMarch 16, 2020 Bid Set Section 076200

SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 076200-1

SECTION 076200 – SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:1. Sheet metal flashing and trim. 2. Requirements for flashing and sheet metal provided in other Sections.

B. Related Sections:1. 061000 - Rough Carpentry: Wood blocking, nailers, and grounds. 2. 076100 - Sheet Metal Roofing: Coordination of flashing installation; pre-installation

conference.



1.2 REFERENCES

A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)1. A167 - Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip. 2. A653 - Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated, (Galvanized), or Zinc-Iron Alloy Coated by the Hot Dip

Process. 3. B32 - Solder Metal

B. Federal Specifications (FS): FS SS-C-153 - Cement, Bituminous, Plastic.

C. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA): Architectural Sheet Metal Manual, Sixth Edition 2003.


A. Provide flashing and trim systems to prevent water leakage to the building interior.

B. Fastening systems shall allow for the thermal movement of the materials without buckling, loosening, and leakage.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Catalog cuts and installation instructions for manufactured products.

C. Shop Drawings: Indicate materials, gages, profiles, jointing patterns, jointing details, fastening methods, and installation details. Include schedule of each type and profile of flashing to be furnished for instillation under Section 042113.


A. Applicator: Company specializing in sheet metal flashing work with 5 years minimum experience.

B. Unless indicated or specified otherwise, perform work in accordance with the recommendations of SMACNA.

C. Pre-Installation Conference: Attend pre-installation conference as specified in Section 013119.





B. Stack material to prevent twisting, bending, and abrasion, and to provide ventilation.

C. Prevent contact with materials during storage which may cause discoloration, staining, or damage.

1.7 GUARANTEE

A. Submit in accordance with Section 017700.

B. Furnish guarantee from the installer of each system that metal flashings will properly shed water to the roof or to the building exterior, under all weather conditions, for a minimum period of two years from the date of Substantial Completion. Leaks due to failure of flashing materials, and due to improper installation shall be promptly repaired at no expense to the Owner, and that watertightness of the repair will be demonstrated to the Owner.

C. For coil-coated sheet metal materials, furnish from the coatings installer non-prorated 20-year warranty against failure of film integrity, and against fade and chalking.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SHEET MATERIALS

A. Prefinished Galvanized Steel Sheet: 1. ASTM A653 steel sheet with G90 galvanized coating or ASTM A792 steel sheet with AZ60

aluminum/zinc coating; 24 gage unless noted otherwise; factory prefinished with 70 percent resin Kynar 500 or Hylar 5000 coating, color to match sheet metal roofing system.

2. Manufacturers: a. AEP-Span, Dallas TX; (214-827-1740; 800-527-2503). b. Centria, Moon Township PA (800-759-7474).c. Copper Sales, Inc., Minneapolis, MN (612-545-1604; 800-426-7737).

B. Stainless Steel: ASTM A167; Type 302 or 304.

2.2 ACCESSORIES

A. Fasteners:1. Furnish bonded stainless steel / neoprene sealing washers for exposed applications. 2. Finish exposed fasteners to match material being fastened. 3. Material:

a. Galvanized Steel Sheet: Use galvanized steel or stainless steel. b. Aluminum Sheet and Stainless Steel: Stainless Steel.

4. Use screws when fastening into wood or sheet metal. 5. Use expansion anchors or drive pins when fastening into concrete or masonry.

B. Sealants:1. Lapping and Bedding Joints: Butyl Rubber Type - One of the Following:

a. "Butyl Sealant" by Tremco, Inc. Sealant/Weatherproofing Division; Beachwood, OH; 800-321-7906; 216-292-5000)

b. "BP-400" by Adco Global, Inc. (800-248-4010).2. Exposed Joints: Polyurethane Sealant - One of the Following:

a. "Chem-Calk 900" by Bostik Construction Products (Huntington Valley, PA; 800-221-8726; 215-674-5600).

b. "Dynatrol I" by Pecora Corp. (Harleysville, PA; 800-664-7903; 215-799-7528). c. "Sonolastic NP I" by Sonneborn/ChemRex (Shakopee, MN; 800-433-9517; 952-496-

6000).]

C. Solder: ASTM B32.

D. Cold Galvanizing Compound: ZRC Worldwide, "ZRC Cold Galvanizing Compound," or approved product meeting the requirements of FS DOD-P-21035.



E. Flexible Flashing: "Grace Ultra," by W.R. Grace (800-354-5414), or approved.

F. Plastic Cement: FS SS-C-153, Type I-asphaltic base cement.

2.3 FABRICATION

A. General Requirements:1. Field measure site conditions prior to fabricating work. 2. Form sections true to shape, accurate in size, square, and free from distortion or defects. 3. Fabricate cleats and starter strips of same material as sheet; interlockable with sheet. 4. Form pieces in longest practical lengths, except as limited by expansion joint requirements. 5. Non-Moving Joints: Shop fabricate to the greatest practical extent.

a. Solder all non-moving shop fabricated joints in steel and stainless steel flashing; [weld all non-moving joints in aluminum flashing and trim;]

b. Prefinished Galvanized Steel: Lap joints 1 inch, minimum; accurately cut and fit as necessary to maintain profile; embed contact surfaces in sealant; rivet with stainless steel or color matched coated steel pop rivets at 3 to 4 inches o.c.

6. Hem exposed edges on underside 1/2 inch; miter and seam corners. 7. Shop fabricate corner sections with non-moving corner joints and 18 inch long legs. 8. Fabricate vertical faces with bottom edge formed outward 1/4 inch and hemmed to form drip. 9. Form seams lapped in the direction of water flow.

B. Fabricate all flashing to detail, in accordance with referenced SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual details, and as specified below. Use minimum 24 gage prefinished galvanized steel sheet unless indicated or specified otherwise.1. Gutters: Prefinished galvanized steel; SMACNA Figure 1-2, Style A or F; 4 inch width unless

indicated otherwise; provide straps or ferrules at 36 inches on center per Fig 1-14; expansion joints at maximum 50 feet in accordance with Figure 1-5.

2. Downspouts: Schedule 40 steel pipe; 3" diameter round.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION



3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Coordinate and sequence flashing installation with the work of other Sections. Furnish flashing to other trades as necessary for installation as a part of the work of other Sections.

B. Use flexible flashing in locations indicated, and under curb flashings.

C. Install starter and edge strips, and continuous cleats before starting installation.

D. Fastening: 1. Secure flashings using continuous cleats whenever possible. Use exposed fasteners only at the

backside of copings, and at other locations not exposed to public view, unless otherwise approved by the Architect.

2. Fit flashings tight in place. Make corners square, surfaces true and straight in planes, and lines accurate to profiles.

E. Make watertight connections between scuppers and adjacent roofs, walls, and flashings. Seal all laps.



F. Joints:1. Install metal flashings (including embedded flashings and reglets) with provision for plus or

minus 1/16 inch thermal movement at each end; provide expansion joints at 12'-0" o.c., maximum.

2. Seal concealed lap joints in with two parallel beads of butyl sealant; use butyl sealant where bedding sealant is indicated or required.

3.3 FIELD TESTING

A. Upon request of the Architect, demonstrate that installation is completely watertight by hosing with water as directed.

END OF SECTION

Fort Steilacoom Park- Trail Access Upgrades Joint SealantsMarch 16, 2020 Bid Set Section 079200

JOINT SEALANTS 079200-1

SECTION 07920 - JOINT SEALANTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:1. Cleaning and preparation of joint surfaces. 2. Sealant and backing materials.

B. Related Sections:1. 076100 - Sheet Metal Roofing: Sealants, furnished and installed as part of sheet metal roofing

work. 2. 076200 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Sealants, furnished and installed as part of flashing

and sheet metal work. 3. 088000 - Glazing: Glazing sealants. 4. 321313 - Concrete Paving: Expansion joint fillers.



1.2 REFERENCES

A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. C1193 - Guide for Use of Joint Sealants.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Submit for each sealant material used. Include manufacturer's surface preparation, priming, and installation instructions for each proposed sealant.

C. Quality Control Submittals:1. Schedule of sealant types, colors and respective locations.


A. Installers: 1. Use only skilled workmen specially trained in the techniques of sealing, and familiar with the

published recommendations of the manufacturers of the sealants being used.

1.5 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS

A. Unless recommended otherwise by the manufacturer, install sealant systems as follows:1. Do not apply sealant when ambient temperatures are below 40 degrees F, or expected to fall

below 40 degrees F before sealant cure is complete. 2. Do not apply sealant to substrates or accessories that are moist.

1.6 GUARANTEE

A. Furnish guarantees in accordance with Section 017700.

B. Furnish a 2 year installer's guarantee covering defects in installation.

C. Furnish Type S sealant manufacturer's standard 5 year warranty.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SEALANTS

A. Type S - Neutral Cure Silicone Sealants:1. Dow Corning, 790 Silicone Building Sealant, or "795 Silicone Structural Glazing and

Weatherproofing Sealant." or "Contractors Weatherproofing Sealant." 2. Pecora "890 Architectural Silicone Sealant."3. Spectrem 3 by Tremco Incorporated.4. General Electric Co. "Ultrapruf II SCS-2900."5. General Electric Co. "Silpruf."

B. Type P: ASTM C920, Type M, grade NS, Class 25; Tremco "Dymeric," Chem-Calk 500, Pecora "Dynatrol II," Sonneborn "Sonalastic NP-II", PRC "Permapol RC-2," or approved.

C. Type PT: ASTM C920, Type M, Grade P, class 25; Tremco "THC 900", Sonneborn/ChemRex "Sonolastic SL 2", Pecora "Urexpan NR-200", or approved; standard colors as selected.

D. Type A: ASTM C834; Tremco "Acrylic Latex Caulk," Pecora "AC-20," Sonneborn/ChemRex "Sonolac," or approved; standard colors to match adjacent construction.

E. Type SM: Mildew Resistant Silicone Sealant: USDA approved; Dow Corning 786 by Dow Chemical, 898 Silicone” by Pecora (800-523-6688), Sonolastic Omniplus by Sonneborn/ChemRex, Sanitary 1702 Silicone Sealant by GE Silicones / General Electric Company, or approved; white color.

2.2 ACCESSORY MATERIALS

A. Primer: Non-staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application.

B. Joint Cleaner: Non-corrosive and non-staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer; compatible with joint forming materials.

C. Backer Rod: Closed or open cell foam as recommended by the sealant manufacturer for the application; round profile; thickness approximately 130 percent of joint width.

D. Bond Breaker: Pressure sensitive tape recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION



C. Verify joint dimensions and conditions are acceptable to receive the work of this Section.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean and prepare joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Remove any loose materials and other foreign matter which might impair adhesion of sealant.

B. Apply masking tightly around joints to protect adjacent surfaces from excess sealant.

C. Prime as required for proper bond to substrate materials.



D. Backing Materials:1. Place backer rod to achieve proper sealant width/depth ratios and to prevent sealant sag.2. Use bond breaker where there is insufficient depth to use joint filler.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Perform work in accordance with ASTM C1193, unless specified otherwise or recommended otherwise by the sealant manufacturer.

B. Apply sealant within recommended temperature ranges.

C. Joint Profile:1. Sealant beads shall have a sectional width to depth ratio of 2 to 1, unless specified otherwise or

recommended otherwise by the sealant manufacturer.

D. Tooling:1. Tool joints concave, unless indicated or specified otherwise. Finish to uniform profile and depth,

free of air pockets, embedded matter, ridges, and sags.

3.4 CLEANUP

A. Clean adjacent surfaces free of excess sealant as the work progresses. Use cleaning agents recommended by the sealant manufacturer.

B. Upon completion, remove and dispose of masking.

3.5 PROTECTION

A. Protect sealant in joints subject to dirt, moisture, and traffic during the sealant curing process. Protection shall be able to resist traffic while remaining securely in position.

3.6 SCHEDULE

A. Type S: Provide at all exterior joints, unless specified otherwise; colors as selected from manufacturer's complete line for each type of sealant.

B. Type P: Provide at all joints in building concrete, unless specified otherwise; standard colors as selected from manufacturer's complete line of pre-formulated colors.

C. Type PT: Provide at all exterior and interior horizontal joints subject to traffic and abrasion, unless specified otherwise; standard colors as selected from manufacturer's complete line of pre-formulated colors.

D. Type A: Provide at all interior joints, unless specified otherwise.

E. Type SM: Provide at joints around plumbing equipment or related adjacent construction.

END OF SECTION

Fort Steilacoom Park- Trail Access Upgrades Hollow Metal Doors and FramesMarch 16, 2020 Bid Set Section 081113

HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113-1

SECTION 081113 – HOLLOW METAL DOOR AND FRAMES


A. Section Includes:1. Rolled steel doors and frames. 2. Accessories.

B. Related Sections:1. 061000 – Rough Carpentry: Support framing.2. 087100 - Door Hardware. 3. 087300 - Door and Hardware Installation: Installation of doors and related hardware. 4. 088000 - Glazing: Glazing in doors and frames. 5. 099000 - Painting: Field painting of doors and frames. 6. Division 23 – Mechanical: Frame-mounted ventilation grille.

C. Drawings, the provisions of the Agreement, the General Conditions, and Division 1 specification sections apply to work of this Section.


1.2 REFERENCESA. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): A250.8 - SDI-100 Recommended Specifications for

Standard Steel Doors and Frames. B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)

1. A366 - Specification for Steel, Carbon, Cold Rolled Sheet, Commercial Quality. 2. A569 - Specification for Steel, Carbon (0.15 Maximum Percent), Hot Rolled Sheet and Strip,

Commercial Quality. 3. A653 - Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated

(Galvannealed) by Hot-Dip Process. C. International Building Code (IBC) D. Steel Door Institute (SDI): SDI-105 - Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Frames.

1.3 SUBMITTALSA. Make submittals in accordance with Section 013300. B. Product Literature: Submit manufacturer's published literature for doors and frames. C. Shop Drawings:

1. Frames: Indicate configuration, anchor types and spacings, location of cutouts for hardware, reinforcement, and finish.

2. Doors: Indicate elevations, internal reinforcement, closure method, and cutouts for hardware, glazing and louvers.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Conform to requirements of ANSI A250.8.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLINGA. In accordance with Section 016000. B. Protect doors and frames with factory installed protective packaging. Maintain protective packaging

until installation commences.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

A. Members of the Steel Door Institute and of the National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers, subject to compliance with the specified requirements.

2.2 MATERIALSA. Steel Sheet: Cold rolled ASTM A366, or hot rolled pickled and oiled sheet conforming to ASTM

A569.2.3 DOORS

A. ANSI A250.8; Seamless. B. Minimum 18 gage face sheets for interior doors; minimum 16 gage face sheets for exterior doors. C. Core:

1. Interior Doors: Vertical steel stiffeners with sound deadening fill between stiffeners, or resin impregnated kraft paper honey comb core.

2. Exterior Doors: Polystyrene or polyurethane foam core. D. Provide continuously welded seamless edges. E. Close top edges of exterior doors flush with steel filler cap; seal joints watertight. F. Cut mortises for butts using appropriate templates; universal non-handed preparation of doors is not

acceptable. 2.4 FRAMES

A. Design: Double equal rabbet, unless indicated otherwise; fully welded. Fabricate frames with throat dimensions as indicated.

B. Gages:1. Exterior Frames: Minimum 14 gage. 2. Interior Frames: Minimum 16 gage for frames of door openings up to and including 4 feet in

width; 14 gage for frames greater than 4 feet in width. 2.5 ACCESSORIES

A. Glazing Stops: Rolled steel channel shape, butted corners; prepared for countersink style tamperproof screws.

2.6 FINISHA. Exterior Units:

1. A60 hot dip galvannealed coating conforming to ASTM A653; factory un-primed.2. Include reinforcing and other internal components.3. Use zinc rich primer to touch-up galvanized coatings damaged during fabrication or handling.4. Shop prime galvanized surfaces with Sherwin Williams "DTM Wash Primer B71Y00001 "; self-

crosslinking acrylic primer; color similar but not identical to finish coat. One coat in compliance with manufacturer’s instructions for surface preparation and application.

5. Shop finish primed surfaces with Sherwin Williams “Acrolon 218 HS Acrylic Polyurethane”; 2 coats in compliance with manufacturer’s instructions

B. Interior Units: Manufacturer's standard rust inhibitive primer.

https://www.sherwin-williams.com/architects-specifiers-designers/products/dtm-wash-primer?itemCatentryId=18971





B. Do not begin installation until unsatisfactory conditions are resolved. Beginning work constitutes acceptance of site conditions and responsibility for defective installation caused by prior observable conditions.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF FRAMESA. Install frames in accordance with SDI-105 and in accordance with labeling requirements.B. Coordinate with wall construction for anchor placement.C. Coordinate installation of glass and glazing.D. Install accessories.E. Install roll formed steel reinforcement channels between two abutting frames. Anchor to structure and

floor.F. Installation Tolerances; Maximum Diagonal Distortion: 1/16 inch measured with straight edge, corner

to corner. G. Door and hardware installation is specified in Section 087300.

END OF SECTION

Fort Steilacoom Park- Trail Access Upgrades Door HardwareMarch 16, 2020 Bid Set Section 087100

DOOR HARDWARE 087100-1

SECTION 087100 – DOOR HARDWARE


A. Section Includes: 1. Finish hardware requirements. 2. Requirements for bidder-supplied hardware schedule.

B. General Requirements:1. Contractor shall provide complete hardware schedule including all pieces of hardware required at

each opening as specified herein and indicated in the Drawings.2. Allowed hardware manufacturers shall be as directed by Owner. Where specific model numbers

are provided, it is for the purpose of establishing basis for quality and design only. Contractor shall provide alternate products or functions as necessary to meet requirements of Drawings and specifications.

3. Manufacturer substitutions are not permitted.4. Obtain each type of hardware from single manufacturer.5. Review Drawings, Door Schedule, and requirements of this Section thoroughly and provide

required hardware for all openings, including openings which may have been inadvertently omitted from Door Schedule.

6. Should an opening be omitted or an opening not indicated in Door Schedule, provide hardware of same quality, design and function as specified for similar openings.

7. Furnish hardware complete with brackets, plates, fittings, and other accessories required for installation.

8. Provide screws, nuts, bolts, through-bolts, washers, grommets, and other fastening devices necessary for proper installation of hardware; match finish of hardware being attached. Non-ferrous or corrosion resistant type required where exposed to exterior atmosphere.

C. Related Sections:1. 017700 - Closeout Procedures: Submittal of keys. 2. 081113 - Hollow Metal Doors and Frames. 3. 087300 - Door and Hardware Installation.

D. Drawings, the provisions of the Agreement, the General Conditions, and Division 1 specification sections apply to work of this Section.

E. Substitutions: Substitute products will be considered only under the terms and conditions of Section 016000.

1.2 SUBMITTALSA. Make submittals in accordance with Section 013300. B. Manufacturer's Data: Submit 3 copies of manufacturer's data for each item of finish hardware. C. Samples: Within 35 days after award of the Contract, submit 3 samples each of Push Plates and Kick

Plates in colors as selected for approval. D. Schedules: Upon award of hardware contract, submit 3 copies of the finish hardware schedule,

organized into "hardware sets" and indicating complete designation of every item required for each door or opening. List in vertical form. Review of hardware schedules does not fulfill project requirements in accordance with Contract Documents.

E. Templates: Furnish hardware templates to door and frame fabricators, and hardware installers. Upon request, check shop drawings of such other work to confirm that adequate provisions were made for the proper installation of hardware.



1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Supplier Qualifications: Finish hardware shall be supplied by recognized builders' hardware supplier

who has been furnishing hardware in the same area as the project for a period of not less than two years. The supplier's organization shall include a member of the American Society of Architectural Hardware Consultants who is available at all reasonable times during the course of the work to meet with the Owner, Architect or Contractor for project hardware consultation.

B. Regulatory Requirements:1. Conform to requirements of the jurisdictional code authorities. 2. Where openings are noted with an hourly fire resistance rating, provide hardware components

labeled by Underwriter's Laboratory, or other testing laboratory approved by the local code authorities, to meet the hourly fire rating noted.

3. Hardware shall conform to NFPA 80 for fire rated class indicated. 4. Comply with provisions of Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA),including ADA Accessibility

Guidelines and ANSI A117.1, and additional accessibility requirements of the jurisdictional code authorities.

1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLINGA. Delivery: Deliver all hardware in manufacturers' original unopened undamaged packages, clearly

identifying manufacturer, brand name, and contents. B. Replacements: In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements necessary. C. Mark each item of hardware as to description and location of installation in accordance with approved

hardware schedule. D. Protection: Use all means necessary to protect the finish on hardware before, during and after

installation. 1.5 GUARANTEES

A. Furnish 5-year unconditional guarantees for all door closers, under provisions of Section 017700. 1.6 MAINTENANCE

A. Factory representatives for door closers, exit bolts, and locksets shall be available during the construction to instruct the Contractor on the proper method of installation of their materials. They shall inspect and adjust their materials at the completion of the work, and supply proper maintenance manuals to the Owner.

B. Furnish two (2) sets of special tools for installation and maintenance of hardware. Tools for maintenance and adjustments are to be delivered to the Owner upon completion of the work.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS2.1 HARDWARE

A. Furnish hardware items as scheduled in approved bidder-supplied hardware schedule. B. Locksets and latchsets shall be Schlage L-Series Mortise type.C. Deadbolts shall be Schlage B-Series.D. Closers shall be LCN 4040XP Series.E. Except as listed in the following paragraphs, no substitutions of materials will be allowed unless

approved by the Architect. 2.2 HARDWARE MATERIALS AND FABRICATION

A. Furnish fasteners for installation with each hardware item. Furnish Phillips head fasteners, countersunk oval, flat head, or undercut head as appropriate for material to be installed. Furnish door



closers and exit devices applied to wood composite or mineral core doors with sex bolts sized to the thickness of the door.

B. Compatibility: Provide fasteners which are compatible with both unit fastened and substrate, and which will not cause corrosion or deterioration of hardware, base material, or fastener.

2.3 HARDWARE FINISHESA. General: Unless specifically indicated otherwise on the Drawings, provide architectural hardware in

the following finishes.1. General: US26D, Satin Chrome Plated, except:2. Push Plates, Door Pulls, Kickplates: US32D, Satin Stainless Steel3. Door Closers: 689/Sprayed Aluminum.

2.4 KEYINGA. All locksets and deadbolts shall be keyed as directed by the Owner.B. Construction master-key all locksets and cylinder items; provide 12 construction masterkeys.C. Locksets, exit devices, deadlocks, padlocks, and cylinders (all standard cylinder items) shall be:

1. Grand masterkeyed and/or masterkeyed in sets as required.2. Individually keyed in strict accordance with Owner's instructions.3. Keying shall be established specifically for the Owner by the manufacturer.

2.5 HARDWARE GROUPSA. As indicated on Drawings.

PART 3 - EXECUTION3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Installation of doors and hardware is specified in Section 087300.

END OF SECTION

Fort Steilacoom Park- Trail Access Upgrades Door and Hardware InstallationMarch 16, 2020 Bid Set Section 087300

DOOR AND HARDWARE INSTALLATION 087300-1

SECTION 087300 – DOOR AND HARDWARE INSTALLATION


A. Section Includes:1. Installation of hardware specified in Section 087100. 2. Installation of hollow metal doors.

B. Related Sections:1. 081113 - Hollow Metal Doors and Frames. 2. 087100 - Door Hardware.


1.2 REFERENCESA. Hollow Metal Manufacturer’s Association (HMMA): 840 - Installation and Storage of Hollow Metal

Doors and Frames. B. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 80 - Fire Doors and Windows. C. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): A250.8 - SDI-100 Recommended Specifications for

Standard Steel Doors and Frames. D. The Door and Hardware Institute (DHI): Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for

Standard Steel Doors and Frames. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installers of doors and finish hardware shall be skilled mechanics experienced in this type of work. B. Fire rated doors and hardware shall be installed in accordance with the labeling requirements.

1.4 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONSA. Do not subject wood doors to abnormal heat, dryness, or humidity, or sudden changes thereof.

Condition doors to average prevailing humidity prior to hanging.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS2.1 DOORS, FRAMES, AND HARDWARE

A. Doors, frames and hardware are specified in other sections.




3.2 DOOR INSTALLATIONA. Install doors in accordance with the door manufacturer's printed instructions. B. Install doors plumb and square in associated frames maintaining specified clearances.



C. Except where specified otherwise in the respective door sections, maintain clearances of 1/8 inch at jambs and heads, 1/8 inch at meeting stiles for pairs of doors, and 1/2 inch from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or covering, except where threshold is shown or scheduled provide 1/4-inch clearance from bottom of door to top of threshold.

D. Install hollow metal doors in accordance with ANSI A250.8 and HMMA 840. E. Install fire rated doors in accordance with NFPA 80. F. Install doors to operate freely, but not loosely, free from hinge bound conditions, sticking or binding.

Do not install in frames which would hinder operation of doors. G. Ensure doors are free from rattling when in latched position. H. Install transom panels accurately maintaining specified clearances, secured in accordance with

approved shop drawings. 3.3 FINISH HARDWARE INSTALLATION

A. Install hardware plumb, level and true to line in accordance with manufacturer’s templates, printed instructions and Project conditions.

B. Where cutting and fitting is required on substrates to be field painted or similarly finished, install, fit, remove and store hardware prior to finishing. Reinstall hardware after finishing operations are completed.

C. Do not install surface mounted items until finishes have been completed on the substrate. D. For substrates which are not factory prepared for hardware:

1. Mortise work to correct size and location without gouging, splintering or causing irregularities in exposed finish work.

2. Fit faces of mortised components snug and flush without excessive clearance. E. Hardware Locations: The following is a general listing and may contain items which do not apply to

this Project. 1. Butt Hinges:

a. Top: 5 inches from inside head of frame down to top of hinge. b. Bottom: 10 inches from finish floor to bottom of hinge. c. Intermediate: Equally spaced between top and bottom hinges.

2. Locksets and Latchsets: 38 inches from finish floor to centerline of knob or lever. 3. Deadlocks and Deadlatches: 48 inches from finish floor to centerline of cylinder. 4. Exit Devices: 38 inches from finish floor to centerline of cross bar or touch bar. 5. Door Closers:

a. Degree of door swing as indicated in Hardware Schedule approved by Architect, or if not indicated, locate to permit maximum door swing.

b. Locate on interior side of exterior doors. c. Locate on stair side of doors at stairways. d. Locate on room side for doors in public areas, corridors and other similar areas.

6. Wall Stops: Place on adjacent wall at height to contact knob, lever or pull. 7. Floor Stops and Floor Stop/Holders: Place to permit maximum swing of door and to prevent

door hardware from hitting wall. Place within 3 inches of latch edge of door, and out of foot traffic.

8. Kick Plates and Armor Places: Mount on push side, 1/8 inch above bottom edge and centered. 9. Weatherstripping: Trim seals accurately and butt tightly to minimize gaps.

3.4 ADJUSTMENT AND CLEANINGA. Adjust and check each operating item of hardware and each door to ensure proper operation of

function of every unit.



B. Lubricate moving parts with graphite type lubricant unless otherwise recommended by the hardware manufacturer.

C. Ensure weatherstripping and seals do not inhibit closing and positive latching of door. D. Replace defective materials or units which cannot be adjusted to operate as intended. Reinstall items

found improperly installed. E. Replace or re-hang doors which are hinge bound and do not swing or operate freely. F. Remove and replace doors which are warped, twisted or which are not in true planes. G. Replace factory finished doors damaged during installation H. Prior to date of Substantial Completion, readjust and relubricate hardware items as necessary.

3.5 FINAL ADJUSTMENTA. Wherever hardware installation is made more than 30 calendar days prior to date of Substantial

Completion of a space or area, return to the work during the week prior to acceptance or occupancy and make a final check and adjustment of all hardware items in such space or area. Clean and lubricate operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish of hardware and doors. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment, spring power, back check, closing and latching speeds, and handicap requirements.

B. Instruct Owner's personnel in proper adjustment of hardware during the final adjustment of hardware.

END OF SECTION

Fort Steilacoom Park- Trail Access Upgrades GlazingMarch 16, 2020 Bid Set Section 088000

GLAZING 088000-1

SECTION 088000 - GLAZING


A. Section Includes:1. Plastic glazing at hollow steel frames.

B. Related Sections: 1. 055000 – Metal Fabrications: Security grille at transom windows.2. 081113 - Hollow Metal Doors and Frames: Door frames to receive glazing.



1.2 REFERENCESA. American National Standard (ANSI): Z97.1 - Performance Specifications and Test Methods for

Safety Glazing Materials in Buildings. B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):

1. C1036 - Standard Specification for Flat Glass. 2. C1048 - Standard Specification for Heat Treated Flat Glass, Kind HS, Kind FT (Coated and

Uncoated). 3. E773 - Test Method for Seal Durability of Sealed Insulating Glass Units.4. E774 - Specifications for Sealed Insulating Glass Units.

C. Glass Association of North America (GANA): Glazing Manual.1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Make submittals in accordance with Section 013300. B. Submittals specified in this Section may be incorporated into submittal specified in other Sections,

where glass is to be provided in those Sections. C. Product Data: Submit product data on glass, glazing materials, and insulating glass system. D. Shop Drawings: Show size and thicknesses of glass, proposed "bites" in frames, sizes and locations

of blocking, spacers, beads, stops, and edge treatments. Note quality, type, and strength of each light.E. Maintenance Instructions: Provide manufacturer’s instruction on cleaning and maintenance of sheet

glazing products.F. Warranty: Submit draft of manufacturer's and fabricator's warranty for Architect's review

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with pertinent recommendations in the GANA "Manual of Glazing." B. Safety Glass Standard: Comply with applicable IBC requirements.C. Qualifications of Glass Manufacturer: Provide glass produced by a nationally recognized

manufacturer of high efficiency glass. D. Qualifications of Glazers: Provide personnel thoroughly trained and experienced in the skills

required, and at least one person completely familiar with the referenced standards and the requirements of this Work, who shall personally direct installation of glazing materials.


GLAZING 088000-2

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLINGA. Comply with applicable provisions of Section 016000. B. Provide cushions at edges of glass to prevent impact damage during shipment and storage. C. Keep vacuum cups free from foreign material that could scratch glass. D. Comply with insulating unit fabricators requirements for limits on exposure to reduced barometric

pressure during shipment. 1.6 WARRANTY

A. Submit warranties under provisions of Section 017700. B. Replacement Guarantee:

1. Provide new conforming glass units to replace glass units which break for a period of one year. 2. Units broken by impact, fire, earthquake, or similar events which exceed the design loads and

conditions are not subject to this requirement.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS2.1 SECURITY GLAZING

A. Flat solid abrasion resistant UV-resistant polycarbonate sheet; monolithic; translucent; 6.0mm thickness; color as selected by Architect.

B. Palram (Kutztown, PA; 800-999-9459); “Palgard” or approved equal.2.2 ACCESSORIES

A. Setting Blocks: Neoprene; 70-90 Shore A durometer hardness; 4 inches long x 1/4 high x width as required for application indicated.

B. Glazing Tape: Norton "V-980," PTI "303," or approved. Size: 1/8 inch by 1/2 inch. 2.3 FABRICATION

A. Shop cut plastic glazing to the greatest extent possible. Finish all edges smooth in compliance with manufacturer’s instructions.


A. Prior to starting work, carefully inspect installed work of other trades and verify that such work is complete to the point where work of this section may properly commence. Notify the Architect in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work.


C. Verify surfaces of glazing channels or recesses are clean, free of obstructions, and ready for work of this Section.

3.2 PREPARATIONA. Clean contact surfaces and wipe dry. B. Seal frame corner joints, and other leakage points with sealant. At insulating glass units the sealant

shall be compatible with the seal of the unit. Do not plug weep holes.


GLAZING 088000-3

C. Prime surfaces scheduled to receive sealant, unless otherwise recommended by the sealant manufacturer.

3.3 INSTALLATION A. Setting Blocks: Place setting blocks in frames for support of glass. Place at quarter points unless

approved otherwise. B. Set glass tightly in position with proper clearances in accordance with the referenced standards. C. Perimeter glass clearances within setting frame shall be in accordance with GANA recommendations

and as required by the glass manufacturer to provide for wind, earthquake drift, and thermal expansion.

D. Unless specified otherwise, glaze units with gaskets furnished with the framing systems specified in other sections.

E. Glazing for Non-Rated Doors and Windows, Where Gaskets Are Not Furnished:1. Glaze with glazing tape. 2. Pre-measure and cut tapes to required lengths; adhere to fixed stops, setting horizontal tape at

heads and sills before vertical tape. 3. Install tape with tight butt joints; no overlaps will be accepted. Set tape with straight lines level

with frame sight line. 4. Position glass, uniformly sealing against tape. Install inside removable stops and place tape in

stops forming a uniform seal against glass, level with sight lines. F. Adjust glazing materials to form a uniform sight line.

3.4 CLEANINGA. Clean excess glazing materials from adjacent finished surfaces. B. Remove labels after work is completed.

END OF SECTION

Fort Steilacoom Park- Trail Access Upgrades Resinous FlooringMarch 16, 2020 Bid Set Section 096723

RESINOUS FLOORING 096723-1

SECTION 096723 – RESINOUS FLOORING


A. Section Includes: Seamless epoxy flooring and concrete coating system. B. Related Sections:

1. 033013 - Concrete: Substrate slab finishing; vertical stem walls. 2. 099000 - Painting and Coating: Other coatings.



1.2 REFERENCESA. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):

1. C307 - Test Method for Tensile Strength of Chemical-Resistant Mortars, Grouts, and Monolithic Surfacings.

2. C579 - Test Methods for Compressive Strength of Chemical-Resistant Resistant Mortars and Monolithic Surfacings.

3. D635 - Test Method for Rate of Burning and/or Extent and Time of Burning of Self-Supporting Plastics in a Horizontal Position.

4. D638 - Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics. 5. D2240 - Test Method for Rubber Property -- Durometer Hardness.

1.3 SUBMITTALSA. Make submittals in accordance with Section 013300, unless specified otherwise. B. Product Data: Submit product data and manufacturer's installation instructions. C. Samples: Provide one minimum 1"x3" size sample of flooring material, applied to a suitable

substrate, indicative of material and finish proposed for the finished work. D. Submit letter from the manufacturer stating that the installer is approved by the flooring system

manufacturer. E. Maintenance Data: In accordance with Section 017700, furnish manufacturer's instructions covering

care and maintenance of flooring. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Applicator Qualifications: Acceptable to the primary materials manufacturer, regularly engaged in the installation of polymer floor systems, with minimum three years experience; able to demonstrate successful completion of at least five projects of similar size and complexity.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLINGA. In accordance with Section 016000. B. Storage: Store materials in a protected location in strict accordance with the manufacturer's

recommendations. Maintain temperature of storage area between 60°F and 90°F. 1.6 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS

A. Unless otherwise required by the flooring manufacturer, maintain surface and ambient temperature between 60°F and 90°F during installation and for 24 hours after flooring has cured.

B. Maintain ventilation to remove volatile emissions produced during the installation process.



C. Provide uniform and sufficient lighting in areas of installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS2.1 SEAMLESS FLOORING SYSTEM

A. Approved System: Products by General Polymers Division of Sherwin Williams Company.1. Primer: General Polymers 3579.2. Seal Coat with Anti-Microbial Agent: 8746

B. Aggregate: Proprietary quartz aggregate. C. Color and Finish: As selected by Architect.

2.2 ACCESSORIESA. Cove Strip: Box or tight-radius (1/4" max) cove with self-adhesive attachment, unless recommended

otherwise by flooring manufacturer. B. Sealant: Manufacturer's standard elastomeric urethane sealant.




C. Moisture Testing of Concrete Slabs: 1. Perform calcium chloride tests to determine the vapor emission rate from the concrete slab.

Notify the Architect if tests results show a vapor emission rate which exceeds 3 lbs per 1000 sq. ft. in a 24 hour period.

2. Perform a minimum of 3 tests for the first 1000 square feet, and one additional test for each additional 1000 square feet or fraction thereof. Perform no fewer than 2 tests for each separate area to receive flooring.

3. Test kits are available from VAPRECISION 800-449-6194. 3.2 PREPARATION

A. Shotblast all concrete floor surfaces to receive seamless polymer flooring. Areas not accessible to equipment shall be mechanically scarified.

3.3 INSTALLATIONA. Apply flooring in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Finish surface shall be

smooth and even with no deviations from plane greater than 1/8 inch in 10 feet, and free of depressions subject to puddling. Transitions shall be smooth and gradual.

B. Thickness: 3/16" inch nominal, with minimum thickness 5/32". C. Pitch to floor drain, with adjoining surface level with grating. D. Install cove strip 8 inches above finish floor; adhere to concrete substrate. Detail cove base at all wall

intersections in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations; form uniform tight radius cove. E. After application of base, undercoat, and aggregate, and after undercoat has cured, thoroughly broom

clean the floor to remove excess aggregate. Squeegee and backroll sealer in accordance with manufacturer's instructions for "Medium Texture" finish.



F. Seal around equipment bases and floor penetrations. 3.4 CLEAN-UP

A. After installation, clean up excess materials and rubbish. B. Prior to Substantial Completion, clean the floor surface with cleaning agents recommended by the

flooring system manufacturer. 3.5 PROTECTION

A. Adjacent Surfaces: Protect adjacent surfaces and materials from damage. Repair all damage to surrounding surfaces and materials to the satisfaction of the Architect.

B. Protect the installation from damage until final acceptance of the work.

END OF SECTION

Fort Steilacoom Park- Trail Access Upgrades Reinforced Plastic Panel Wall CoveringsMarch 16, 2020 Bid Set Section 097733

REINFORCED PLASTIC PANEL WALL COVERINGS 097733-1

SECTION 097733 – REINFORCED PLASTIC PANEL WALL COVERINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Reinforced plastic panel wall covering. 2. Adhesives, sealants, and related accessories.

B. Related Sections:1. 061000 – Rough Carpentry: Substrate sheathing



1.2 REFERENCES

A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): E84 - Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: 1. Product literature on adhesives and sealants to be used in conjunction with panel system

installation. 2. Manufacturer's product literature for system components.

C. Samples: 1. Three samples of wall paneling material proposed for the work; 3 x 4 inch minimum size. 2. One each of each cap, corner, and division molding proposed for the work; minimum 4 inches in

length.


A. Panel system shall be USDA approved for use in food preparation and service areas.

1.5 SUBCONTRACTOR GUARANTEE

A. Furnish Subcontractor Guarantees in accordance with Section 017700.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Comply with requirements of Section 016000.

1.7 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS

A. Maintain a minimum temperature of 60 degrees F and relative humidity as prescribed by the adhesive manufacturer, during installation, and until installed adhesive is fully cured.

B. Allow no containers of adhesive to be opened until all potential sources of flame or spark have been shut down or extinguished and until warnings against their ignition during adhesive application have been posted.

C. Provide ventilation to disperse fumes during application of solvent based adhesive.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PANEL SYSTEM COMPONENTS

A. Panel Material:1. Manufacturer/Type:

a. Marlite Brand FRP by Marlite (Dover, OH 330-343-6621); color as scheduled in the Finish Legend.

b. Kemlite “Glasboard” with Surfaseal, by Crane Composites (Channahon, IL 815-467-8600); color as scheduled in the Finish Legend.

2. Panel Type: Fiberglass reinforced polyester panels, with embossed textured face. 3. Thickness: 3/32 inch. 4. Size: 48 inches x length required for conditions indicated.

B. Moldings: Manufacturer's standard PVC cap, corner, and division moldings; color to match panels.

C. Adhesive:1. For Panel Installation: Marlite Brand C-375 or C-551 Construction Adhesive by Marlite, or 444

Non-Flammable F.R.P. Panel Adhesive by W. W. Henry Company, 2. For Molding Installation: Marlite Brand C-375 C-551 Adhesive by Marlite, or 444 Non-

Flammable F.R.P. Panel Adhesive by W. W. Henry Company. 3. Furnish adhesive spreaders with 3/16 inch V-notches, 5/16 inch apart for application of adhesive

to panels.

D. Sealant: Flexible waterproof sealant for bedding panel edges, Marlite Brand Silicone Sealant MS-251 by Marlite, or Silicone Sealant S255C by Kemlite Company.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONDITION OF SURFACES

A. Substrate: Verify that substrate is clean, dry, solid, straight, and free from projections.

B. Where conditions require installation of paneling prior to installation of flooring, coordinate with other trades to establish accurate location of top of base.

C. Do not start work until other work requiring penetration of wall covering has been completed, or accurately located.

D. Commencement of plastic paneling wall covering work constitutes installer's acceptance of the substrate.

3.2 CUTTING AND FITTING

A. Cut panels accurately to size with proper allowance for expansion and moldings.

B. Sand or file all edges smooth without chipping.

C. Cut openings for penetrations in accurate location with approximate 1/8 inch clearance around penetrations.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install base molding to wall at proper elevation, in solid bed of adhesive. Allow adhesive to set thoroughly prior to installation of paneling.

B. Seal base molding to top of wall base.

C. Establish centerline of each distinct flat area to be covered. Trim division moldings to mate with base moldings; install in solid bed of adhesive, either on centerline, or offset 24inches from center, as necessary to maximize panel widths at corners. Molding shall be installed straight and plumb.



D. Cut top cap and division or corner moldings to shape, with edges trimmed to fit to adjacent moldings.

E. Apply sealant into installed moldings in sequence with panel installation.

F. Apply adhesive to backs of panels in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.

G. Maintain lines and levels of panel edges and moldings.

H. Allow 1/8 inch gap between top cap, corner, or division molding posts, and panel edge; all edges shall be firmly bedded to the moldings in sealant.

I. Promptly remove sealant squeeze out with a damp cloth, as work progresses; remove adhesive with appropriate solvent.

J. Install sealant behind flanges and at penetrations through paneling, and between top cap of panel and substrate.

3.4 CLEANING

A. Inspect surfaces of paneling and remove excess adhesive from face of laminate using solvent recommended by manufacturer.

B. Promptly remove unused cut pieces from the site.

C. Prior to substantial completion of each area where reinforced plastic panel wall covering is installed, clean all surfaces of plastic panels, using procedures recommended by the manufacturer.

END OF SECTION

Fort Steilacoom Park- Trail Access Upgrades Painting and CoatingMarch 16, 2020 Bid Set Section 099000

PAINTING AND COATING 099000-1

SECTION 099000 – PAINTINGS AND COATINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Site applied paint coatings.

B. Related Sections:1. 051200 - Structural Steel: Preprimed metal surfaces. 2. 055000 - Metal Fabrications: Pre-primed metal surfaces. 3. 081113 - Hollow Metal Doors and Frames: Preprimed metal surfaces. 4. 096723 - Resinous Flooring: Epoxy concrete slab and wall coatings



1.2 REFERENCES

A. Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC).

1.3 DEFINITIONS:

A. Sheen: Degree of luster of the dried paint film. Where terms such as "gloss," "semi-gloss," "low-gloss," "matte," "satin," "eggshell," or "flat," are used, it shall be subject to the Architect's interpretation, regardless of manufacturer's nomenclature for any particular sheen level. The Architect reserves the right to select from any of manufacturer's published sheen levels for each paint system, if sheen of initial paint finish sample is not approved.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Materials List: Organize to indicate painting systems to be used with each substrate. Include proposed dft for each coat and manufacturer's product data as required to verify compliance with the specified requirements. Do not include MSDS sheets.

C. Samples:1. Paint Samples:

a. Submit three samples of each paint finish on an 8"x10" card. Reference manufacturer, type of paint, color, sheen, substrate, and application.

b. Furnish additional samples until all paint finishes are approved. 2. Transparent Finish Samples:

a. Submit samples of each wood species and transparent finish combination. b. If, in the judgment of the Contractor, the wood species or finish method selected indicate

that color variations may be inevitable, submit samples in sets of 3 or more illustrating the possible range of these variations.

c. When approved, the finished sample or sets shall become the standard for approval.

D. Contract Closeout Submittals: Record Paint Samples: In accordance with Section 017700, submit three 8"x10" samples of each paint and color used, indicating paint manufacturer and formula number; bind in identical sets. Deliver to on site location as directed.


A. Applicator: Company specializing in commercial painting and finishing with a minimum of three years documented experience.



B. Environmental Requirements for Solvent Based Paints: Comply with the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) requirements for volatile solvents content limitations, as applicable to each classification of coating.

C. Visual Standards: Each distinct area of the finished work shall be free of variations in color and sheen, orange peel, runs, sags, blistering, checking, cracking, scratches, dust, dirt, bugs, and other contaminants.



B. Delivery: Deliver paint materials to the jobsite in sealed, original, labeled containers, each bearing manufacturer's name, type of paint, brand name, color designation, and instructions for mixing and/or reducing.

C. Storage: Store paint materials at a minimum ambient temperature of 45 degrees F. in a well ventilated area.

D. Toxic, acidic, and combustible materials: Take all necessary precautionary safety measures as recommended by the material manufacturers and governing regulations.

E. Place cotton waste, cloths, and material which may constitute a fire hazard in closed metal containers and daily remove from the site.

1.7 SITE CONDITIONS

A. Weather Conditions: 1. Do no exterior work on unprotected surfaces when raining, or other moisture is present or

expected, or before applied paints can dry or attain proper cure. 2. Allow wetted surfaces to dry and attain temperatures and condition specified hereinafter before

proceeding with previously started work.

B. Temperature: 1. Do no painting work when surface and air temperatures are below 40 degrees F or below those

temperatures recommended by the manufacturer for the material type used. 2. Minimum temperatures for latex finishes: 45 degrees F for interior work and 50 degrees F. for

exterior work, unless approved otherwise.

C. Lighting: Maintain a lighting level of minimum 50 foot-candles on the surfaces to be painted or finished.

D. Ventilation: Provide adequate continuous ventilation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Unless specified otherwise, furnish manufacturer's highest grade coating systems by one of the following manufacturers: 1. The Sherwin-Williams Company. 2. Benjamin Moore Paint Company. 3. Pittsburgh Paints. 4. Pratt & Lambert. 5. ICI Paints North America.

2.2 EXTERIOR PAINT SYSTEMS:

A. Opaque Finish at Wood Substrates:1. Sherwin Williams:

a. Primer: "A-100 Exterior Latex Wood Primer."



b. Finish: "A-100 Exterior Latex Flat." 2. Manufacturer: Benjamin Moore Paint Company

a. Primer: Super Spec Latex Exterior Primer (169)b. Finish: Ultra Spec Exterior Flat Finish (N447)

3. Manufacturer: ICI Duluxa. Primer: "#2000 Dulux Professional Exterior 100% Acrylic Wood Primer."b. Finish: "#2200 Dulux Professional Exterior 100% Acrylic Flat Finish

B. Cement Board Siding Substrate:1. Manufacturer: Sherwin-Williams

a. Primer Repair: "Loxon Exterior Acrylic Masonry Primer," A24W300b. Finish: "A-100 Exterior Latex Flat."

2. Manufacturer: Benjamin Moore Paint Companya. Primer Repair: Super Spec Latex Exterior Primer (169)b. Finish: Ultra Spec Exterior Flat Finish (N447)

3. Manufacturer: ICI Duluxa. Primer Repair: #3030 Ultra-Hide Bond Prep, pigmentent bonding primerb. Finish: "#2200 Dulux Professional Exterior 100% Acrylic Flat Finish

C. Wood (structural lumber and glue-lams) 1. Manufacturer: Sherwin-Williams

a. Finish: WoodScapes Polyurethane Stain, A15T5]2. Manufacturer: Benjamin Moore Paint Company:

a. Finish: Arborcoat Semi-Transparent Deck & Siding Stain (0638) 3. Manufacturer: Cabots

a. Finish: Semi-transparent water based acrylic stain.

D. Steel Substrate: Epoxy/Polyurethane System:1. Epoxy Primer: Tnemec "Hi-Build Epoxoline II" Series N69, Carboline 888, Ameron "Amercoat

385," Benjamin Moore & Company Corotech Epoxy Mastic (V160)or approved. 2. Polyurethane Finish Coats: Tnemec Series 1075 "Endura-Shield" Acrylic Polyurethane Enamel,

Carboline "133 HB," Ameron "Amercoat 450SA," Benjamin Moore & Company : Corotech Waterborne Urethane Gloss (V540) ) or approved; semi-gloss or satin sheen.

2.3 INTERIOR PAINT SYSTEMS

A. Interior Trim Systems – Metal Substrate: One of the following.1. Manufacturer: Sherwin-Williams

a. Metal Primer: “Pro Industrial Pro-Cryl B66” Universal Acrylic Primer (2.5 – 5.0 mils dft 138 g/l VOC)

b. Metal Primer: (DTM waterborne). Super Spec HP D.T.M. Acrylic Semi-Gloss Enamel (P29)

c. Finish: Pro Classic Waterborne Semi-gloss dft 157 g/l VOCd. Finish: (Semi-Gloss) Super Spec HP D.T.M. Acrylic Semi-Gloss Enamel (P29)

2. Manufacturer: ICI Devoea. Metal Primer: "Mirrolac" DP 8502 WB; DTM waterborne primer.b. Finish: DR3349 "Wonderpure SG."

3. Manufacturer: ICI Duluxa. Metal Primer: "Devflex" 4020 DTM waterborne primer.b. Finish: LM9200 "Lifemaster 2000" S.G.

4. Manufacturer: Ameron International. a. Metal Primer: "Amercoat 148," Waterborne Acrylic Primer. b. Finish: "Amercoat 220," Waterborne Acrylic Topcoat; semigloss.

B. Opaque Finish Wood Substrate: One of the following.1. Manufacturer: Sherwin-Williams

http://www.sherwin-williams.com/architects-specifiers-designers/products/catalog/pro-industrial-procryl-universal-acrylic-primer/?referringCategory=interior-paint-coatings/primers/&N=703487084+851703839



a. Primer: Harmony Primer 0 VOC B11W900b. Finish: Pro Classic Waterborne Semi-gloss dft 157 g/l VOC

2. Manufacturer: ICI Devoea. Primer: DR3160 "Wonderpure Primer."b. Finish: DR3349 "Wonderpure SG."

3. Manufacturer: ICI Duluxa. Primer: LM9116 "Lifemaster 2000" primer."b. Finish: LM9200 "Lifemaster 2000" S.G.

4. Manufacturer: Benjamin Moore Paint Companya. Primer: Ultra Spec 500 Zero VOC Interior Latex Primer (N534)b. Finish: Ultra Spec 500 Zero VOC Interior Semi-Gloss Finish (N539)

5. Manufacturer: Parker Paint Mfg. Co., Inc. a. Primer: #1880 "Latex Millwork Primer" Interior Acrylic Latex Primer." b. Finish: #5350 "Great Northwest Interior Latex" Semi Gloss.

C. Wood (structural lumber and glue-lams) 1. Manufacturer: Sherwin-Williams

a. Finish: WoodScapes Polyurethane Stain, A15T5]2. Manufacturer: Benjamin Moore Paint Company:

a. Finish: Arborcoat Semi-Transparent Deck & Siding Stain (0638) 3. Manufacturer: Cabots

a. Finish: Semi-transparent water based acrylic stain.

D. Materials not specifically noted and otherwise required for the work, such as linseed oil, shellac, thinners and the like shall be of a quality not less than that required by manufacturers of the finish materials used in the work.

E. Products for each general purpose shall be compatible. Each system shall be products of one manufacturer where ever possible.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Prior to starting work, inspect installed work of other trades and verify that such work is complete to the point where work of this Section may properly commence. Perform adhesion tests on factory primed items. Notify the Architect in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work.


3.2 MOISTURE CHECK

A. Check for excess moisture using an electronic moisture meter. Do not paint materials with moisture levels which would impair the bonding of finish coatings.

3.3 PROTECTION

A. Adequately protect surfaces not to be painted, from spills, drips, over painting, and other damage caused by this work. Include surfaces within the paint storage and preparation areas.

B. Hardware and Miscellaneous Items: 1. Remove electrical outlet and switch plates, mechanical diffusers, escutcheons, surface hardware,

and fittings prior to starting work. 2. Store, clean and reinstall these items upon completion of work in each area. Use materials and

techniques as necessary to prevent damage to finishes on such items.



3.4 SURFACE PREPARATION

A. Prepare surfaces by removing dirt, dust, grease, oil, moisture, and other contaminants which would impair finish adhesion.

B. Ferrous Metal Shop Primed under other Sections: Solvent clean to remove oil and grease. Remove loose rust, and blistered and peeling paint to bare metal by scraping, sanding, and wire brushing in accordance with SSPC-SP2 and SP3. Immediately retouch damaged or abraded surfaces with compatible primer. Lightly sand all shop prime painted surfaces to receive paint finish.

C. Galvanized Ferrous Metal:1. Undamaged Surfaces: Solvent clean in accordance with SSPC-SP1; abrade surfaces with metal

preparation pad.2. Damaged Surfaces: Remove loose rust to bare metal by scraping, sanding, and wire brushing in

accordance with SSPC-SP2 and SP3. Touch up damaged surfaces with zinc rich primer.

D. Wood - Opaque paint finish:1. Spot coat knots, pitch streaks, and sappy sections with sealer. 2. Fill all nail holes and cracks. Sand filler smooth and level with wood surface.

E. Wood - Transparent Finish: Fill all exposed finish nail holes and cracks with matching color filler after prime coat is applied. Sand filler smooth and level with adjacent surfaces.

3.5 GENERAL APPLICATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Unless specified or indicated otherwise, follow paint manufacturer's label directions for general application procedures and coverage rates.

B. Do not apply finishes on surfaces that are not sufficiently dry. Make sure each coat of finish is dry and hard before a following coat is applied unless the manufacturer's directions state otherwise.

C. Tint filler to match stain when clear finishes are specified; work filler well into grain and, before it has set, working perpendicularly to the grain, wipe the excess from the surface.

D. Opaque Finishes: 1. Apply number of coats scheduled for each application, except that additional finish coats shall

be applied as necessary for complete hiding of substrate colors. 2. Apply primer coats untinted. Where more than one coat of paint is required, tint each

succeeding coat up to the final coat similar in tint, but slightly lighter in value (shade). 3. Sand lightly between coats if necessary to achieve required finish[; sand between all coats

applied to wood substrates.

E. Rollers for application and backrolling of latex paints shall have a nap of 3/8 inch or less.

F. Factory Primed Surfaces: Apply scheduled finish system, less primer coat, except as necessary for patching damage to factory prime coating.

G. Epoxy/Urethane Systems: Brush, spray, or roller apply.

3.6 EXTERIOR PAINTING SYSTEMS

A. Ferrous Metal - Zinc/Epoxy/Urethane System:1. System: Shop apply one coat of zinc-rich primer; field apply one coat of epoxy primer to 3 mil

minimum thickness and one coat urethane finish in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Verify compatibility with shop applied primer. Apply epoxy primer over all shop applied primers, unless the specified primer was shop applied.

2. Sheen: Semi-gloss or satin, unless indicated otherwise. 3. Application: Use on all exterior non-galvanized ferrous metal surfaces.



B. Galvanized Metal - Epoxy/Urethane System: 1. System: Retouch welds and damaged galvanized coatings with zinc primer; apply one coat

epoxy primer, and two urethane finish coats in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Verify compatibility with shop applied primer. Apply epoxy primer over all shop applied primers, unless the specified primer was shop applied. Brush, spray, or roller apply.

2. Sheen: Semi-gloss or satin, unless indicated otherwise. 3. Application: Exterior galvanized metal surfaces.

C. Wood - Exterior Stain Finish:1. System: Two coats of exterior wood stain in accordance with the manufacturer's

recommendations. Each coat shall be spray applied and back brushed 2. Application: Exterior wood trim, exposed wood framing, and timbers. 3. The first coat shall be machine applied to all wood surfaces prior to installation. The second

coat shall be brush applied or spray applied and back brushed in.

D. Wood - Latex System:1. System: Three coats; first coat exterior alkyd primer, second and third coats exterior latex. 2. Sheen: Semi-gloss, unless indicated otherwise. 3. Application: Exterior wood trim, and window frames.

3.7 INTERIOR PAINTING AND FINISHING SYSTEMS

A. Wood - Stain Finish:1. System: Two coats of wood stain in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.

Each coat shall be spray applied and back brushed 2. Application: Exposed wood framing and timbers. 3. The first coat shall be machine applied to all wood surfaces prior to installation. The second

coat shall be brush applied or spray applied and back brushed in.

B. Wood - Opaque Finish Latex System: 1. System: Three coats; first coat latex wood primer, and second and third coat latex enamel. 2. Sheen: Semi-gloss, unless indicated otherwise. 3. Application: Use on all woodsurfaces, including wood doors, and standing and running trim.

C. Ferrous Metal and Galvanized - Acrylic System:1. System: Three coats; first coat acrylic DTM primer; second and third coats latex finish. The

primer may be omitted at factory primed surfaces, except as necessary to recoat damaged or abraded preprimed surfaces.

2. Sheen: Semi-gloss, unless indicated otherwise.3. Application: Interior ferrous metal surfaces including hollow steel metal doors and frames, pipe

steel hand and guard rails, overhead doors and frames, access doors and panels, and fire extinguisher cabinets.

3.8 CLEANUP

A. As the work proceeds and on completion of the work, promptly remove all sealers, primers, paints and finishes where spilled, splashed or splattered in a manner not to damage the surface from which it is removed.

B. Remove masking.

C. Clean, or replace with new, all lamps and electrical fixtures damaged by overspray; replace with new identical components all lighting fixture louvers and reflectors damaged by overspray.

3.9 COLOR SCHEDULE

A. Provide paint colors to match those indicated on the drawings. Where a paint color is listed from a specific manufacturer, paint products from other approved manufacturers may be used, provided the



color exactly matches the specified color, and the paint system meets the specified requirements. Where no paint color is indicated, provide color and sheen as selected by the Architect.

END OF SECTION

Fort Steilacoom Park- Trail Access Upgrades Code SignageMarch 16, 2020 Bid Set Section 101473

CODE SIGNAGE 101473-1

SECTION 101473 – CODE SIGNAGE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Code required signage.

B. Related Sections:1. 321313 – Concrete Paving: Painted graphics over paving.




A. Accessibility Signage:1. Provide acrylic plastic reverse silk screened signs with international symbol of accessibility,

raised letters, and Braille, at the following locations:a. Accessible toilet and bathing facilities. b. Signage indicating accessible changing table locations.

2. Provide painted metal international symbol of accessibility at the following locations:a. Accessible parking locations. b. Accessible passenger loading zones.

3. Provide directional signage at the following in accessible areas to indicate the direction to the nearest similar accessible area:a. Inaccessible building entrances.

4. Each door to an exit shall have a tactile sign stating EXIT, which includes raised letters and Braille, and which complies with ANSI A117.1.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Samples: Submit samples of each general sign type proposed for the Work.

C. Schedule: Submit schedule of signage. List text, location, size, and type for each sign to be provided.


A. Qualifications:1. Fabricator Qualifications: Signage manufacturer with five years documented experience in work

of similar type and scope. 2. Installer Qualifications: Use only installers skilled and experienced in the installation of

graphics of the type scheduled.

B. Regulatory Requirements: Signage shall conform to the requirements of the jurisdictional code authorities.

C. Preinstallation Conference:1. Administer preinstallation conference as specified in Section 013119. 2. Attendees: Contractor, Architect, Owner’s Representative, sign installer. 3. Review installation procedures and proposed locations. Perform mock-up installations in

locations as approved.

Fort Steilacoom Park- Trail Access Upgrades Code SignageMarch 16, 2020 Bid Set Section 101473

CODE SIGNAGE 101473-2

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Plastic Sheet: 1/8 inch thick acrylic sheet; low gloss finish.

2.2 FABRICATION

A. Signs shall be free of rough edges, irregular surfaces, non uniform finishes, and similar imperfections.

B. Unless specified otherwise, signage shall be silk screened to the backside of clear plastic sheet, unless approved otherwise. Provide solid color background over silk screened text. Apply images with uniform colors, sharp definition of line, and accurate configuration. Unless specified otherwise, text shall be 1 inch high Helvetica medium.

C. Provide pre-drilled countersunk holes at each of 4 corners for tamper-resistant countersunk fasteners.

D. Exterior Traffic and Parking Signs:1. Fabricate from minimum .063 aluminum, with baked enamel finish and silk screened graphic.

a. Traffic Control - beaded embossed. b. Parking Control - flat screened.

2. Support: U-Channel hot-rolled steel; deep green baked enamel finish; punched for bolt mounting of sign.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION



3.2 INSTALLATION

A. All graphics shall be mounted level and plumb and in accurate alignment, unless indicated otherwise.

B. Mounting:1. Clean surfaces as necessary to accommodate signage. 2. Use tamper-resistant stainless steel fasteners, countersunk.

END OF SECTION

Fort Steilacoom Park- Trail Access Upgrades Toilet AccessoriesMarch 16, 2020 Bid Set Section 102813

TOILET ACCESSORIES 102813-1

SECTION 102813 – TOILET ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Metal and plastic toilet accessories. 2. Grab bars for accessible toilet enclosures. 3. Rough-in frames furnished to other sections. 4. Attachment hardware.

B. Related Sections:1. 061000 - Rough Carpentry: Blocking.



1.2 REFERENCES

A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): A117.1 - Accessible and Usable Building Facilities (2003)

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: 1. Submit for each toilet accessory.2. Include complete blocking and mounting instructions for fold down baby counters.


A. Do not deliver accessories to site until rooms in which they are to be installed are ready to receive them.

B. Pack accessories individually in a manner to protect accessory and its finish.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Verify locations and dimensions shown with field conditions prior to installation.

B. Avoid damaging the work or finish of other trades; repair damage, or replace damaged items, as directed, at no additional cost to the Owner.

1.6 WARRANTY


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ACCESSORIES

A. Manufacturer: Bobrick Washroom Equipment Company (North Hollywood CA; 818-503-1630), unless approved otherwise.

B. Accessories: Toilet accessories are scheduled on the Drawings.

Fort Steilacoom Park- Trail Access Upgrades Toilet AccessoriesMarch 16, 2020 Bid Set Section 102813

TOILET ACCESSORIES 102813-2

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION



3.2 PREPARATION

A. Deliver inserts and rough-in frames to jobsite at appropriate time for building-in. Coordinate installation.

B. Furnish templates and rough-in measurements as required.

C. Protect adjacent or adjoining finished surfaces from damage during installation of work of this Section.

D. Verify exact location of accessories.

E. Coordinate installation of blocking and backing as necessary to support wall mounted items.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install fixtures, accessories and items in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, and as indicated on the Drawings.

B. Install true, plumb, and level, securely and rigidly anchored to substrate.

C. Mount accessories in locations and elevations as indicated on the Drawings. Where elevation is not indicated, mount at the minimum elevation recommended by the manufacturer.

END OF SECTION

Fort Steilacoom Park- Trail Access Upgrades Bird Control DevicesMarch 16, 2020 Bid Set Section 108113

BIRD CONTROL DEVICES 108113-1

SECTION 108113 – BIRD CONTROL DEVICES


A. Section Includes: Wire bird control devices to deter birds from landing and roosting on the building structure.

B. Drawings, the provisions of the Agreement, the General Conditions, and Division 1 specification sections apply to all work of this Section.

C. Substitutions: Proposals for alternate products and methods for applications indicated may be considered by the Architect, subject to requirements of Section 016000, system performance requirements, and applicable PART 1 requirements of this Section.

1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTIONA. The bird control system shall consist of wire fabrications positioned on the building at locations

indicated and as necessary to interrupt potential roosting sites. Position, spacing, and distribution of devices shall be as recommended by the bird control device manufacturer.

1.3 SUBMITTALSA. Make submittals in accordance with Section 013300. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's product data as necessary to completely describe proposed materials

and installation systems. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate materials, extent of work, fastening methods, relevant field dimensions, and

relationship to adjoining construction. D. Samples: Furnish one of each type of post, wire, and fastener proposed for the work.E. Evidence of Qualification: Statement from the manufacturer certifying that proposed installer is a

certified installation company.1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Single Source Responsibility: Furnish products from one manufacturer for entire project.B. Utilize manufacturer-authorized installers knowledgeable in the proprietary requirements of the

specified system and installation requirements.C. Pre-Installation Conference: In accordance with Section 013119.

1. Administer prior to starting the work of this Section. 2. Require in attendance:

a. Architect. b. General Contractor. c. Device installer. d. Other parties affected by the work of this Section.

3. Agenda:a. Review installation details. b. Review installation requirements for substrates and related work.c. Request that all conditions which would prevent the satisfactory installation of the vapor

retarder be mentioned. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. In accordance with Section 016000. 1.6 WARRANTY


Fort Steilacoom Park- Trail Access Upgrades Bird Control DevicesMarch 16, 2020 Bid Set Section 108113

BIRD CONTROL DEVICES 108113-2

B. Installer's Guarantee: 2 year unlimited guarantee against defects in materials and workmanship. C. Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard 5-year warranty against failure caused by UV

degradation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS2.1 BIRD CONTROL SYSTEM

A. Manufacturer: Nixalite of America. (East Moline, IL; 888-624-1189). B. Product: "Premium Model ‘S’" - Modular Wire Spike System

1. Stainless steel wire and base strip spikes. 2. Wires: Stainless steel, 0.041” diameter, full-hard spring temper.3. Base Strip: Stainless steel, 0.25” wide x 0.02” thick, full anneal for flexibility, easy strip cutting

and surface shape memory.4. Premium Nixalite Model S: Full row spike, 4” high, 4” wide; no less than 120 wire points per

foot. Full 180-degree wire coverage. 5. Mounting System: As determined by the manufacturer and based on project conditions.

2.2 MOUNTING SYSTEMSA. Stainless Steel Base: Use exterior construction adhesive along with self-tapping screws to secure

installation. Protect as necessary to allow adhesive to dry without disturbance or exposure to extreme temperatures.




3.2 SURFACE PREPARATIONA. Surface shall be thoroughly cleaned and made free of bird droppings, nesting materials, rust, peeling

paint or other debris.B. Remove or repair article that may damage system after installation, including overhanging foliage,

brush and loose parts on the structure.3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install bird control system as recommended by the manufacturer.B. Install over all surfaces requiring protection.

1. Follow contours and angles closely.2. Space materials in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.

3.4 INSPECTIONA. Visually inspect completed bird control system installation for signs of poor installation, including

loose screws, fasteners or un-removed debris.B. Immediately correct and repair as necessary.

END OF SECTION

Fort Steilacoom Park- Trail Access Upgrades Miscellaneous SpecialtiesMarch 16, 2020 Bid Set Section 109013

MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES 109013-1

SECTION 109013 – MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:1. Emergency Key Box.

B. Drawings, the provisions of the Agreement, the General Conditions, and Division 1 specification sections apply to all work of this Section.

C. Substitutions: Substitute products will be considered only under the terms and conditions of Section 016000.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's complete product literature and other items as required by individual articles herein.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 EMERGENCY KEY BOX

A. Manufacturer: Knox Company (Phoenix, AZ; 800-552-5669)

B. Product: KnoxBox 3200.

C. Locations: Indicated on the Drawings.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install each item in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, as detailed, and in accordance with special requirements of each article.

END OF SECTION

Fort Steilacoom Park – Trail Access Upgrades Site FurnishingsMarch 16, 2020 Bid Set Section 129300

SITE FURNISHINGS 129300 - 1

SECTION 129300 – SITE FURNISHINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Provide all labor, materials, and equipment necessary to supply and install the following Site Furnishings.1. Picnic Table2. Drinking Fountain3. Porch Swing4. Bike Racks


B. Manufacturer's Instructions: Adhere to manufacturer's instructions for product handling, assembly, installation, and maintenance.

C. Manufacturer’s original factory finish must be intact for the installation of the furnishing to be considered satisfactory. On-site touch-up will not be accepted.

1.3 SUBMITTALS:

A. For each Product Specified, submit the following for approval prior to delivery:1. Manufacturer's product data.2. Manufacturer's installation instructions.3. Color and finish sample

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL

A. Comply with Manufacturer's recommendations and drawing details at all times. Where these may be in conflict, the more stringent requirements shall prevail.

B. All products shall be supplied as specified or approved equal. Refer to Division 1 Specifications for Product Substitution requirements.

2.2 PICNIC TABLE (FIXED)

A. Fairweather, Inc., Model MT-1200-4848A, fixed square table (ADA style). 4”x4” clear Douglas-fir tops and seats, surface mount. Steel to be powder coated black. As manufactured by Fairweather Site Furnishings / Tournesol Siteworks, Inc., Port Orchard, WA. Tel: 1-800-323-1798.1. Or, approved equal.



2. Note: Fixed table frames shall be constructed of a fully welded frame with all edges ground smooth prior to galvanizing. The center post shall be .180 wall x 5” square tube, the seat arm shall be .180 wall x 3” square tube, the seat arm brace shall be .120 wall x 1-1/2” square tube, the seat frame shall be 3/16””x3x3 angle and 3” square tube, and the table frame shall be 3/8”x2x2 angle. The frame shall be hot dipped galvanized after fabrication. Metal parts shall not be painted. Assembly hardware shall be 3/8”x 2-1/2” galvanized lag bolts. The wood seats and top shall be untreated, clear mixed grain Douglas Fir, nominal 4x4 boards, with all outside edges eased with a 1/2” chamfer. All picnic tables shall be installed with 12” x 48” concrete foundation or be installed as part of a paved plaza area.

2.3 DRINKING FOUNTAIN

A. Outdoor EZH20 Bottle Filling Station Bi-Level Pedestal with Pet Station, Non-Filtered, Non-Refrigerated1. Model #LK4420BF1UDB2. Color: Evergreen (EVG)3. With Flo-Well FWAS24WH Stormwater System, with permeable bottom and Flo-Well

FSW 069 Inlet/Inspection Port4. Shut off valve with serviceable Sch. 80 unions, inside NDS 10” diameter valve box, color

to be black.5. DCVA to be housed in a precast concrete utility box. Model 25-TA, as manufactured by

Oldcastle Infrastructure; Tel: 253.839.3500, or approved equal.

2.4 PORCH SWING

A. Porch Swings shall be the Austin Swing Bench, by Landscape Forms, 800.521.2546.1. Frame metal color TBD via submittal review of manufacturer’s base colors.2. Seat slats to be IPE wood. 3. Mounting hardware by manufacturer, structural support per drawings.

2.5 BIKE RACKS

A. Bike racks shall be the Tofino No Scratch, by Sportworks, 888.661.0555.1. Material to be stainless steel.2. Surface mounting hardware by manufacturer, structural support per drawings.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify installation conditions as satisfactory to receive work of this Section. Do not install until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. Beginning work constitutes acceptance of conditions as satisfactory.

3.2 DIRECT BURIAL INSTALLATIONS

A. All below-grade steel components scheduled for direct burial installation shall be coated in an approved manner prior to installation, typically either factory powder coating or hot-dipped galvanized.



B. Provide footing excavations sized per measured plans provided with the Contract Drawings, manufacturers printed assembly and installation instructions, or as directed by the Engineer, typically 18” diameter x 24” depth for most installations under 100 lbs/footing.

C. Coring and Saw-cutting:1. All products scheduled for direct burial installation within new paved areas are to be

installed prior to paving.2. In the event that paving is installed prior to site furnishings scheduled for direct burial

installation, saw-cutting will not be approved as a means of penetrating pavements. Coring, to the specified size of the footing, is the only method that may be considered.

3. Do not core completed work of the Contract to accomplish product installation without prior approval of the Engineer.

4. Where site furnishings are scheduled for installation in existing pavement of any type or where the Engineer has approved coring of pavement installed as part of the work of the Contract, the Contractor shall insure an adequate supply of clean water and continuously flush and clean cuttings from pavement surfaces to remain.

D. Concrete footings shall be neatly and evenly crowned slightly above adjacent finished grade where adjacent finished grade is generally level, matching adjacent finished grade where adjacent finished grade is sloped, or level to the bottom of base aggregate where installation in paved areas is scheduled.

E. Remove all concrete slurry from surrounding surfaces and site furnishings prior to request for inspection.

3.3 SURFACE INSTALLATIONS

A. Surface installations shall be made only upon approved concrete surfaces.

B. Use only manufactured approved anchoring devices.

C. Where the manufacturer does not provide a specification for anchoring, use only approved stainless steel wedge anchors as follows;1. Do not proceed with anchor installation until concrete pavement has had a minimum of 14

days cure time under normal conditions. Where weather conditions are beyond the range of normal, do not proceed with anchor installation without the approval of the Engineer.

2. Size to the largest standard diameter that the manufacturer’s pre-made hole will accommodate without force, typically 5/8”.

3. Size for embedment of ¾ of the actual depth of concrete to support the installation, in no case less than 2½”. Allow for depth of nut plus 3-5 threads protrusion above finished installation.

4. Do not over drill beyond 1/8” the depth necessary to accommodate the anchor.5. Torque to 80-85% of the anchor manufacturers recommended maximum.6. Provide at least one anchor for every bolt location hole for any site furnishing.

3.4 INSTALLATION OF MANUFACTURED ITEMS

A. Install all equipment in accordance with Specifications, Drawings and manufacturer's directions. Where these may be in conflict, the more stringent requirements govern.



3.5 INSTALLATION OF FABRICATED ITEMS

A. All fabricated items shall be installed consistent with the measured plans provided in the Contract Drawings utilizing materials

3.6 CLEANUP

A. Remove all metal, wood, and concrete debris, protective wrappings and coverings, and shipping materials from the project site. Remove all residues, repair all stains, scuffs, abrasions, and marks from the finished product prior to requesting inspection. Fully restore all areas of the site that were impacted by any Site Furnishing installation activities.


Fort Steilacoom Park – Trail Access Upgrades Common Work Results for Plumbing March 16, 2020 Bid Set Section 220500

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 220500 - 1

SECTION 220500 – COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING

GENERAL

WORK INCLUDED

A. Work includes the following: 1. Provide all designs, materials, equipment, labor, supervision, tools and items necessary

for the construction, installation, connection, start-up, testing and operation of all plumbing work for this project as defined by Division 22 and the Contract Documents.

DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS

A. The word "provide", as used in these specifications, means "furnish and install".

B. The word "accepted", as used in these specifications, means the acceptance of the Engineer and/or Architect.

C. Abbreviations: ANSI American National Standards Institute ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating & Air Conditioning

Engineers ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials AWS American Welding Society CISPI Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute F Fahrenheit FM FM Global HI Hydraulic Institute IBC International Building Code IMC International Mechanical Code MSS Manufacturers' Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings

Industry, Inc. NEC National Electric Code NEMA National Electrical Manufacturer's Association NFPA National Fire Protection Association NSF National Sanitation Foundation OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Administration psi Pounds per square inch psig Pounds per square inch gauge pressure SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air-Conditioning Contractors' National Association UL Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. V Volts UPC Uniform Plumbing Code WAC Washington Administrative Code WSEC Washington State Energy Code WISHA Washington Industrial Safety & Health Act



D. Refer also to Division 1 for additional acronyms and for additional definitions and explanations of terms.

E. Some of these abbreviations may not be used. All other abbreviations shall have the definition commonly associated with them by the trade or industry. Confirm the meaning of any unclear or unknown definitions with the Architect before proceeding with any work.

PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS

A. The drawings and specifications are intended to describe all plumbing work, unless otherwise shown. Provide all materials which are necessary for the proper completion of the installation or operation of the equipment. Where no basis of design is noted, refer to the equipment schedules, in the absence of schedules provide a product during submittals that meets the specified criteria.

B. The drawings are diagrammatic and do not show exact or complete ductwork and piping configurations or the necessary number and types of fittings. Provide all labor and materials required to complete the work indicated.

C. Scope of work listed, noted, or otherwise shown on the plans for which no product is supplied in the specification is still the responsibility of the contractor as part of the base bid work for this section. Such items shall be submitted along with other product data.

D. Any questions occurring during bidding or construction shall be resolved by direction in writing from the Architect. Any issues not so resolved or any conflicts shall result with the contractor bidding, furnishing and installing the most stringent condition. No exceptions.

LAW AND ORDINANCES

A. General: 1. All plumbing work specified under this contract shall be in strict accordance with the

latest rules and regulations of all applicable codes. 2. Contractor is not relieved from furnishing and installing work shown or specified which

may be beyond requirements of ordinances, laws, regulations, and codes. This work shall be included within the construction contract.

3. Contractor is not relieved from furnishing and installing work required by the local Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ) which may be beyond requirements of ordinances, laws, regulations, and codes. Review by AHJ of systems should be sequenced to accommodate time in the construction schedule for revisions/correction and second review by AHJ.

B. Approval: File necessary plans, prepare documents and obtain necessary approval of governmental departments having jurisdiction and required certificates of inspection for work and deliver same to Architect before requesting acceptance and final payment for work.

C. Permits, Certificates and Taxes: Procure and pay for all the necessary permits, certificates, and taxes for all work as required in the General and Supplementary Conditions. In addition,



perform all ordinance and performance tests in the presence of the Architect, and be responsible for advance notification. Submit copies of signed and accepted permits to the Architect.

STANDARDS

A. The most recent edition of the following is hereby referenced.

B. American National Standards Institute, Inc. (ANSI): B1.1 Unified Screw Threads B2.1 Pipe Threads (Except Dry Seal) B16.1 Cast-Iron Pipe Flanges & Flanged Fittings, 125, and 250 psi B16.3 Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings, Class 150 and 300 Pound B16.5 Steel Pipe Flanges, Flanged Valves and Fittings Including Ratings for

Class 150. B16.18 Cast Bronze Solder Joint Fitting B16.22 Wrought Copper and Bronze Solder-Joint Pressure Fittings B18.2.1 Square Hex Bolts, Screws, Including Askey

C. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) A53 Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc- Coated, Welded, and Seamless A120 Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized), Welded

and Seamless, for Ordinary Uses A47 Malleable Iron Castings A536 Ductile Iron Castings A183 Heat-Treated, Carbon-Steel Track Bolts and Carbon-Steel Nuts A126 Gray Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges, and Pipe Fittings A181 Forgings, Carbon Steel for General Purpose Piping A307 Carbon Steel Externally-Threaded Standard Fasteners A36 Structural Steel B32 Solder Metal B61 Seam or Valve Bronze Casting B62 Composition Bronze or Ounce-Metal Castings B88 Seamless Copper Water Tube

FEDERAL SPECIFICATION (FED. SPEC.)

WW-H-171D Hangers and Supports, Pipe

MANUFACTURERS' STANDARDIZATION SOCIETY (MSS)

SP-69 Pipe Hangers and Supports - Selection and Application

MATERIAL REVIEW, SUBMITTALS AND SHOP DRAWINGS

A. General: 1. Deliver material, submittal and shop drawing data to Architect in accordance with the

requirements of the General Conditions, Supplemental Conditions, this section and Division 1.



2. Do not place orders for materials, fixtures, or equipment until approval is obtained from Architect in writing. Verbal approval shall not be contractually binding and will not be considered.

3. Engineer’s contract includes not more than two reviews of submittals. Make the first submittal complete and organized as specified and second submittal the final submittal.

4. Make every attempt to respond to the reviewer’s comments in a timely manner. 5. The project construction schedule, beginning with the acceptance of the bid and

confirmation of the successful bidder, is not the responsibility of the Consultant Engineer. The Contractor's schedule shall recognize and accommodate the review intervals specified herein. The schedule shall identify and accommodate the specified submittal and re-submittal review and response period. The contractor shall not anticipate or base the construction schedule on expedited reviews or reviews of partial submittals. Submittals shall be organized and delivered as specified. No exceptions.

B. Submit 1. Provide submittals for all equipment and systems indicated and specified by the Contract

Documents 2. Provide three copies of the submittals in 3-ring notebook(s), organized by specification

section, large enough to accept total volume of material to the Architect. Reference project information shall include a. Project title, b. Project number and Location, c. Architect, d. Engineer, e. Contractor, f. Subcontractor(s), g. Submission date, h. Specification sections submitted.

(i) Label cover and binder end. Clearly indicate any items not included with submitted assemblies. Consultant Engineer will not take responsibility for collating submitted information into notebooks.

(ii) Submit only the work of one section per submittal. Submittals within a section shall be organized by subsection so that they are in the order they appear in the specification. Items not in the specification but shown only on the plans shall be included as though they appear at the back of the specification section and be labeled with the appropriate sheet number or be submitted in a separate submittal.

(iii) Label every submitted product with the associated specification section reference (e.g. 23 05 00-1.05.B.3-“Product A”) and indicate the specific product if multiple products, sizes, models, etc., are shown.

(iv) The Contractor shall make every attempt to respond to the Consultant Engineer's comments in a timely manner. Engineer’s contract includes not more than two reviews of submittals. Make the first submittal complete and organized as specified and second submittal the final submittal.

(v) Submittals not bound and organized as specified will be rejected.



(vi) Digital PDF submittals will be accepted in lieu of physical submittals at the discretion of the Architect and must meet the same organizational requirements.

i. Standards Compliance and Certification:

(i) Where equipment or materials are specified to conform with requirements of standards of recognized technical or industrial organizations such as American National Standards Institute (ANSI), American Society for Mechanical Engineers (ASME), Underwriters Laboratories Refrigeration Institute (ARI), or National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA), that use a label or published listing as a method of indicating compliance, proof of such conformance shall be submitted and accepted.

(ii) Submit certification for the product submitted and not pre-printed certifications. Do not make statements in the certifications that could be interpreted to imply the product does not meet all requirements specified, such as "as good as"; "achieve the same end use and results as materials formulated in accordance with the referenced publications"; "equal or exceed the service and performance of the specified material." Simply state that the product conforms to the requirements specified.

j. Substitution of Materials: Substitutions of materials will only be considered where specified materials cannot be obtained or where prior approval has been provided. All work and equipment required incidental to the substitution is the responsibility of the Contractor. Refer to Division 1 for the requirements related to substitutions and prior approvals.

CONSULTANT REVIEW

A. Review in general and does not: 1. Permit departure from Contract Documents. 2. Relieve Contractor from responsibility for error in detail, quantities, dimensions or

related items. 3. Accepted departure from previous instructions or detail. 4. Relieve Contractor of responsibility to provide all components, wiring, etc., required to

make item operational or usable. 5. Relieve Contractor of the responsibility to coordinate all power and clearance

requirements with other trades. 6. Imply acceptance of items for which no data is submitted.

B. Work which requires submittals shall not be started without Consultant Engineer's review.

C. Allow fifteen (15) working days for Consultant Engineer review.

D. Acceptance will be indicated by a signed stamp affixed to the submittal, or a letter over the Consultant Engineer's signature. No exceptions.

E. Re-submittals



1. Items of materials, fixtures and equipment not accepted by Consultant Engineer shall be resubmitted within 15 working days after Consultant Engineer review. If Contractor fails to submit items listed below for approval or resubmit in the event of disapproval within specified time, Contractor shall provide materials, fixtures and equipment as scheduled on drawings. Where equipment is not scheduled the Contractor shall provide materials, fixtures and equipment as identified in the specifications.

2. Decision of Consultant Engineer shall be final and binding and items shall be provided without change in contract price or time of completion.

PUNCH LIST & WARRANTEE

A. Refer to the requirements of Division 1.

B. Inform project design team of construction progress and schedule a site visit by the Engineer prior to covering pipe, duct, equipment that will, once construction is completed, be otherwise hidden from view. A substantial completion site visit will be completed at a later date.

C. Punch list items shall be provided to the contractor in writing. A written response indicating the corrective action taken or explanation of the situation must be returned to the Engineer.

PRODUCTS

EXPANSION SHELLS AND BOLTS

A. Expansion Shells for Rod Hangers 1. Phillips, Gregory, Omark, or Fastite in holes drilled in concrete.

B. Expansion Bolts for Equipment 1. USM or McCullough in holes drilled in concrete. 2. No screwed adapters underground.

FORMED STEEL CHANNELS AT SLAB

A. Provide for all equipment; number and size per manufacturer's recommendations or as indicated.

ANCHOR BOLTS

A. Provide for all equipment; number and size per manufacturers' recommendations or as indicated.

SUPPLEMENTARY STEEL FRAMING

A. Standard structural steel shapes or Schedule 40 steel pipe, galvanized with extra-heavy finish.

SLEEVES

A. Materials, General Schedule: 40 galvanized steel pipe with unthreaded ends, or standard structural steel shapes.



B. Firestopping: Three-hour rated penetration sealing system per UL 1479 and ASTM E-814. 3M Fire Barrier, Dow Chemical RTV, Manville Cerafiber, or accepted.

C. Seal: Seal annulus with bolted compression type seal. Link Seal or accepted equal.

WELDING TO BUILDING STRUCTURAL MEMBERS

A. Not allowed except as indicated.

NAMEPLATES

A. Laminated black plastic with lettering cut through to white background. Plastic strips with raised letters made by a marking device are not acceptable.

VALVE TAGS

A. Shall be 0.030" thick brass, 1" diameter size; state the service and destination of the line controlled. Provide tag inscriptions made with a lettering device with 5/16" high cut lettering. Laminated plastic tags, construction similar to nameplates will also be acceptable.

B. Provide a valve tag list that assigns valve tag numbers to functions.

PIPING IDENTIFICATION

A. Self adhesive, pre-printed identification labels indicating direction of flow and pipe contents, using common industry abbreviations. Identify pipe at every change of direction.

B. Comply with the latest ANSI Pipe Marking Standards for letter height and label placement.

PAINTING

A. Paint all exposed fixtures and equipment in conformance with Division 10. Coordinate color with Architect. Refer to Architectural documents for paint and application requirements.

EQUIPMENT LISTING REQUIREMENTS

A. Whenever UL Standards exist for equipment provide UL-accepted equipment bearing the UL label.

EXECUTION

INSPECTION

A. Verify installation conditions as satisfactory to receive work of this Division. Do not install until any unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. Beginning work constitutes acceptance of conditions as satisfactory.

PREPARATION



A. Field Measurements: Field-verify locations of new and existing work prior to commencing work of this Division.

B. Protect surrounding areas and surfaces to preclude damage from work of this Division.

INSTALLATION, ERECTION, AND PERFORMANCE

A. Install, apply, erect, and perform the work in accordance with "Quality Assurance" provisions, Specifications, and manufacturers' installation instructions and directions. Where these may be in conflict, the more-stringent requirements govern.

CLEANING

A. Promptly remove waste material and rubbish caused by mechanical construction work. At completion of the project, clean all equipment, piping and fixtures installed or provided under this Contract.

CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. Cut all openings and holes required for mechanical work. Carefully examine existing conditions prior to commencing work.

ACCESSIBILITY

A. Locate valves, dampers, controls, etc., to be easily accessible.

B. Install all equipment that requires periodic servicing or repairs to be readily accessible. Otherwise, obtain Architect's approval of location. Where valve and equipment is concealed behind access panels or by ceiling tiles, label panel or tile appropriately.

C. Provide access panels as indicated or required for piping, valve or equipment access. Refer to Architectural Documents to determine fire-rating requirements. The access panel size shall be in proportion to the equipment, piping, or valve requiring access. Minimum access panel size shall be 12" x 12". Due to the diagrammatic nature of the drawings, not all access panels are shown. Access panels are to be included as part of the base bid work.

SPECIAL PROTECTION

A. Exercise maximum precaution to provide positive protection for the existing building and equipment from damage of any kind, and in particular prevent any water and dust seepage into the existing building.

B. Storage of materials: Make all necessary provisions to prevent damage or corrosion of materials.

EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION

A. General: Provide supports for all equipment and appurtenances as required, including braces as required for seismic restraint; these include frames or supports for pumps and air handlers and



all mechanical equipment. Bracing shall conform with the requirements of IBC and IMC. Include the design, engineering and installation of these members is the responsibility of the contractor.

PIPE SUPPORTS

A. Attach hangers and support rigidly to the building structure; provide supplementary steel framing and bracing at all changes in pipe direction to resist thrust of flowing water. Provide seismic bracing as required by codes. Do not fasten hangers to metal deck. Do not use powder-actuated fasteners.

B. Provide additional steel support for piping runs through tight confinements. Provide trapeze system with vibration isolation and seismic restraint for piping through joists and as applicable, due to accessibility of ductwork and mechanical equipment.

EXPANSION SHELLS AND BOLTS

A. Use only where necessary to support piping or equipment from existing concrete slabs or walls.

SLEEVES AND SEALING OF SLEEVES

A. Provide all sleeving and sealing of sleeves for pipes and ducts.

B. Provide annular clear space of approximately 1/4" to 1/2"; size to accommodate insulation passing through sleeve where applicable.

C. Wherever piping passes through any floor slab above occupied space or equipment, provide pipe sleeves extending 1" above floor.

D. Set sleeves in place prior to pouring of concrete in new construction; core drill and grout sleeves in place for unit masonry construction and existing construction.

E. Sealing of sleeves through floor slabs and firewalls: Provide firestop system by 3M or accepted equal.

F. Sealing of sleeves for below grade floors and walls: Provide Link Seal. Refer to 223000.

NAMEPLATES

A. Provide for all equipment; fasten mechanically. Label access panel or ceiling appropriately for concealed equipment.

VALVE TAGS

A. Provide on all new valves; fasten with brass chain to the valve stem.

PIPING IDENTIFICATION



A. Provide pipe identification labels on not less than 10 foot centers, on both sides of a wall penetration, and at every change in direction, so that a label is visible from a standing position on the floor, not more than three feet from the wall. Refer also to this Section for pipe labeling requirements.

PAINTING

A. General Paint exposed equipment, ducts, piping, sheet metal work and mechanical system appurtenances unless noted otherwise. Coordinate color with Architect. Refer also Division 9.

B. Application: 1. Thoroughly clean surfaces to be painted to remove dirt, grease and scale. Wash

galvanized surfaces with mild solution of acid prior to painting to effectively clean oils from surface and to etch zinc.

2. Paint insulated surfaces and covered piping with one primer coat and two finish coats. 3. Paint exposed equipment, pipes and supports with one primer coat and two finish coats.

Paint factory painted equipment to match colors selected by the Architect: touch up damaged areas with paint to match factory color.

4. Paint the supporting devices for mechanical devices or systems specified to be painted.

WORK COORDINATED WITH OWNER:

A. Coordinate balancing with other work and building occupancy to ensure no interruptions occur.

WIRING

A. Wiring shall conform to applicable sections of these specifications. Provide wiring from branch circuit over current device to motor controller to motor terminals, including installation of starter and all connections. Provide raceway and conductors as shown for remote control, or interlock connections. Coordinate other control wiring with Division 23 of the Specifications. Provide overload elements in controllers sized to match motor nameplate full load amperes. Space within controllers shall not be used as a junction box.

B. Where power for a piece of equipment is not shown on electrical drawings, provide resources to install wire from piece of equipment to nearest electrical panel; coordinate power requirements with electrical engineer and wire as directed.

END OF SECTION

Fort Steilacoom Park – Trail Access Upgrades Plumbing Insulation March 16, 2020 Bid Set Section 220700

PLUMBING INSULATION 220700 - 1

SECTION 22 07 00 – PLUMBING INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

A. Work includes insulation for piping and equipment.


A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with all applicable City, County, and State codes and ordinances. In case of conflict with drawings or specifications, the codes and ordinances govern.

B. Basis: International Building Code; Uniform Plumbing Code; International Mechanical Code; Washington State Energy Code.

C. Applicable Industry Standards. Refer to Section 220500.

A. General: Submit in accordance with Division 1 and the following.

B. Product Data: Insulation, Insulation Covers; Inserts.

A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) Standards: E84 Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials

E96 Test for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials

B. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Standards: 90A Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems

255 Building Materials, Tests of Surface Burning Characteristics

C. Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. (UL) Publications: 723 Hazard Classification of Building Materials

A. Definitions: 1. "Exposed" is work exposed to the view of occupants in normally occupied areas and in

equipment rooms. 2. "Concealed" is work located in ceiling spaces, chases and other locations not exposed to

view. 3. "Cold Piping" includes the piping to 70 degrees F: 4. "Hot Piping" includes the piping from to 71 to 250 degrees F



B. Abbreviations: ASJ All-Service Jacket,

FSK Foil-Scrim-Kraft Jacket,

K Thermal Conductivity, BTU per hour per square foot per degree F for each inch of thickness,

PCF Pound per cubic foot density,

Perm Water vapor transmission rate (permeability),

SSL Self-Sealing Lap.

A. Provide composite or component ratings per NFPA 255, ASTM E84, or UL 723, as follows: Fiberglass Insulation, flame spread 25, smoke developed 50.

B. Composite includes insulation, jacketing and adhesive used to secure jacketing or facing.

C. Components include PVC jacketing and fittings, adhesive, mastic, cement, tape and cloth.

A. Thickness of insulation is defined as the thickness of the basic insulating medium not including finishing materials.

B. Mechanical Pipe Insulation: Flexible Elastomeric: Thickness shall conform to values tabulated below:

C. Domestic Water Piping Insulation: Fiberglass ASJ, Flexible Elastomeric: Thickness shall conform to values tabulated below:

MINIMUM PIPE INSULATION

Insulation Thickness for Pipe Sizes Service Fluid

Temp. Max °F

Runouts

1” & Less

1-1/4” – 2”

2-1/2” – 4”

5” – 6”

a. Domestic HW (HW, HWC) 120 .5 1.0 1.0 1.5 1.5 b. Kitchen HW (KHW) 140 .5 1.0 1.0 1.5 1.5 c. Domestic CW and make-up water piping

55 .5 .5 .75 1.0 1.0

d. Non-Potable Water, Rainwater Leaders, Coil Condensate

55 .5 .5 .75 1.0 1.0

D. Equipment, including but not limited to heat exchangers, air separators, etc. Rigid fiberglass board- 2" thickness.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS



A. Comply with "Quality Assurance" provisions, Specifications, and manufacturers' data. Where these may be in conflict, the more stringent requirements govern.

A. Fiberglass: Owens-Corning; Knauf; Certainteed; Johns Manville.

B. Flexible Elastomeric: Armstrong, Rubatex.

A. Fluid Piping Insulation: Fiberglass ASJ: One-piece fiberglass, molded heavy density with ASJ/SSL; Flexible Elastomeric; One piece closed cell neoprene foam with chemical adhesive joining. K value not greater than 0.23 at 75 F mean temperature.

B. Fluid Piping Insulation Fittings: 1. General: Provide insulation of equal thickness to adjacent pipe insulation. 2. Indoor: Pre-formed fiberglass or neoprene, mitered sections of pipe insulation, or

fiberglass blanket or neoprene sheet.

C. Fluid Valves: Flexible blanket consisting of sandwich section of fiberglass, equal thickness as adjacent insulation, enclosed in glass cloth cover, machine sewn at the ends; provide copper eyehooks and wire for lacing the blanket to the valve or pump; or preformed neoprene fittings.

A. General: Coordinate with the work of Section 221000.

B. Provide rigid insulation inserts, thickness equal to the adjoining insulation with vapor barrier.

C. Provide insulation protection shields between inserts and pipe hangers/supports, minimum 12" long, 18-gauge galvanized steel; Grinnell, Fee & Mason, Elcen, or accepted.

A. Hot water piping and fittings: PVC insulation jacket, fitted covers at fittings. Fire and flame spread rating not to exceed 25 and 50 respectively. Zeston or accepted equal.

A. Unfaced board, 6 PCF density, consisting of glass fibers bonded with thermosetting resin. Suitable for temperatures to 450 F.



A. Fiberglass Insulation Cement: Manville No. 460, or accepted equal, mineral wool based insulating cement with good adhesion to cold surfaces and rated to 1800oF.

B. Lagging Adhesive: Arabol E1658E, Foster 30-36, or accepted equal, thinned per manufacturer's instructions.

C. Vapor Barrier coating: Non-flammable, fire-resistant, polymeric resin, compatible with insulation.

D. Spray Mastic: Insulcoustic 551, Foster 35-01, or accepted equal.

E. Glass Cloth: Twinberg-Miller "Glasfab" No. 2020-X, Foster "Mast-a-Fab", or accepted equal.

F. Bonding Adhesive: Foster 85-17 or accepted equal.

G. Insulation Weather Cover for Piping Installed Outdoors: Embossed soft aluminum sheet, .016" minimum thickness.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

A. Verify installation conditions as satisfactory to receive work of this Section. Do not install until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. Install insulation and related equipment in accordance with the manufacturers written instructions. Beginning work constitutes acceptance of conditions as satisfactory.

A. Field Measurements: Field-verify locations of new and existing work prior to commencing work of this Section.

B. Protect surrounding areas and surfaces to preclude damage from work of this Section.

A. Install, apply, erect, and perform the work in accordance with "Quality Assurance" provisions, Specifications, and manufacturers' installation instructions and directions. Where these may be in conflict, the more stringent requirements govern.

A. Apply insulation only after piping systems have been tested and certified by the Architect as ready for insulation. If insulation is applied prior to testing, necessary removals, repairs and modifications to insulation due to leaks that may occur in piping systems shall be made without additional cost to the Owner.



A. Insulate all piping, fittings and equipment completely, except as indicated.

B. Do not insulate the following: 1. Piping: Valve stems, handwheels and operators and unions. 2. Equipment: Items with factory-applied insulation meeting the requirements of this

Section.

A. Apply in a workmanlike manner, by skilled workmen regularly engaged in this type of work.

B. Apply to clean and dry surfaces.

C. On cold surfaces, apply with continuous, unbroken moisture and vapor seal. Insulate and vapor seal all hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections that are secured to cold surfaces, to prevent condensation.

D. Extend all surface finishes to protect all raw edges, ends, and surfaces of insulation.

E. Install all piping insulation continuous through walls, ceilings, and floor openings and sleeves, except where firestop or firesafing materials are required.

F. Install with all joints tightly butted.

G. Tuck and tuft all edges of insulation.

H. Install insulation to allow easy access to equipment for inspection and repairs.

I. Carefully bevel and seal insulation around equipment nameplates.

A. Determine if piping requires heat tracing before applying insulation. See also Section 221000. Coordinate with pipe fitter.

B. Cold Piping: 1. Secure all ends with SSL butt strips, minimum 3" wide. 2. Secure all joints and exposed ends at fittings, valves, and equipment with vapor-barrier

mastic.

C. Hot Piping: Secure all ends with ASJ or SSL butt strips, minimum 3" wide; secure ASJ laps and butt strips with outward clinch staples at 4" spacing, or with suitable lap adhesive.

D. PVC Covers for Piping Fittings and Valves: Seal all circumferential edges by an overlap of at least 2" onto adjacent pipe cover. Secure ends of PVC covers solvent-type PVC adhesive.

E. Insulated piping located outdoors: Verify heat tracing system has been installed and tested for operation prior to installation of insulation. Apply insulation as specified. Apply embossed



aluminum weather cover to entire surface of exposed pipe. Double fold seam and seal with approved mastic.

A. Vapor Barrier: Cold water piping insulation shall be continuously covered with an accepted vapor barrier. Apply two coats of the vapor barrier coating over all surfaces and lagging not covered with continuous vapor barrier jackets. Fill all joints, cracks, seams and depressions, and apply additional lagging as necessary to form smooth continuous surfaces.

END OF SECTION

Fort Steilacoom Park – Trail Access Upgrades Domestic Water Piping March 16, 2020 Bid Set Section 221000

DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221000 - 1

SECTION 22 10 00 – DOMESTIC WATER PIPING

GENERAL

WORK INCLUDED

A. Work includes piping and associated appurtenances for the following systems. 1. Domestic cold, hot, hot water circulation, kitchen systems, sanitary, drain, waste, and

vent.

B. Related Work Specified or Indicated Elsewhere: 1. Section 224200 Plumbing Fixtures 2. Architectural Documents and Specifications

QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with all applicable City, County, and State Codes and ordinances. In case of conflict with drawings or specifications, the codes and ordinances govern.

B. Basis: International Building Code; Uniform Plumbing Code; International Mechanical Code.

C. Applicable industry standards. Refer to Section 220500.

SUBMITTALS

A. General: 1. Submit in accordance with Division 1, 220500 and the following.

B. Product Data: 1. Pipe and Fittings 2. Valves 3. Flanges and Unions 4. Hangers 5. Dielectric Unions. 6. Pressure Reducing Valve 7. Pressure and Temperature Relief Valve 8. Hoods and Flashings 9. Air Gap 10. Heat Tracing Tape

STANDARDS

A. The most recent edition of the following is hereby referenced.

B. American National Standards Institute, Inc. (ANSI): B1.1 Unified Screw Threads B2.1 Pipe Threads (Except Dry Seal)



B16.1 Cast-Iron Pipe Flanges & Flanged Fittings, 125, and 250 psi B16.3 Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings, Class 150 and 300 Pound B16.5 Steel Pipe Flanges, Flanged Valves and Fittings Including Ratings for

Class 150. B16.18 Cast Bronze Solder Joint Fitting B16.22 Wrought Copper and Bronze Solder-Joint Pressure Fittings B18.2.1 Square Hex Bolts, Screws, Including Askey

C. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): A53 Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc- Coated, Welded, and Seamless

A120 Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized), Welded and Seamless, for Ordinary Uses

A47 Malleable Iron Castings

A536 Ductile Iron Castings

A183 Heat-Treated, Carbon-Steel Track Bolts and Carbon-Steel Nuts

A126 Gray Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges, and Pipe Fittings

A181 Forgings, Carbon Steel for General Purpose Piping

A307 Carbon Steel Externally-Threaded Standard Fasteners

A36 Structural Steel

B32 Solder Metal

B61 Seam or Valve Bronze Casting

B62 Composition Bronze or Ounce-Metal Castings

B88 Seamless Copper Water Tube

D. Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute (CISPI) Standard Specifications CISPI 301 Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings for Sanitary and Storm Drain,

Waste and Vent Piping Applications.

CISPI 310 Couplings for use in connection with Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings for Sanitary and Storm Drain, Waste, and Vent Piping Applications

PRODUCTS

GENERAL

A. Comply with "Quality Assurance" provisions, Specifications, and Manufacturers' Data. Where these may be in conflict, the more stringent requirements govern.

B. Pressure Ratings: Provide all components with minimum pressure rating of 150 psig working pressure.



ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

A. Pipe 1. Copper Tubing: Chase, Anaconda, Revere, Mueller, Phelps-Dodge, Reading Tube,

Bridgeport

B. Fittings 1. Copper/Brass Fittings: Nibco, Tube Turns, Crane, Anaconda, Chase, Revere, Phelps-

Dodge

C. Valves 1. General: Crane, Lunkenheimer, Jenkins, Walworth, Kennedy, Stockham, Nibco, W-K-

M, Milwaukee, Powell, DeZurik, Homestead, Ohio 2. Non-metallic: Corrosion Resistant, Valves, ASAHI/ American or equal. 3. Pressure ratings indicated are steam working pressure (SWP).

D. Gaskets: Crane, Garlock, U.S. Rubber, Anchor, Flexitallic

E. Strainers Armstrong, McAlear, Sarco, Hoffman, Crane, Nicholson

COPPER PIPING

A. Above Ground (CW, HW, HWC) 1. Type L hard drawn seamless copper water tube, ANSI H23.1, ASTM B88 with cast brass

or wrought copper pressure fittings, ANSI B16.22.

B. Below Ground (CW, HW, HWC) 1. Pipe: Type K soft copper tube, ANSI H23.1, ASTM B88, with cast brass or wrought

copper pressure fittings, ANSI B16.22; cast-bronze solder joint fittings and screwed adapters, ANSI B16.18

C. Unions For Similar Materials: Wrought-copper solder joint unions, ANSI B16.22; cast-bronze solder joint fittings, ANSI B16.18. 1. For Dissimilar Materials: See Dielectric Unions Below.

D. Flanges and Flanged Fittings: Cast bronze, 125-pound Class, ASME Standards.

E. Joint Compound: Teflon Type

F. Solder, above ground piping 2-1/2 inch and smaller: 95 percent tin, 5 percent antimony solder, ASTM B32, 95TA.

G. Brazing, above ground piping 3" and greater: Sil-fos or Sil-braz.

H. Strainers: 250-pound cast bronze, Y-pattern, screwed or solder end, ASTM B61; 0.045 inch perforations, brass screen, ANSI B2.1.

I. Valves



1. Gate: 150-pound bronze, screwed or solder end, union bonnet, rising stem, solid bronze disc, repackable under pressure, ASTM B62.

2. Globe or Angle: 150-pound bronze, screwed or solder end, union bonnet, rising stem, solid bronze 500 BHN disc and seat ring or Teflon disc, repackable under pressure, ASTM B62.

3. Check: 150-pound bronze screwed or solder end, screwed cap, Y pattern, swing disc, regrindable seat, ASTM B62.

4. Ball: 150-pound bronze or brass body, ball and stem; solder or screwed ends, three piece construction, Teflon seat and seal.

DRAIN, WASTE, AND VENT PIPING

A. Below Ground: Service weight cast iron, ASTM 74/ASTM 120. Soil pipe and fittings with bell and spigot joints, or, no-hub cast-iron pipe with elastomeric sealing sleeve and stainless steel clamp, conforming to CISPI 301 if permitted by local plumbing authority.

B. Above Ground: Service weight cast iron, ASTM 74/ASTM 120. No-hub cast-iron pipe with elastomeric sealing sleeve and stainless steel clamp, conforming to CISPI 301 or galvanized steel with cast-iron drainage type fittings, ASTM C564, CISPI 310.

PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Description: Provide in accordance with Federal Specification WW-H-171E and MSS SP-69.

B. Acceptable Manufacturers: J.R. Smith, or equal.

C. Materials 1. Match piping material at point of contact with piping; carbon steel, cast iron or malleable

iron for black steel pipe; carbon steel, iron or malleable with zinc coating or cadmium-plated for galvanized steel pipe; carbon steel or malleable iron with copper finish or PVC plastic coated for copper pipe or plastic pipe.

2. Rods: Hot rolled steel, ASTM A36. Size in conformance with the following:

Rod Diameter (Inches) Pipe Size (Inches) Load at 650F (Pounds)

3/8 2 and smaller 610 1/2 2-1/2 and 3-1/2 1,130 5/8 4 and 5 1,810 3/4 6 2,710 7/8 8 to 12 3,770

D. Components 1. Ring Hangers:

a. 2" and smaller: Adjustable swivel type, Grinnell 97 or 104. b. 2-1/2" and larger: Adjustable split-ring swivel type, Grinnell Figure 104.

2. Clevis Hangers: Grinnell Figure 260



3. Trapeze Hangers and Multiple Pipe Supports: Structural steel shapes in conformance with Section 220500, supported by rods or structural steel shapes as required.

4. Horizontal Pipes at Walls: a. 2-1/2" and smaller: Malleable-iron, one-hole clamp, Grinnell 126. b. 3" and larger: Welded-steel bracket, Grinnell Figure 213, 194, 195, 199, used in

conjunction with ring or clevis hangers.

5. Vertical Pipes at Walls: a. 1" and smaller: Galvanized steel pre-formed metal shapes, Unistrut P1100 Series

with P2024 clamps for O.D. tubing and P2909 clamps for pipe. b. 2-1/2" and smaller: Galvanized steel pre-formed metal shapes, Unistrut P1100

Series with P2558 pipe straps. c. 3" and larger: Welded-steel brackets as specified for horizontal pipes at walls,

connected to Grinnell Figure 212 pipe clamp with Figure 110R eye socket.

6. Insulation Protection: Coordinate with insulation subcontractor, Section 220700.

DIELECTRIC UNIONS

A. Provide at each joint between dissimilar metals: 1. 2" and smaller: Capital insulating unions per Specification Sheet IUS-2; Epco dielectric

unions per Catalog 12-70. 2. 2-1/2" and larger: Capital insulating flange union per companion, 1/2 flange union with

bolt insulators, dielectric gasket, bolts and nuts per Catalog 12-70.

PRESSURE REDUCING VALVE

A. Bronze body construction without integral basket strainer, 300 psi working inlet pressure, 160 degree F working temperature, 10 to 35 psi range. Watts 223 LLP, Cash, Fisher, Spence or approved equal.

PRESSURE AND TEMPERATURE RELIEF VALVES

A. Zurn/Wilkins, or Watts series 40-140 bronze, ASME rated, automatic reseating, test lever.

AIR GAP

A. Polyethylene body,1 5/8" diameter brass cap, 2 1/8" long brass cap, 72020-SS Delta Classic Dishwasher Air Gap Brilliance Stainless

HEAT TRACING TAPE

A. Self regulating heating cable, to prevent freeze-up of hot water and cold water piping, 5 watt per lineal foot. UL listed. Raychem XL Trace or accepted equal.

B. Control: Provide line voltage thermostat to energize heat tracing tape below 40 degrees. Honeywell or approved equal.



EXECUTION

GENERAL

A. Verify installation conditions as satisfactory to receive work of this Section. Do not install until any unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. Install all equipment in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions. Beginning work constitutes acceptance of conditions as satisfactory.

B. Piping shall be installed routed directly as possible with the fewest fittings, parallel and true to building lines, avoiding architectural fixtures and building illumination.

C. Couplings shall not be installed in wall or floor sleeves.

D. Open piping shall be capped during construction to prevent dirt and debris from entering the piping.

E. All piping shall be concealed above the ceiling or inside the walls unless indicated or noted otherwise on the contract documents.

F. All items requiring service shall be installed in accessible locations or provided with an access door of adequate size to service the valve or equipment, minimum 18"x18". Coordinate rating of access door with the fire separation rating indicated on the Architectural documents.

PREPARATION

A. Field Measurements: Field verify locations of new and existing work prior to commencing work of this Section.


INSTALLATION, APPLICATION, ERECTION AND PERFORMANCE

A. Install, apply, erect, and perform the work in accordance with "Quality Assurance" provisions, Specifications, and manufacturers' written installation instructions and directions. Where these may be in conflict, the more stringent requirements govern.

B. Provide thrust bracing of all ells and tees on the following piping systems 3" and larger in size: CW.

C. Thrust bracing shall be affixed to fittings with metallic clamp devices with minimum 1-1/4" schedule 40 pipe struts. Paint all metallic parts for corrosion protection. Meet requirement of NFPA-13 for fire sprinkler piping thrust bracing.

INSTALLATION OF PIPING

A. General: Install pipe generally sloped to permit drainage at all low points, free from traps, and in a manner to conserve space for other work; cap or plug all open ends.



B. Location of Piping: 1. Piping plans, sections, details and diagrams are diagrammatic indicating general

arrangement of piping installation. Locate piping to avoid interference with building structural members, equipment, building openings, light fixtures, ductwork, electrical work, and other obstructions. Provide offsets as required.

2. Arrange piping to allow access for operation, service, disconnection, and removal and replacement of valves, fixtures and equipment.

3. In general, maintain the maximum possible headroom in ways of egress, including pedestrian walkways and maintenance aisles, maintain a headroom of 7' 2" from the floor to the bottom of any component.

4. Route piping parallel to column lines and perpendicular to floor unless indicated otherwise.

C. Provide unions or flanges at valves, fixtures and equipment if a means of disconnection is not otherwise provided.

D. Provide reducing fittings for all changes in pipe size; bushings are not acceptable: Eccentric type as shown.

E. Use fittings for all changes in direction of piping.

F. Position valve stems horizontal or above.

SLEEVES

A. Pipes passing through walls or floors shall be sleeved by 24 gauge steel pipe sleeves sized two inches greater than the pipe diameter. Fill annular space with fire rated, non-hardening caulking compound. Piping shall not directly contact the sleeve.

B. Pipe passing through concrete walls, floors or any roof penetration shall be sleeved with schedule 40 steel pipe sleeves, flashed, sealed and caulked.

FIRE SEPARATIONS

A. All pipe penetrations through fire-rated walls shall be sealed or caulked with a non-combustible flame retardant caulking to maintain the rating of the fire rated partition. 3M or accepted equal. Review Architectural Documents to confirm the location of all fire rated partitions before initiating work.

JOINTS

A. Soldered 1. Cut ends square and remove all fins and burrs. Replace all dents and damaged tubing

with new tubing. 2. Remove all grease and oil from all joints by wiping with clean cloth saturated with a

suitable chemical solvent and then clean with energy cloth.



3. After cleaning, apply non-corrosive flux, apply heat and solder and hold joint rigidly until solder has hardened.

4. Before soldering, remove stems and washers of solder-joint valves.

PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Coordinate all hanging and supports with the Structural Engineer Prior to installation. 1. All attachments to existing concrete structure must conform to contract drawings to avoid

damage to internal tension cables: 2. See ceiling coordination drawing A6.2 for locations of exposed conduit, piping and duct

penetrations. 3. All nonstructural components/systems weighing more than 20 lbs. or 5 plf shall be

attached to anchorage zones per detail L/S5.2. See drawing S2.20 for locations of anchorage zones.

4. Components of lesser weight can be anchored per Note 6 on S2.20. 5. For attachments of components less than 200 lbs. to existing walls, expansion bolts or

drive pins may be used. Locate & avoid damage to existing reinforcing.

B. Spacing of Hangers and Supports: 1. Maximum Spacing between supports for straight runs of piping:

Nominal Pipe Size (Inches) Maximum Span (Feet) STEEL COPPER PVC-CPVC 1 7 6 3 1-1/2 9 6 3 2 10 8 4 2-1/2 11 10 4 3 12 10 4 4 14 10 5 5 16 -- 5 6 & Larger 17 -- 5 6 17 -- 5 8 -- -- 6 10 -- -- 7

2. Support all piping independent from connected equipment. Provide additional hangers or supports at concentrated loads such as flanges, valves, equipment, and similar items.

C. In general, route vertical piping in a manner in which it can be attached to adjacent walls or columns.

D. Anchoring, Guiding and Supporting Piping 1. Anchor all piping and support in a manner such that expansion and contraction will take

place in the direction desired. 2. Prevent vibration with vibration dampers and prevent undue strains on equipment served.



3. Fabricate hangers used for the support of 2" nominal pipe size and larger piping to permit adequate adjustment after erection while still supporting the load.

4. Use wall brackets where the pipes are adjacent to walls or other vertical supports which may be used for supports.

5. Provide supports to adequately carry the weight of the lines and maintain proper alignment.

6. Provide inserts and sleeves for supports in concrete where necessary. 7. Provide pipe guides and anchors at all points where necessary to keep pipes in accurate

alignment, to direct the expansion movement, and to prevent buckling, swaying and undue strain.

8. Provide seismic bracing and thrust bracing on all piping.

E. Insulation Protection: Provide insulated piping with a pipe insulation protection device at each support.

PRESSURE TESTING

A. Provide all equipment and apparatus necessary for the tests. Rectify all defects disclosed by the tests without additional cost to the Owner. Make test in the presence of the Architect. Furnish report on letterhead indicating that the testing has been successfully completed.

B. Test piping systems after the lines have been cleaned and flushed, and before any insulation has been applied.

C. Test Pressures: Test piping systems at pressure of one and one-half times the design working pressure, but not less than 50 psig. System shall prove tight for at least 24 hours.

D. Hydrostatically test all liquid piping using water not exceeding 100 F.

E. Test Procedure: 1. Before tests, remove or valve off from the system all gauges, traps and other apparatus

which may be damaged by the test procedure. 2. Subject the system to a calibrated test pressure for a sufficient length of time to enable an

inspection to be made at all joints and connections. 3. Maintain the required test pressure for a sufficient length of time to enable an inspection

to be made at all joints and connections. 4. Rectify all defects which develop during testing and retest the piping systems until they

show no defect or weakness and are tight.

F. Systems Which Connect to Existing Piping: Isolate new piping system from existing system by the closest valve or valves to the existing system.

THERMOMETERS

A. General: Provide where indicated by the contract documents or required to monitor conditions. Provide nipple and pipe tapping, isolation valve, and gauge. Mount so that the gauge or thermometer is easily readable by an observer standing on the floor.



DOMESTIC WATER PIPING

A. General: 1. Conceal in finished areas. Grade cold and hot water piping so it can be drained from low

points. Wherever such points cannot be drained through fixtures or hose bibs, run valved drain to nearest floor drain or provide valved hose connection.

B. Sterilization: 1. Sterilize system in accordance with AWWA C601 or local plumbing authority. Flush

system, introduce chlorine or chlorine compound sufficient to provide residual of 50 ppm. Flush system after 24 hour contact period to eliminate all traces of chlorine. Do not place into service until accepted by Plumbing Inspector.

DRAIN, WASTE, AND VENT PIPING

A. Install piping as indicated and to provide every plumbing fixture and equipment item requiring water with suitable soil, waste or vent connection, as required by governing code.

B. Install piping at a minimum grade of 1/4" per lineal foot of run; not less than 1/8" per lineal foot with permission of local plumbing authority. Hold all piping as close to the structure as possible to maximize headroom. Extend sanitary and rainwater piping to a point five feet outside building wall, or to the point of connection indicated by the contract documents. Install main vertical soil and waste stacks with provisions for expansion and contraction and extend full size to roof line as vents.

C. Install clean outs at all dead ends, at all changes of direction and at fifty foot intervals on horizontal runs.

D. Do not join any buried cast iron piping with couplings of dissimilar metals. Joints shall be hub and spigot or with use of accepted cast iron couplings.

E. Fittings at bottom of stacks shall have supporting shoes and anchors.

F. Carry each soil or waste stack and vent stack continuously full size up and through the roof. Where possible, combine vent stacks to minimize roof penetrations. Extend all vent stacks at least 12 inches above the roof. Install vents with vandalproof hood and flashing assembly.

G. Terminate each vent with an accepted frostproof jacket. Caulk fully and completely around the pipe and jacket to form a gas and watertight seal between the vent, roof and the building.

H. Coordinate with fixtures provided under other Divisions. Furnish all equipment, connections, and work required.

I. Trap all fixtures as required by the Uniform Plumbing Code. Size the traps in accordance with Uniform Plumbing Code requirements.

J. Test piping at the completion of the installation and with the Plumbing Inspector present. Fill system with water to a minimum height of 10 feet and check for leaks. Eliminate leaks before



concealing work. Contractor may air test piping in accordance with Uniform Plumbing Code requirements as an option.

END OF SECTION

Fort Steilacoom Park – Trail Access Upgrades Electric Water Heaters March 16, 2020 Bid Set Section 223400

ELECTRIC WATER HEATERS 223400 - 1

SECTION 22 34 00 – ELECTRIC WATER HEATERS

GENERAL

DESCRIPTION

A. General: 1. Work includes electric water heaters, including all material, equipment and installation.

Provide water heaters as required by the mechanical system design, the specifications and/or the contract documents. Provide a complete and operable system.

B. Code: All work shall be installed in accordance with International Mechanical Code, Uniform Plumbing Code, International Building Code and all local codes. Refer also to Specification Section 220500.

SUBMITTALS

A. Comply with the requirements of Division 1 and 220500. Furnish complete submittal information describing all plumbing fixtures and equipment.

QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. As required by Division 1.

PRODUCTS

ELECTRIC WATER HEATER

A. Domestic Hot Water Heater: Wall-mounted tankless electric commercial water heater, per equipment schedule. Provide with digital user interface and dry-fire protection.

B. Tempering Valve: Provide at water heater and at each lavatory fixture and sink. Leonard, Symmons or accepted equal.

EXECUTION

EXAMINATION

A. Verify conditions, including defects or errors that would cause defective installation/ application or products or cause latent defects in workmanship or function. Properly unpack heater from crating, inspect for damage and report, and remove manufacturer’s installation instructions. Read the installation instructions, then install the heaters and equipment in accordance with the manufacturers written instructions.

WATER HEATERS

A. Set heater in location indicated on drawings. Adjust location as required to accommodate service access.

Fort Steilacoom Park – Trail Access Upgrades Electric Water Heaters March 16, 2020 Bid Set Section 223400

ELECTRIC WATER HEATERS 223400 - 1

B. Secure heater with seismic bracing and strapping and as indicated on the drawings.

C. Complete piping connections to the heater. Make all water piping connections through dielectric unions.

D. Tempering and Blending Valves: Install tempering and blending valves with all accessories as recommended by the manufacturers written instructions. Install blending valves recessed in locking wall box. Coordinate location with Architect prior to installation.

E. Fill, flush and test piping system for tightness. Coordinate with work of insulator.

F. Perform manufacturers recommended startup procedure, complete all installation checklists and coordinate with the Commissioning Agent, if applicable.

G. Correct any defects disclosed by startup, testing and/or operation.

END OF SECTION

Fort Steilacoom Park – Trail Access Upgrades Plumbing Fixtures March 16, 2020 Bid Set Section 224200

PLUMBING FIXTURES 224200 - 1

SECTION 22 42 00 – PLUMBING FIXTURES

PART 1 - GENERAL

DESCRIPTION

A. General: 1. Work includes all Plumbing Fixtures, including all material, equipment and installation.

Provide all plumbing products as required by the mechanical system design, the specifications and/or the contract documents. Provide a complete and operable system.

2. Provide plumbing systems and fixtures for the building.

B. Code: All work shall be installed in accordance with International Mechanical Code, Uniform Plumbing Code, International Building Code and all local codes. Refer also to Specification Section 220500.

SUBMITTALS

A. Comply with the requirements of Division 1 and 220500. Furnish complete submittal information describing all plumbing fixtures and equipment.

QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. As required by Division 1.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Provide as specified.

PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. As required by Section 221000.

FIXTURES

A. Refer to the mechanical documents for plumbing fixture characteristics and requirements.

CLEANOUTS AND CLEANOUT ACCESS COVERS

A. Provide caulked or threaded type extended to finished floor or wall surface. Insure ample clearance at cleanout for rodding of drainage system.

B. Floor Cleanout Access Covers in unfinished and finished areas: Round with nickel bronze scored frames and plates. Provide round access covers in finished areas with depressed center section to accommodate floor finish. Wall cleanouts to have chrome plated caps.

WATER HAMMER ARRESTORS



A. Bellows type, compression chamber pre-charged with inert gas, stainless steel casing and bellows. Provide sizes complying with PDI Standard WH-201. Wade, Zurn or accepted equal.

TRAP PRIMERS AND PIPING

A. Zurn Z-1022, J.R. Smith S-2699, Josam 1465, or Precision Plumbing Products P-1 or P-2.

B. Piping from primer to trap: Soft copper, type K.

PLUMBING HARDWARE

A. General: 1. Trim: Brass faucet handles; all exposed metal parts, chrome plate over nickel. 2. Escutcheons: Provide escutcheons at each point where a pipe or other fitting enters the

wall or ceiling, and at each plumbing fixture. 3. Anchors: No equipment or fixture anchors shall be plastic. Anchors and supports shall all

be cast iron or welded steel channel, galvanized.

B. Stops: 1. Provide stops in all water connections to all lavatories, and sinks; compression inlet;

loose key pattern with shield; as manufactured by Speedway, Brasscraft or accepted. No plastic stems. Use only chromed brass.

2. Provide check stops for all mixing fixtures and faucets. No added stops are required where shower mixing valves or service sink faucets have check-stops as part of the assembly.

3. Exposed Supplies from stops to faucets for lavatories shall be 1/2" outer diameter. Tubing; one end to have a brazed or formed end for compression joint.

C. Traps: Chrome plate 17 gage brass seamless tubing, Bridgeport, Frost or Brasscraft mfr; imprinted with mfr and gage; ground joint brass connection Sterling Series 24000, or Frost No. 6440 or 6457 Series, on outlet of each trap.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

EXAMINATION

A. Verify conditions, including defects or errors that would cause defective installation/ application or products or cause latent defects in workmanship or function. Install all fixtures and equipment in accordance with the manufacturers written instructions.

PLUMBING FIXTURES:

A. Traps for Floor Drains: Install traps for all drains, same materials as soil and waste piping.

B. Trap priming system: Trap primers, water supply to traps and all work associated with the system is required, but not indicated on the drawing. This work is required by this contract and shall be field designed and installed by the Plumber and all costs included in this contract.



Provide and install priming assemblies, access panels and water supply piping. Extend water piping to traps and provide trap primers for all traps.

C. Drains: Drains above grade shall have seepage pan and where installed in slabs with waterproof membrane, shall have clamping collar. Provide adapters on drains suitable for anchoring to construction.

D. Cleanouts: 1. Install at locations and as indicated and required to clean piping, including the end of the

main building sewer, 50 feet maximum spacing on all below-grade runs; and elsewhere as required by Ordinances or Code; accessible for use with conventional cleaning equipment.

2. Provide brass plug, with Teflon base lubricant on threads. All exposed wall and floor cleanouts shall be chrome-plated trim.

3. Lubricate cleanout plugs with mixture of graphite and linseed oil. Prior to building turnover, remove cleanout plugs, re-lubricate and re-install using only enough force to insure permanent leakproof joint.

E. Vacuum Breakers: Install vacuum breakers on plumbing lines where contamination of domestic water may occur and on hose bibs, faucets with hose connectors, and flush valves.

F. Water Hammer Arrestors: Install unit at top of each riser, at end of group fixture runouts. Units may be used for single fixtures per PDI Standard.

G. Fixtures: 1. Mount fixtures at height above finished floor as indicated by Architectural documents or

as required to comply with local, state and accessibility regulations. 2. Through bolt all equipment and fixture anchors through walls. 3. Provide all janitor, service, and mop sinks with 22 gauge galvanized steel backsplash

behind faucet and sink. Extend backsplash minimum 6" beyond sink and faucet. 4. Seal edge of fixtures at top and sides with plastic sealant, GE or DOW, color to match

fixture. 5. Adjust flush valves and run time of fixtures to provide uniform operation.

H. Tempering and Blending Valves: Install tempering and blending valves with all accessories as recommended by the manufacturers written instructions. See also Section 223400. Install blending valves recessed in locking wall box. Coordinate location with Architect prior to installation.

END OF SECTION

Fort Steilacoom Park – Trail Access Upgrades Air Distribution March 16, 2020 Bid Set Section 233100

AIR DISTRIBUTION 233100 - 1

SECTION 23 31 00 – AIR DISTRIBUTION

PART 1 - GENERAL

WORK INCLUDED

A. Work includes sheet metal work and related components.

B. Contract requirements of the General Conditions, the Supplementary Conditions, and Division 1 apply to all work in this Section.

QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Comply with all applicable City, County and State Codes and Ordinances and local

amendments to Codes and Ordinances. In case of conflict with drawings or specifications, the Codes and Ordinances govern.

2. Basis: International Building Code; Uniform Plumbing Code; International Mechanical Code; NFPA 90A.

SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: 1. Grilles and Diffusers. 2. Louvers.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

GENERAL

A. Comply with "Quality Assurance" provisions, Specifications and Manufacturer's Data. Where these may be in conflict, the more stringent requirements govern.


A. Listed manufacturers with products equivalent to specific product indicated (if any) are acceptable; Architect is sole judge of equivalency.

B. Non-listed manufacturers may be considered in accordance with specified substitution procedures.

SHEETMETAL WORK

A. Duct Construction: Comply with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible; galvanized steel.

FASTENERS



A. General: Use blind rivets, sheetmetal screws, or bolted connections where required by SMACNA for attachment purposes for sheetmetal. Sheetmetal screws and rivets shall be of the minimum length required for a secure fastening. Use tamper-resistant heads for all exposed fasteners.

B. For all ductwork, grilles, and accessories exposed to view in finished rooms, provide finish type fasteners. 1. Permanent Work: Blind and stainless steel pop rivets. 2. Removable Items and Grilles: Stainless steel pan head or countersunk tapping screws.

TRANSFER GRILLES (TG)

A. Coordinate color with Architect. Grilles shall conform to the schedules shown on the contract documents.

B. Coordinate location, ceiling type and fire rating requirement with the Architectural Documents.

C. Manufacturers: Price, Anemostat, Krueger, or accepted equal.

LOUVERS (LV)

A. Coordinate color with Architect. Louvers shall conform to the schedules shown on the contract documents.

B. Coordinate location, wall type and fire rating requirement with the Architectural Documents.

C. Manufacturers: Greenheck or accepted equal.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

INSPECTION

A. Verify installation conditions as satisfactory to receive work of this Section. Do not install until any unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. Beginning work constitutes acceptance of conditions as satisfactory.

PREPARATION

A. Field Measurements: Field verify locations of new and existing work prior to commencing work of this Section.


LOCATION OF EQUIPMENT

A. Location: Locate per Architectural drawings.



B. Verification: Verify that ceiling diffuser and grille frames match ceiling type and finish prior to ordering.

END OF SECTION

Fort Steilacoom Park – Trail Access Upgrades Maintenance Testing for Electrical Systems March 16, 2020 Bid Set Section 260126

MAINTENANCE TESTING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260126-1

SECTION 260126 – MAINTENANCE TESTING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED

A. Perform tests of the electrical system to assure code compliance and proper system operation according to the intent of the contract documents.

B. Applicable Codes, Standards & References for Tests:

All inspections and tests shall be in accordance with the following applicable codes and standards except as provided otherwise herein. 1. National Electrical Code - NEC 2. National Electrical Manufacturer's Association - NEMA 3. American Society for Testing and Materials - ASTM 4. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers - IEEE 5. National Electrical Testing Association - NETA 6. American National Standards Institute - ANSI 7. State and Local Codes and Ordinances 8. Insulated Cable Engineers Associate - ICEA 9. Association of Edison Illuminating Companies – AEIC 10. Puget Sound Energy (PSE) Standards

1.2 CIRCUIT TESTS

A. The Contractor shall perform routine insulation resistance, continuity and grounding tests for all distribution and utilization equipment prior to their connection and energization. A standard megger-type instrument shall be used to demonstrate insulation values are acceptable, ground system is continuous and the neutral system is isolated from the grounding system except at the systems' single ground point.

B. System defects, indicated by the circuit tests, shall be corrected. Tests shall be repeated until satisfactory results are obtained.

1.3 GROUNDING TEST

A. Measure the ohmic value of the Electrical Service Entrance "System Ground" with reference to "Earth Ground" using multiple terminal, fall of potential methods and suitable test instruments.

B. Maximum resistance to ground shall be less than 10 ohms. Notify the Engineer if this resistance value is not obtained for the initially installed system; and then provide corrective measures as required to reduce ground resistance to less than 10 ohms.

1.4 PHASE BALANCE TEST

A. Verify the balance of the electrical system's phase currents. Reassign load connections necessary to obtain a balance acceptable to the Engineer.

Fort Steilacoom Park – Trail Access Upgrades Maintenance Testing for Electrical Systems March 16, 2020 Bid Set Section 260126

MAINTENANCE TESTING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260126-2

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS AND INSTRUMENTATION

A. Contractor shall supply all apparatus and materials required for indicated tests.

B. Contractor shall include all costs associated with testing in bid proposal.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 TESTING PROCEDURE

A. All tests shall be conducted according to applicable industry standards.

3.2 SCHEDULING

A. Notify Engineer and Owner at least five (5) working days prior to performance of any test.


Fort Steilacoom Park – Trail Access Upgrades Common Work Results for Electrical Systems March 16, 2020 Bid Set Section 260500

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260500-1

SECTION 260500 – COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 GENERAL CONDITIONS

A. Bidding documents including Division 1 General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, Published Addenda and related work in other Divisions form an integral part of these Specifications and shall be binding on the Division 26 Contractor for all work performed under Division 26, Electrical.

B. General requirements for materials and installation methods.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. The term "provide" shall mean furnish, install and connect equipment and materials complete in operating condition.

B. The term "approved" as used herein shall mean the written approval of the Engineer.

C. The term "Contractor" as used herein shall mean the organization responsible for accomplishing all work within the contract documents. The plural term "contractors" as used herein shall include all of the trade organizations that comprise the project workforce.

D. The term "drawings" as used herein shall mean all contract drawings for all divisions of work.

E. NEC means National Electrical Code.

F. The term "code" as used herein shall mean all applicable National, State and local codes.

1.3 SCOPE OF WORK

A. The Electrical work consists of furnishing, installing, testing and placing in satisfactory operation all equipment, materials, devices and appurtenances, necessary to provide complete electrical power, control and lighting systems according to the intent of the Drawings and Specifications. In general this includes all labor, materials, equipment, tools, etc. to complete the electrical work.

1.4 EXISTING SYSTEMS

A. Contractor shall call for a locate of all utilities prior to commencing work. 1. All active electrical systems, communication systems, water system and sewer system shall

remain fully operational during construction. 2. Systems damaged during construction shall be repaired the same day by the contractor at

no expense to the owner.

B. Excavation and Trenching 1. Contractor shall provide sand bedding for all vaults, hand holes and trenches. Native

materials may be utilized for backfill. Compact all trenched and excavated areas to 95%. Top surfaces shall be raked smooth and suitable for reseeding. Owner will re-seed



disturbed areas.

1.5 INTENT OF DRAWINGS

A. The Electrical drawings are intended to serve as working drawings for general layout. Equipment, receptacles, switches, panels, lights, disconnects and raceways are partially diagrammatic and do not necessarily indicate actual routings or all appurtenances required for a complete installation.

B. The drawings and specifications are complementary. What is called for in either is binding as if called for in both. In case of conflict within the drawings, specifications or between drawings and specifications the Owner/Engineer will select the method to be taken.

B. Take all working dimensions from field measurement. Do not scale drawings.

D. Minor changes in the locations of raceways, devices and the like, from those shown on the plans, shall be made without extra charge if so directed by the Owner/Engineer before installation.

1.6 MANUFACTURERS' RECOMMENDATIONS

A. Make all installations in strict accordance with manufacturers' published recommendations and details. All equipment and materials recommended by them shall be considered as part of this contract.

1.7 WORK RELATED TO OTHER DIVISIONS

A. TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION POWER & LIGHTING 1. Arrange with the PSE for 120/240 Volt or 208Y/120 Volt service adjacent to construction

site. 2. Contractor is responsible for all costs associated with setup and removal of the temporary

construction service meter. 3. Provide, maintain and remove, when no longer required, temporary electrical construction

wiring from the construction service meter to and within the building for the number of lights and receptacles required. Wiring to construction sheds, outdoor construction machinery, and temporary exterior work areas shall be the responsibility of individual contractors.

4. Provide and maintain construction lighting with portable wiring and temporary energization of the permanent building wiring, complete with lamps. Suitable construction lighting shall be provided in each room where lighting is required for any of the contractors on the job. See NEC ARTICLE 305. Temporary wiring.

5. Contractor is responsible for re-lamping construction lighting after the initial lamping. 6. Provide adequate feeders, circuit breakers and duplex 15-ampere 120-volt receptacles at

locations as required. Note: 120 volt construction receptacles shall provide Ground Fault circuit protection in accordance with applicable WISHA safety standards.

7. Portable power cords from the outlets specified herein shall be the responsibility of individual contractors using the cords.

8. Responsibilities outlined in the Paragraph Temporary Construction Power and Lighting are delineated herein to avoid conflicts between the various contractors. Assume all responsibility for safety, Electrical and Safety Code compliance, performance and adequacy of the construction power and lighting installation. The Engineer assumes no responsibility for the performance or safety and will not inspect nor design this temporary



installation as it is not part of the completed structure.

1.8 SUPERVISION AND COORDINATION

A. Coordinate work with local power, telephone and cable utilities to ensure compliance with their specific requirements. Before starting work, contact power telephone and cable utilities and make arrangement for identification of their existing underground services in the area of work.

B. Contact Electrical Inspection and obtain permit before starting work.

C. Maintain adequate supervision of the Division 26 work and have a responsible person in charge at the site any time work is in progress or when necessary for coordination with other trades.

D. Schedule work to best serve the interests of the Owner. Cooperate with the owner and contractors on the job and coordinate work to avoid interference with them.

E. Determine a satisfactory space allocation arrangement where electrical material is installed in proximity to existing facilities and work of other trades. No extra payments will be allowed to relocate work that interferes with work of other trades.

1.9 CODES AND REGULATIONS

A. All work shall conform to current applicable National, State and local Codes; these shall be regarded as the minimum standard of quality for material and workmanship. Contractor shall provide all Labor and Material that may be required for compliance with Code Requirements or Code Interpretations, although not specifically detailed on the Drawings or in the Specifications.

Contractor shall become familiar with all the following codes prior to bidding. ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials NBFU National Board of Fire Underwriters NEC National Electrical Code WAC Washington State Administrative Code NESC National Electrical Safety Code NEMA National Electric Manufacturers Association NFPA National Fire Protection Association UL Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. ICEA Insulated Cable Engineers Associations CBM Certified Ballast Manufacturers ETL Electrical Testing Laboratories PSE Puget Sound Electric Utility

B. Nothing in these Drawings and Specifications shall be construed as permitting work not conforming with governing codes.

C. The Contractor shall not be relieved from complying with any requirements of these contract documents which may exceed, but not conflict with, requirements of the governing codes.

D. Contractor shall include in bid all costs to have a Department of Labor & Industries approved firm to evaluate the installation safety, and compliance with code required per WAC 296-40-100 for any equipment specified or furnished that is not UL labeled.



E. For equipment furnished not UL labeled the contractor shall not connect the equipment to the electrical system until receiving written approval by the electrical authority having jurisdiction.

1.10 PERMITS & FEES

A. Contractor shall obtain all licenses, permits and inspections required by laws, ordinances and rules governing work specified herein. Arrange for inspection of work and provide inspectors with all necessary assistance.

1.11 WORKMANSHIP

A. All work shall be done by competent craftsmen skilled in the specific work to be done. Equipment shall be installed in a neat and workmanlike manner following the best practice of the trade.

1.12 ITEMIZED COST BREAKDOWN

A. Furnish the Engineer with an itemized contract cost breakdown to allow evaluation of partial payment requests. The cost breakdown shall categorize major items of the contract such as: Job organization and setup, auger holes, light pole bases, conduit system, trenching, event power pedestal, service and feeder wiring, branch circuit wiring, wiring devices, lighting control systems and commissioning.

1.13 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

A. Fully instruct the Owner's designated representatives in the operation and maintenance of all components of the electrical system upon completion of the work and after all tests and final inspection(s) by the Authority(s) Having Jurisdiction.

B. Provide scheduled instruction as follows: 1. Lighting Control & Distribution System .5 hour 2. Electrical Distribution .5 hour

All costs for contractor's instruction are to be included in the bid proposal. These costs are in addition to contractors costs for commissioning.

C. Instructors shall be contractor's superintendents or foreman knowledgeable in each system and equipment suppliers representatives for lighting control systems.

1.14 AS-BUILT RECORD DRAWINGS

A. Continuously maintain a set of As-Built Drawings to indicate all significant deviations from the original design and the actual placement of equipment and underground conduits. (Location of conduit stub outs shall be dimensioned from accepted reference lines). Changes shall be shown with red colored pencil while work is in progress. This "As-Built" set shall be clearly marked: "AS-BUILT RECORD DRAWINGS - Do Not Remove From Office."

B. Final "As-Built" electronic PDF’s shall be prepared by a competent drafter. Date, firm name, and drafter's name shall be included with title "CORRECTED AS-BUILT" on each drawing. If there are no changes, drawing shall be marked "NO CHANGES, INSTALLATION PER PLAN."

C. "As-Built Record Drawings" and "Corrected to As-Built" PDF’s shall be delivered to the



Engineer for transmittal to the Owner.

1.15 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE (O&M) MANUALS

A. Prepare one (1) electronic PDF copy of O & M manuals that contain operating and maintenance information, replacement parts list, shop drawings, wiring diagrams and equipment test data for all equipment and systems installed under this contract. Manuals shall be organized as follows: 1. All information contained in the manuals shall be grouped by specification section

categories. Manual shall be provided with a typewritten index identifying divider tabs to facilitate future references.

2. Maintenance Information shall pertain to the exact equipment installed, not to the complete "line" of a manufacturer. Actual installed equipment shall be neatly and clearly identified on catalog sheets that show other equipment as well. All equipment in the O & M manuals shall be identified in exactly the same manner as used in the contract documents.

3. Parts list shall give original manufacturers ordering information. Parts information that has been relabeled or renumbered by the equipment supplier will not be acceptable. The following information shall be provided as a minimum for each item: a. Manufacturer's name, address and phone number. b. Local supplier's name, address and phone number. c. Complete parts lists including quantities and manufacturers part numbers. d. Installation instructions. e. Maintenance recommendations including maintenance procedure and recommended

maintenance intervals listed in hours of operation, calendar units or similar time units.

4. Shop drawings and wiring diagrams shall be complete for the specific system installed under the contract. "Typical" drawings and diagrams will not be acceptable unless properly marked to indicate the exact field installation. Equipment control diagrams shall be accompanied by written descriptions to familiarize maintenance personnel with proper equipment operation. Diagnostic "trouble-shooting" information shall be included where applicable.

5. Provide electrical equipment test data, as applicable, for all motors according to Section 260126 - "Maintenance Testing of Electrical Systems." Tabulation shall be in columnar format; equipment designations shall correspond to those used on actual identification nameplates.

6. Each O & M manual shall be assembled in a loose leaf, 3 ring hard cover binder. a. The covers shall have a typewritten adhesive label with the name of the Project,

Owner, Electrical Engineer, Division 26 Contractor and year of completion. The back edge shall have a typewritten adhesive label with the name of the Project, Owner and year of completion.

7. Submit a preliminary copy, complete except for the bound cover, for review and comments 20 days prior to completion of the project. a. Deliver four (4) complete, approved O & M manuals to the Engineer for transmittal

to Owner at least 10 days prior to the specified scheduled instruction periods.

1.16 FINAL INSPECTION

A. The electrical foreman or superintendent shall accompany the Engineer on the Final Inspection, and on any necessary Post-Final Inspections, to confirm all work has been satisfactorily completed.

B. Defects and deficiencies found during this Final Inspection shall be corrected within 15 days of



Contractor's receipt of Engineer's final punch list.

1.17 FINAL ACCEPTANCE

A. These items are a prerequisite for final acceptance and payment: 1. Four (4) Electrical Equipment operation and Maintenance Manuals which will also include

the items listed below. 2. Certificates of Final Inspection

a) Electrical Inspector 3. Guarantee to Owner 4. As-Built record drawings in electronic AutoCAD format including "field" and "clean"

drawing sets.

B. Satisfactory Final Inspection and Transmittal of these items to the Engineer will indicate the Contractor has fulfilled the requirements of the project documents.

1.18 GUARANTEE

A. The Division 26 Contractor shall provide written guarantee to repair or replace (without additional expense) any defective materials or workmanship which become evident within a period of one (1) year after final acceptance or for such longer period as elsewhere specified. All warranty work shall be to the satisfaction of the Owner.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL

A. All materials shall be new, free from defects, of the quality specified herein and on the drawings. Materials shall be designed to insure satisfactory operation and rated life in the prevailing environmental conditions where they are being installed. They shall be listed by Underwriter's Laboratories or a recognized testing laboratory for use under these conditions.

B. Each type of material shall be of the same make and quality throughout the job. The materials furnished shall be the latest standard design products of manufacturers regularly engaged in their production.

2.2 TECHNICAL DATA

A. Technical information contained herein relies entirely on tests and ratings provided by manufacturers who are solely responsible for their accuracy. The Engineer, by use of this information in no way implies the results of published manufacturer’s information has been verified.

2.3 EXISTING MATERIALS NOT TO BE REINSTALLED

A. In coordination with the Owner/Engineer, these materials shall be made available for inspection and decision as to whether the Owner will retain possession. Items selected for retention shall be delivered to a location on the premises selected by the Owner and turned over to the owner. Take reasonable care to avoid damage to this material. If the Contractor fails to conform to this requirement, contractor shall purchase and turn over to the Owner replacement materials of like kind and quality.



B. All material not selected for retention by the Owner and debris shall be disposed of by the Contractor.

2.4 AS SPECIFIED EQUIPMENT

A. This specification generally lists only one make and model number for each item of equipment or material required for the project. This is not intended to be restrictive but is intended to indicate the standard of quality, design and features required. In addition, the listed product is the basis of the design regarding physical size, electrical power requirements and performance. The product so identified is designated "as specified."

2.5 SUBSTITUTION OF MATERIALS

A. Listing of approved materials is not intended to prevent acceptance of other materials provided the substitute products are submitted for approval and have been approved in accordance with the Substitution of Materials requirements.

B. Approval Prior to Installation 1. All substitution requests shall be made in writing on a substitution request form. 2. The Contractor shall be responsible for a substitute item suiting the space limitations shown

and for any additional installation costs incurred by the substitution. 3. Approval of substitute materials shall not be construed as authorizing any deviation from

the contract drawings and specifications except where such deviation is clearly described in writing on the substitution request form and is approved in writing by the Engineer.

4. Requests shall clearly define and describe the proposed substitute product. Such requests shall be accompanied by samples, record of performance, certified test reports and such additional information as the Engineer may require to satisfactorily evaluate the substitute product(s).

C. Approval Prior to Bid Opening 1. Equipment substitutions will not be considered prior to bid opening.

D. No Substitute: 1. It is the intent of this specification to require specific materials to be compatible with the

existing installation. Certain materials and systems, consequently, are indicated "No Substitute" and shall be provided as specified.

2.6 COMPLETE SYSTEMS

A. All systems specified herein and shown on the drawings shall be bid by the contractor complete and operational in every detail. Mention of certain materials in bidding documents shall not be construed as releasing the Contractor from furnishing such additional materials and performing all labor required to provide a complete and operable system.

2.7 SUBMITTALS

A. Purpose of Submittals 1. Submittals processed by the Owner/Engineer are not change orders. The Contractor, by the submittal process, demonstrates an understanding of the design concept

by indicating equipment and materials intended to be provided and fabrication/installation methods intended to be utilized to meet all requirements of the contract documents.

2. The Engineer's review is for general conformance with the design concept and the contract



documents. Markings or comments shall not be construed as relieving the Contractor from compliance with the contract documents.

B. General Requirements: The Contractor shall provide electronic submittal brochures as follows: 1. Material Lists and Catalog Data: Submit, within 10 days after contract award, complete

lists of materials, marked catalog sheets, dimensions and other information necessary to properly identify each item. Submittals shall include the most significant materials for each section of these Division 26 specifications.

2. Shop Drawings: Submit, within 20 days after contract award, shop drawings for equipment and materials unique to this installation.

C. Submittal items: Submittals shall include, but not be limited to the following items: Wire Raceways Panels Wiring Devices Disconnects Nameplates Lights Pre-cast Concrete Vaults/Covers Pre-cast Concrete Handholes/Covers Items Requested by Engineer

D. Submittal Format 1. A transmittal letter with reference identification (i.e., Electrical Submittal No. 1, material

lists and catalog data, etc.) shall accompany all submittals. 2. Provide identification labels on each submittal to include Project Name, Electrical

Submittal Reference and Contractor's Name. 3. All information contained in the submittals shall be grouped by specification sections.

Provide a typewritten index and identifying tabs for all project submittal items to facilitate future reference.

E. Submittal Completeness 1. The Contractor shall make every effort to ensure the completeness of the initial submittal.

Availability of certain shop drawings and catalog materials, however, may prevent this. Submittal shall not be delayed past specified time periods to await delivery of the missing items. The Contractor, instead, shall identify missing items on the transmittal letter and provide index listings and divider tabs for later insertion of these materials into the completed submittal brochure.

F. Engineer's Selection of Materials for Installation: The Engineer may select specified items the Contractor shall provide, without change in contract price or time of completeness, under these circumstances: 1. Late and/or Unqualified Partial Submittals: Submittals must be made within the specified

time periods; all partial submittals shall indicate manufacturer(s) catalog numbers, pertinent technical information and status of missing items.

2. Failure to follow Re-submittal Procedures: Contractor, within 14 days after the Engineer rejects any items, shall re-submit new materials for approval.

3. Materials have been submitted and rejected twice by the Engineer.

G. Contractor's Responsibilities: The Contractor is responsible for all submittal details, accuracy of



quantities and dimensions, selection of fabrication processes and techniques of assembly. 1. The Contractor shall furnish equipment/material suppliers with all Drawings and

Specifications pertinent to their work. 2. The Contractor shall review, stamp and sign all submittals and shop drawings, prior to

submitting shop drawings to the Engineer for review. Contractor shall correct them to insure compliance with the specifications and drawings. Obtain Engineer's written approval before manufacture is started on any special equipment.

3. Deviation from Shop Drawings in fabrication and/or installation of equipment is not permitted unless proposed changes are clearly noted in writing by the Contractor and approved in writing by the Owner/Engineer at the time of submittal.

4. Maintain at least one complete approved submittal brochure on the jobsite for reference during construction.

2.8 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION

A. General: These items shall be provided with nameplates: 1. Disconnect switches, panelboards, lighting controllers, circuit breakers, contactors, and

relays in separate enclosures.

B. Nameplate Inscription 1. All nameplates shall adequately describe the function or operation of the identified

equipment as required. 2. Panelboard nameplates shall include equipment designation, voltage and phase of

supply, i.e., Panel A, 208/120V, 3 phase, 4 wire.

C. Nameplate Construction 1. Nameplates shall be laminated phenolic plastic with minimum 3/16" high black engraved

characters on white background (alternate background colors shall be provided as noted in the specifications or drawings for special applications).

2. Nameplates shall be securely fastened to the equipment with No. 4 round-head phillips, cadmium plated steel, self-tapping screws. Contact cement adhesive only is not acceptable.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PROTECTION OF WORK

A. Protect all work, wire, cable, materials and equipment installed under this division against damage by other trades, weather conditions or any other causes. Equipment found damaged or in other than new condition will be rejected as defective.

B. Panels, light fixtures and electrical equipment shall be kept covered or enclosed to exclude moisture, dust, dirt, plaster, cement, or paint and shall be free of all such contamination before acceptance. Enclosures and trims shall be in new condition, free of rust, scratches or other finish defects. Properly refinish in a manner acceptable to the Engineer if damaged.

C. Keep conduit and raceways closed with suitable plugs or caps during construction to prevent entrance of dirt, moisture, concrete or foreign objects. Raceways shall be clean and dry before installation of wire and at the time of acceptance.

D. Make up and insulate wiring promptly after installation of conductors. Wire shall not be pulled-



in until raceways are complete, all bushings are installed, and raceway terminations are completed. Wire shall not be pulled into conduit embedded in concrete until after the concrete is placed and forms are removed.

3.2 EXISTING CONDITIONS

A. Examine the structure, buildings, and site conditions under which Division 26 work is to be installed for conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with work until deficiencies encountered in installation have been corrected. Report any delay or difficulties encountered in installation of Division 26 work which might be unsuitable to connect with work by other Divisions in this specification. Failure to report conditions shall constitute acceptance of other work as being fit and proper for the installation of Division 26 work.

3.3 RESTORATION

A. For areas of distributed soil due to electrical excavation and trenching contractor shall review specification sections 329115 “Soil Preparation” and 329200 “Turfs and Grasses”.

3.4 PAINTING

A. Items furnished under this Division that are scratched or marred in shipment or installation is to be refinished by the Contractor to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

3.5 CLEAN UP

A. Contractor shall continually remove debris, cuttings, crates, cartons, etc., created by his work. Such clean up shall be done at sufficient frequency to minimum hazard to the public, other workmen, the building and the Owner's employees. Before acceptance of the installation, Contractor shall carefully clean cabinets, panels, wiring devices, coverplates, etc., to remove dirt, cuttings, paint, plaster, mortar, concrete, etc. Blemishes to finished surfaces or apparatus shall be removed and new finish equal to the original applies.

3.6 LABELING

A. Clearly and properly label the complete electrical system, as specified herein, to indicate the loads served or the function of each item of equipment connected under this contract.

B. Control circuits shall utilize combinations of colors with each conductor identified throughout using wrap around numbers or letters. Identification shall be consistent with the contract drawing requirements and operation and maintenance shop drawings.

3.7 SUPPORT AND ALIGNMENT

A. Each fastening device and support for electrical equipment, fixtures, panels, outlets and cabinets shall be capable of supporting not less than four times the ultimate weight of the objects fastened to or suspended from the building structure.

B. Install panels, cabinets and equipment level, plumb, and parallel with structural building lines. Panels and all electrical enclosures shall fit neatly without gaps, openings or distortion. Properly and neatly close all unused openings with approved devices.

C. Fit surface panels, devices and receptacles with neat, appropriate trims, plates or covers, (without



over-hanging edges, protruding corners or raw edges) to leave a finished appearance.


Fort Steilacoom Park – Trail Access Upgrades Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables March 16, 2020 Bid Set Section 260519

LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260519-1

SECTION 260519 - LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED

A. Provide all wire, cable and terminations for a complete installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PACKAGING

A. Conductors shall be delivered to the job site in approved original cartons, or on reels as recommended by the manufacturer, and shall bear the Underwriter's Label. Reels shall be provided with suitable protection to prevent fork-lift damage to conductors during shipment or storage prior to use.

2.2 SPECIALIZED CONDUCTORS

A. Conductors for specialized systems shall be provided as recommended by the equipment manufacturer.

2.3 CONDUCTORS - 600 VOLTS

A. Copper insulated for 600 volts.

B. Insulation type XHHW-2.

C. All wire #10 AWG and less shall be stranded copper insulated for 600 volts.

2.4 CONNECTORS - 600 Volts

A. Branch circuit conductor splices: Pre-insulated "twist-on" type or "crimped-on" type as approved (Scotch-lok, Ideal or equal).

B. Cable Splices: Split-bolt or tool applied sleeves with pre-formed insulated cover, heat shrinkable tubing or approved

plastic insulating tape.

C. All below grade connections shall be made with manufactured water tight kits.

D. Terminator lugs of No. 12 wire and smaller: Spade, insulated type to be tool applied.

E. Terminator lugs for No. 10 wire or larger: Two bolt (or approved positive restraint), tool applied compression type (Burndy or equal).

2.5 INSULATING MATERIALS



A. Insulating tape or heat shrink tubing shall have the equivalent rating of the applicable conductor insulation (Scotch 3M, RAYCHEM or equal).

2.6 PLASTIC CABLE TIES

A. Nylon, or equivalent, locking type (T&B or equal)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A. Install all wiring in raceway.

3.2 MINIMUM WIRE SIZE

A. Lighting and Power System ......................No. 12 AWG

3.3 CONDUCTOR COLORING CODE

Conductor color coding shall be as follows:

A. 208/120 volt system A Phase - Black B Phase - Red Neutral – White Grounding – Green Switched wires – Other colors

B. Conductors shall have colored insulation except wires larger than #8 may be black with colored tape identification at all terminations, junctions and splices.

C. Additional colors may be used where such colors will help in identifying wires and different systems.

3.4 CONDUCTOR INSTALLATION

A. Raceways shall be complete, clean and free of burrs before pulling conductors.

B. U.L. approved pulling compounds may be used with the residue cleaned from the conductors and raceway entrances after the pull is made.

C. Contractor shall obtain the manufacturer's published recommendations for the handling, pulling and terminating of the cable. Contractor shall perform work in accord with manufacturer's recommendations and accept all responsibility for work not in accord with manufacturer's recommendations.

D. Pulleys or blocks shall be used for alignment of the conductors when pulling. Pulling shall be in accordance with manufacturer's specifications regarding pulling tensions, bending radius of the cable and compounds. No mechanical pulling means shall be used for wires No. 8 AWG and smaller. Cables shall be pulled by the conductor, not by the insulation or shielding.

3.5 MOISTURE PROTECTION



A. Cable ends shall be protected at all times from moisture. Provide approved heat-shrink end caps or equivalent for all unterminated cable ends.

3.6 CONDUCTORS IN PANELS

A. Conductors in panels and terminal cabinets shall be neatly grouped and formed in a manner to "fan" into terminals with regular spacing.

3.7 CABLE SUPPORTS

A. Provide conductor support devices required by code in vertical cable runs.

3.8 INSULATION REMOVAL

A. Insulation shall be removed with approved wire stripping tools. Conductors nicked or ringed are unacceptable and shall be cut off and re-stripped.

3.9 INSULATION OF ENERGIZED TERMINATIONS

A. Insulate all exposed energized connections and splices with approved tape or heat shrink tubing. Tape, if used, shall be half-lapped in two directions.

3.10 TERMINATIONS - COPPER CONDUCTORS 600 VOLTS

A. Control and special systems wires shall be terminated with a crimped on lug when terminating at a screw connection.

B. All screw and bolt type connectors shall be made up tight and retightened after an eight hour period. Tighten all bolted connections with a ratcheting type torque wrench per manufacturer's standards.

C. All tool applied crimped connectors shall be applied per manufacturer's recommendations and physically checked for tightness.


Fort Steilacoom Park – Trail Access Upgrades Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems March 16, 2020 Bid Set Section 260526

GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260526-1

SECTION 260526 - GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED

A. Provide a complete grounding system that complies with the current edition of the National Electrical Code (NEC), and all applicable regulatory codes.

B. Contractor shall provide service ground of 10 ohms or less

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GROUND RODS

A. Minimum size: 3/4" diameter by 10'-0" long, copper clad steel rods, or as noted on the drawings.

2.2 GROUND CONDUCTORS

A. Grounding conductors shall be soft drawn, bare, stranded copper unless otherwise noted. Size as shown on the plans and per the National Electrical Code (NEC) Article 250. 1. GROUNDING ELECTRODE CONDUCTORS FOR A.C. SYSTEMS: See NEC table

250-94 2. EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTORS: See NEC table 250-95 Equipment grounding conductors may be insulated; provide green insulation and/or

approved permanent identification for conductors larger than No. 6 AWG.

2.3 GROUND ELECTRODE CONNECTORS

A. Connectors for grounding electrode conductor to ground rod shall be of the thermal fusion type; conductor-to- conductor connections may be either thermal fusion or approved hydraulically applied compression type.

2.4 GROUNDING BUSHINGS

A. Grounding bushings shall be matched to the ampacity of the grounding conductor and shall have approved set-screw type grounding lug connectors.

2.5 GROUNDING CONNECTORS

A. Shall meet the requirements of ground bushings, cast, set-screw or bolted type.

2.6 GROUNDING CLAMPS

A. Clamps shall be matched to the ampacity of the grounding conductor. Provide approved raceway hub where grounding conductor is shown protected by conduit or armored cable. Clamps shall be U-bolt type for connection to waterpipes.

Fort Steilacoom Park – Trail Access Upgrades Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems March 16, 2020 Bid Set Section 260526

GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260526-2

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GROUND CONTINUITY

A. Maintain ground continuity throughout the entire electrical system.

B. Permanently connect the electrical system neutral to the water service. The system shall be grounded only at transformer secondaries and at the main distribution board. Branch panel neutrals must be isolated from additional points of grounding.

C. Provide approved grounding bushings or locknuts on all conduits terminating in panelboards, pullboxes or other enclosures to insure continuity of conduit grounding connections.

D. Securely ground lighting fixtures by a separate suitable grounding conductor.

E. Provide a separate grounding conductor in all non-metallic conduits and in all flexible metallic conduit runs. Connect to the grounding system in an approved manner.

3.2 GROUNDING CONNECTIONS

A. All grounding connections shall be carefully made to insure low system impedance. Locate grounding connections to allow future servicing and expansion.

3.3 PREPARATION

A. Prior to making mechanical or thermal connections, all conductors shall be clean, dry and bright with the bonding surface thoroughly cleaned of any oxides, mill, scale or other foreign matter.

3.4 PROTECTION

A. Ground conductors shall be protected from mechanical injury during construction. Provide protective coverings or rigid non-ferrous conduit.

3.5 GROUND RODS

A. Ground rods shall be driven into undisturbed soil to full depth. Provide additional rods, ionic salt solutions and the like where special low-resistant grounds are specified.

3.6 THROUGH-SLAB GROUND PENETRATIONS

A. Ground conductors extending through the slab shall be protected by a rigid conduit sleeve; the void portion of the sleeve shall be packed with a non-hardening type duct seal.


Fort Steilacoom Park – Trail Access Upgrades Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems March 16, 2020 Bid Set Section 260533

RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533-1

SECTION 260533 - RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED

A. Provide all raceways for a complete electrical system. Include all fittings, hangers and appurtenances required for a complete installation.

B. Provide outlet and pull boxes required to enclose devices, permit pulling conductors, for wire splices and branching.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL

A. Provide boxes suitable for the location. Boxes shall meet NEMA Standards for various types.

2.2 CONDUITS

A. Galvanized Rigid Steel, thick wall (GRS)

B. Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC)

C. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT)

D. Flexible Metal Conduit with and without polyvinyl chloride jacket

E. Non-metallic, polyvinyl chloride (PVC), schedule 40

2.3 FITTINGS

A. GRS and IMC couplings and connectors shall have threaded connections. Galvanized malleable iron or non-corrosive alloy compatible with galvanized conduit. Running thread or set screw type fittings are not permitted.

B. EMT - Couplings and connectors shall be rain tight, steel or malleable iron, utilizing a split corrugated compression ring and tightening nut or stainless steel locking disk. Set screw fittings are permitted in dry locations. Set screw fittings are not permitted in wet locations or in concrete. Zinc, pot metal, die cast fittings and indenter fittings are not acceptable.

C. Flexible Metal Conduit 1. Dry Locations: malleable iron or steel, Thomas & Betts "Squeeze" type or equal. 2. Damp or Wet Locations: Thomas & Betts "Super Liquid-Tight" with external ground lug.

D. PVC Fittings shall be solvent welded types.

2.4 INTERIOR WIRING, NEMA 1



A. Flush and concealed outlet boxes shall be galvanized stamped steel with screw ears, knock-out plugs, mounting holes, and fixture stud.

2.5 SPECIAL LOCATIONS

A. For outdoor equipment where a drain is appropriate provide NEMA 3R boxes.

2.6 BELOW GRADE

A. Where exposed to earth, boxes (handholes or vaults) shall be constructed of precast concrete with bottom.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A. Install raceways concealed in construction of finished spaces and below grade where used exterior.

B. Cut conduit ends square, ream smooth and extend maximum distance into all couplings and connectors.

C. Provide and install manufactured end caps on all conduit ends during construction to prevent the entrance of water or dirt. Tape, as a cover, is not acceptable.

D. Pull a properly sized mandrel through each conduit prior to installation of conductors or pull-lines to remove any materials trapped within the conduit run.

E. All PVC elbows shall be factory made.

F. Field made elbows are acceptable for steel conduits when made with approved bending tools. Bends that show conduit flattened or deformation are unacceptable and shall be replaced.

G. Conduits shall maintain a minimum 12" clearance from any high temperature surface.

H. The conduit layout shall be carefully planned by the contractor to ensure neat and workmanlike installation.

I. Any work showing inadequate planning may be ordered removed by the Owner/Engineer and shall be replaced in a neat and proper manner at no additional cost to the owner.

3.2 CONDUIT SIZING

A. Conduits shall be sized per code for conductors with type XHHW-2 insulation, although thinner insulation types are permitted in some cases. Conduit size shall not be reduced if large size is specified on the drawing. Minimum conduit size shall be ¾” trade diameter.

3.3 GRS AND IMC

A. Install GRS or IMC for all conduits in wet locations, concrete, underground, exposed to weather, hazardous locations, where subject to physical damage and as noted on drawings.



B. Connections shall be watertight in damp locations.

3.4 EMT

A. EMT may be installed for wiring in masonry block, frame construction, furred ceilings, above suspended ceilings and in dry location concrete, exposed dry location unfinished spaces not subject to physical damage. EMT shall not be installed underground, under concrete slabs-on-grade, in concrete slabs-on-grade, exposed to weather, on exterior of buildings or on roofs.

B. Contractor shall coordinate assembly and installation of EMT in masonry block construction to avoid construction delays. Avoid surface cut masonry units wherever such masonry units are to remain unplastered or exposed.

3.5 FLEXIBLE CONDUIT

A. Provide flexible conduit connection to motors and equipment subject to

vibration with at least a 60 degree loop to allow for isolation and flexibility.

Use liquid-tight for pumps, equipment which is regularly washed down, and for equipment in damp locations. Provide bonding jumper as required by N.E.C.

3.6 PVC SCHEDULE 40 CONDUIT

A. PVC conduit may be used underground when permitted by code as an acceptable substitute for GRS or IMC. Field bends, less than 45 degrees, when necessary, shall be formed with factory recommended heater. PVC bends 45 degrees or greater shall be factory made.

3.7 UNDERGROUND RACEWAYS

A. Burial depth of underground raceways shall be not less than NEC minimums and shall be deeper where required to avoid conflicts with the new or existing utilities.

B. Arrange and slope conduits entering buildings to drain away from the point of entry.

C. Conduits passing through the exterior walls below grade and/or bridging areas of naturally unstable soil conditions or previously filled areas shall be placed in a manner to avoid crushing from ground settlement. Backfill under conduit shall be thoroughly compacted.

3.8 INSERTS AND SLEEVES

A. Furnish and install all inserts and sleeves necessary for Division 26 installation prior to pouring of concrete slabs and walls.

B. In existing concrete slabs and walls utilize drilled-in threaded inserts, installed as recommended by the manufacturer, where additional supports are required. Neatly core drill openings where additional sleeves are required.

3.9 CONTINUITY OF CONDUIT SYSTEM

A. Conduits shall be assembled continuous and secured to boxes, panels, etc., with appropriate fittings to maintain electric continuity.



3.10 PULL-LINES

A. Provide 150 pound plastic pull-lines in conduit-only systems and spare conduits to facilitate future conductor installation.

3.11 ANCHORING

A. Exterior boxes shall be fastened to approved hot dipped galvanized mounting supports and racking appropriate for size of enclosure.

3.12 CONNECTION TO EQUIPMENT

A. Provide device back boxes of size and at locations necessary to serve equipment furnished under this or other Divisions of the specifications or by others. A device box is required if equipment has pigtail wires for external connection, does not have space to accommodate circuit wiring or requires wire different from circuit wiring used. Study equipment details to assure proper coordination.


Fort Steilacoom Park – Trail Access Upgrades Panelboards March 16, 2020 Bid Set Section 262416

PANELBOARDS 262416-1

SECTION 262416 - PANELBOARDS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED

A. Provide all panelboard equipment complete. All equipment shall be dead front type construction and shall bear the U.L. label. Load centers will not be acceptable.

B. All panels provided for service entrance locations as defined by the NEC shall be provided with a UL label as Suitable for Use as Service Entrance Equipment (SUSE).

1.2 SHOP DRAWINGS

A. Prepare and submit for review prior to manufacture. Include front view, dimensions, device sizes and layout, list of nameplates and all other information required to demonstrate conformance with contract documents.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

A. Siemens

B. Square D

C. Cutler Hammer

2.2 PANELBOARD DESCRIPTION

A. Voltage, arrangement, and capacity of bus and overcurrent protective devices shall be as shown on the drawings. Bus shall extend behind all spaces ready for future overcurrent protective devices.

B. Buss bars shall be plated aluminum or copper with ampere density not-to-exceed 1200/1000 amperes per square inch. Bussing will generally be 3 phase, 4 wire, 100 percent neutral, 200 percent for lighting and computer equipment panels, braced to match the interrupting rating of the breakers.

C. Provide multiple lugs where parallel or "feed-through" connections are shown on drawings.

D. Provide separate neutral and ground buses at the bottom of each panelboard.

2.3 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES

A. Provide thermal-magnetic type circuit breakers.

B. The AIC rating of the panel and circuit breakers shall be as specified on the drawings.

C. Mount breakers in all panelboards so breaker handles operate in a horizontal plane. Provide common



trip on all multiple pole breakers.

D. 120/240 volt circuit breakers shall be the plug-in type.

E. Circuit Breakers rated 15A through 30A shall be U.L. rated for 60/75 degree centigrade wire. Breakers 35A and larger shall be rated for 75 degree centigrade.

F. Circuit breakers intended for switching 120 volt loads shall be switching duty rated (SWD).

G. Provide "Spare" overcurrent devices, where noted on the drawings, complete and ready for future circuit connections.

H. Provide "Space" for future overcurrent devices, where noted on the drawings. Space shall include all bussing and device mounting hardware. Provide approved coverplates or overcurrent devices in all spaces. Open spaces in the panel are not permitted.

2.4 ENCLOSURE GENERAL CONSTRUCTION

A. Provide cabinets of sufficient dimensions to allow future expansion and addition of overcurrent devices within the panelboards. Provide increased enclosure width required for installation of conduits.

B. All electrical distribution equipment locks shall be keyed identically.

C. Fasten panelboard front with machine screws with oval counter-sunk heads, finish hardware quality, with escutcheons or approved trim clamps. Clamps accessible only when dead front door is open are acceptable.

D. Surface mounted panelboards with fronts greater than 48 inches vertical dimension shall be hinged at right side in addition to hinged door over dead front. Provide three point latching mechanism with one T-handle operator.

E. Provide matching trim of same height for adjacent panels or control devices.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION

A. Secure panelboards in place with top of cabinet at 6'-0", above finished grade. Top of cabinet and trim shall be level; trim and door shall fit neatly without gaps, openings or distortion.

B. Top edges of adjacent panels shall be even.

C. Securely anchor panelboards to structural framing or walls with approved fasteners and concealed bracing as required. Provide galvanized steel channel support framing where panelboard is free standing.

3.2 CIRCUIT INDEX

A. Each panelboard shall be provided with a typewritten index listing each circuit in the panel by number, with its proper designation. Listing shall match circuit breaker arrangements, typically with



odd numbers on the left and even numbers on the right. Room numbers shall be the final room numbers used in the building as verified with the Owner. Mount index with a transparent protective cover inside the cabinet door.

3.3 PANELBOARD NAMEPLATE

A. Provide phenolic engraved nameplate for each panelboard.


Fort Steilacoom Park – Trail Access Upgrades Wiring Devices March 16, 2020 Bid Set Section 262726

WIRING DEVICES 262726-1

SECTION 262726 - WIRING DEVICES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED

A. Provide all wiring devices and plates for a complete installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

A. Hubbell

B. Arrow Hart

C. Leviton

D. Pass & Seymour

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Wiring devices shall be specification grade, and the product of a nationally recognized manufacturer regularly engaged in their production

B. All wiring devices specified in this section shall be the product of one manufacturer. Each type shall have identical appearance and characteristics.

2.3 DEVICE COLOR

A. Switch handles and receptacles: White

B. Paint or other surface finish treatments are not acceptable.

2.4 SWITCHES

A. Switches shall be 20 ampere, 277 volt, quiet type with plastic handle. Single pole, double pole, 3-way, 4-way or locking type as required. Provide matching styles and color in other devices as required for the conditions of installation.

B. Momentary Contact line voltage switch: Single pole, double throw, 3 wire, normally open. Rating same as above.

2.5 RECEPTACLES

A. Duplex NEMA 5-20R configuration (20 amp, 125V)

B. GFCI Receptacles

Fort Steilacoom Park – Trail Access Upgrades Wiring Devices March 16, 2020 Bid Set Section 262726

WIRING DEVICES 262726-2

1. Interior: 20A-125V duplex receptacle with trip indicator light. 2. Exterior: 20A-125V duplex receptacle with trip indicator light and single NEMA 3R “In Use”

cover, mounted horizontally.

2.6 DEVICE PLATES

A. Non-metallic with color to match device.

B. Identification

Provide engraved device plates with amperage and voltage for all receptacles above 125V, 20 ampere rating.

C. Provide Nema 3R ”In Use” covers for all exterior switches and receptacles.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 MOUNTING

A. Rigidly fasten each device to the box, level at proper position with plate or switch handle the proper distance through the plate.

3.2 RECEPTACLE GROUNDING

A. Provide bare bonding wire between receptacle grounding terminal and box. Plaster ear screws connecting the receptacle frame to the box will not be acceptable for grounding.

3.3 HANDICAPPED ACCESS

A. Comply with requirements of Washington State handicapped access code.

3.4 TRIM OUT

A. Provide device plate for each wiring device.

3.5 RECEPTACLE TESTS

A. Receptacles shall be checked to insure proper line to neutral, line to ground and neutral to ground voltages.


Fort Steilacoom Park – Trail Access Upgrades Lighting March 16, 2020 Bid Set Section 265000

LIGHTING 265000-1

SECTION 265000 - LIGHTING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. The provisions and intent of the Contract, the General and Supplementary Conditions, Division 1 Specification Sections, and published addenda apply to the work as if specified in this Section.

B. This Section includes lighting fixtures, , LED module, drivers and accessories.

C. Provide the lighting system complete and operational. All light fixtures shall be provided complete with LED module, mounting hardware and accessories required for operation.

D. Provide lighting fixtures of types, sizes and finish as listed on the drawings. Light Fixtures shall be complete assemblies constructed to ensure full life of components and minimize amplification and transmission of component generated noise.

E. Contractor shall include in the bid all costs and documentation for lighting control commissioning. Contractor shall provide the owner a complete report of test procedures and results indicating all lighting controls have been tested, adjusted and operate in accordance with approved plans and specifications per the authority having jurisdiction.

F. Light fixture schedule series numbers are a design series reference and do not necessarily represent the exact catalog number, size, voltage, wattage, type of LED, driver, finish trim, ceiling type, mounting hardware, ceiling trim or special requirements as specified hereinafter or as required by the particular installation(s). Provide complete light fixtures and drivers to correspond with the number of LED’s, wattage, switching and/or size specified. Refer to light fixture schedule, Architectural drawings, and schedules for additional requirements.

G. Light fixture voltage shall match voltage of circuit serving the light fixture. Contractor as part of the billing and submittal process shall verify each light fixture and notify engineer in writing of any conflicts.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. Shall be as follows: National Electrical Manufacturer’s Association (NEMA): LE 5-1993 Procedure for determining luminaire efficiency ratings.


A. Listing and Labeling: Provide light fixtures, emergency lighting units, and accessories Listed and Labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100 and marked for intended use for the location and environment in which installed.

B. Comply with NFPA 70, as adopted and administered by the Authority Having Jurisdiction.

C. NFPA 101 Compliance: Comply with visibility and luminance requirements for exit signs.


LIGHTING 265000-2

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Submittals shall be neatly and clearly marked to indicate the bird spikes, light fixture(s), LED module and drivers fully comply with contract documents. When substitute light fixtures are submitted (if permitted) the data shall clearly cross reference (written and highlighted) the substitute light fixture complies with every detail of the specified light fixture. Light fixtures not fully complying with contract documents are not permitted.

B. Submittals shall have bird spikes, light fixture types and project name clearly indicated and shall be prepared by the authorized manufacturer’s representative serving the project area. A list of manufacturer representatives (including address, telephone and fax numbers) identifying which light fixture types they represent shall be included with submittals. Submittals or requests for prior approval not meeting these requirements will be rejected.

C. Product Data: For each type of lighting fixture indicated on the drawing E0.00, lighting fixture schedule, arranged in order of light fixture designation. Include data on features, accessories, and the following: 1. Dimensions of light fixtures. 2. Certified results of independent laboratory tests for light fixtures and LED module for

electrical ratings and photometric data. 3. Types of LED’s, color temperatures and (LPW) lumens per watt.

D. Wiring Diagrams: Detail wiring for light fixtures that clearly differentiates between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.

E. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturer(s) or their designated representatives stating lighting fixtures certifying that products comply with drawing and specification requirements.

F. Dimming Driver Compatibility Certificates: Signed by manufacturer of driver certifying drivers are compatible with dimming systems and equipment with which dimming drivers are to be used.

1.5 WARRANTY

A. General Warranty: Special warranty specified in this section shall not deprive Owner of other rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to and run concurrent with other warranties under requirements of the Contract Documents.

B. Light Fixtures Utilizing LED Lamp Technology: Provide manufacturer’s warranty for a period of not less than 5 years including parts and labor for full replacement of defective product.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 LIGHTING FIXTURES AND LIGHTING FIXTURE COMPONENTS, GENERAL

A. Metal Parts: Free from burrs, sharp corners, and edges.

B. Sheet Metal Components: Steel, unless otherwise indicated. Form and support to prevent warping and sagging.


LIGHTING 265000-3

C. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free from light leakage under operating conditions, and arranged to permit re-lamping without use of tools. Arrange doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other pieces to prevent accidental falling during re-lamping and when secured in operating position.

D. Reflecting Surfaces: Minimum reflectance as follows, unless otherwise indicated: 1. White Surfaces: 85 percent. 2. Specular Surfaces: 83 percent. 3. Diffusing Specular Surfaces: 75 percent. 4. Laminated Silver Metallized Film: 90 percent.

E. Lenses, Diffusers, Covers, and Globes: 100 percent virgin acrylic plastic or annealed crystal glass, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Plastic: High resistance to yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and

ultraviolet radiation. 2. Lens Thickness: 0.125 inch (3 mm) minimum, unless greater thickness is indicated.

2.2 LED MODULES AND LED DRIVERS

A. General: 1. LED light fixtures shall be in accordance with IES, NFPA, UL, as shown on the drawings,

and as specified. 2. LED light fixtures shall be Reduction of Hazardous Substances (RoHS)-compliant. 3. LED drivers shall include the following features unless otherwise indicated:

a. Minimum efficiency: 85% at full load. b. Minimum Operating Ambient Temperature: -20˚ C. (-4˚ F.) c. Input Voltage: 120 - 277V (±10%) at 60 Hz. d. Integral short circuit, open circuit, and overload protection. e. Power Factor: ≥ 0.95. f. Total Harmonic Distortion: ≤ 20%. g. Comply with FCC 47 CFR Part 15.

4. LED modules shall include the following features unless otherwise indicated:

a. Comply with IES LM-79 and LM-80 requirements. b. Minimum CRI 80 and color temperature 3500˚ K unless otherwise specified in

LIGHTING FIXTURE SCHEDULE. c. Minimum Rated Life: 50,000 hours per IES L70. d. Light output lumens as indicated in specified fixture literature.

B. LED Fixtures: 1. Housing, LED driver, and LED module shall be products of the same manufacturer. 2. LED drivers, modules, and reflector shall be accessible, serviceable, and replaceable from

below the ceiling.

2.3 FINISHES

A. Fixtures: Manufacturer’s standard, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Paint Finish: Applied over corrosion-resistant treatment or primer, free of defects. 2. Metallic Finish: Corrosion resistant.


LIGHTING 265000-4

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Fixtures: Set level, plumb and secure according to manufacturer’s written instructions and approved submittal materials. Install lamps in each light fixture.

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Ground equipment 1. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer’s published torque-

tightening values. If manufacturer’s torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.


Fort Steilacoom Park – Trail Access Upgrades Clearing and Grubbing


CLEARING AND GRUBBING 311100 - 1

SECTION 311100 – CLEARING AND GRUBBING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes specifications for clearing, grubbing, and disposing of vegetation, including

bushes, brush, trees, stumps, roots, rubbish, refuse, trash, and debris within the indicated site

limits.

B. Related Sections: The work of the following Sections is related to the work of this Section.

Other Sections, not referenced below, may also be related to the proper performance of this work:

Section 015639 – Temporary Tree & Plant Protection

Section 024113 – Selective Site Demolition

Section 312000 – Earth Moving

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT

A. Furnish materials, tools, equipment, facilities, and services as required for performing site

clearing and grubbing.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. For sites that are identified possible Archaeological Sites or possible landfills or historic “dump”

sites, prior to clearing and grubbing operations, the Contractor shall notify the Landscape

Architect at least one week in advance of planned activities and make work sites available to City

of Lakewood’s Consulting Archaeologist for observation. Notify the Landscape Architect in the

event artifacts are discovered during clearing work.

B. Dispose of cleared, grubbed, and removed material away from the site. Burying and burning of

materials at the site is not permitted. Stockpile salvaged material in a secured location.

C. Clear and restore areas used for the Contractor's convenience; restore areas to original condition

providing mulching, seeding, and planting as required.

D. Protect survey markers and monuments, existing improvements, existing observation wells and

piezometers, and adjacent properties from removal and damage.

E. Protect all trees, lawns, and planted areas that are not in direct conflict with the work shown on

the Contract Documents. Restore all on-surface disturbed areas to a condition satisfactory to the

Landscape Architect.

Fort Steilacoom Park – Trail Access Upgrades Clearing and Grubbing


CLEARING AND GRUBBING 311100 - 2

F. Review with the Landscape Architect the location, limits, and methods to be used before clearing

work. Perform clearing and grubbing in compliance with all local, state, and federal laws and

requirements pertaining to clearing and grubbing.

G. Care of Existing Trees: Protect trees and plants indicated in the Contract Documents to remain

and to be preserved as specified in Section 015639 - Temporary Tree & Plant Protection.

3.2 CLEARING AND GRUBBING

A. Clear the site within the limit or work as indicated on the Contract Documents and remove

cleared materials and debris from the site.

B. All trees and shrubs within work limit that are not indicated to be protected in place shall be

removed from the site. Unless otherwise indicated removal includes removal of all roots, and

debris from the existing ground.

C. Remove stumps and roots completely in excavation areas and under embankments where the

original ground level is within 3-1/2 feet of sub-grade or slope of embankments. In embankment

areas, where the original ground level is more than 3-1/2 feet below the sub-grade or slope of

embankment, cut off trees, stumps, and brush to within 12 inches of the ground.

D. Do not start earthwork operations in areas where clearing and grubbing are not complete. Stumps

and large roots may be removed concurrently with excavation.

1. Where the work includes requirements for wood chip mulch, acceptable material from

clearing and grubbing activities may be used to produce such mulch.

E. Demolition/Removal:

1. Coordinate the work of this Section with the work of Section 024113, Selective Site

Demolition, as required to remove existing pavements, curbs, structures, and site

improvements which interfere with new construction and where demolition is not indicated.

F. Disposal of Cleared Vegetation, Grubbed Material and Waste:

1. Dispose of in a safe, acceptable manner, in accordance with applicable laws and

ordinances.

a. Do not bury or burn trash and/or debris on the site.

b. Remove cleared vegetation, grubbed material and waste from the site at frequent

intervals so that its presence will not delay the progress of the Work or cause

hazardous conditions for workers and the public.

c. Removed materials, waste, trash, and debris shall become the property of the

Contractor. Remove such materials from the Site and dispose of in a legal manner.

It is the responsibility of the Contractor to locate disposal sites and determine length

of haul route.

2. Backfill: Backfill excavations resulting from work under this Section in accordance with

applicable requirements of Section 312000 – Earth Moving.


Fort Steilacoom Park – Trail Access Upgrades Earth Moving


EARTH MOVING 312000 - 1

SECTION 312000 – EARTH MOVING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. SECTION INCLUDES

1. Clearing, grubbing, and stripping.

2. Excavating unsuitable material.

3. Excavating, backfilling, and compacting for structures, pavements, and landscape areas.

4. Cutting, grading, and filling (earthwork).

5. Aggregate and soil materials.

6. Temporary control of water.

7. Protecting and conditioning materials.

8. Exporting and disposing of unsuitable and excess soil material.

B. RELATED SECTIONSSection 015713 – Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control

2. Section 334000 – Storm Drainage Utilities

1.2 REFERENCES

A. City of Lakewood Engineering Standards Manual, current edition.

B. WSDOT Standard Specifications - Washington State Department of Transportation 2018


C. AASHTO T176 - Plastic Fines in Graded Aggregates and Soils by use of the Sand Equivalent

Test.

D. ANSI/ASTM D1557- Test Methods for Moisture-Density Relations of Soils and Soil-Aggregate

Mixtures Using 10-pound Rammer and 18-inch Drop.

E. ASTM D422 - Method for Particle Size Analysis of Soils.

F. ASTM D2922- Test Methods for Density of Soil and Soil-Aggregate in Place by Nuclear

Methods - (Shallow Depth).

G. ASTM D3017- Test Methods for Moisture Content of Soil and Soil-Aggregate in Place by

Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth).

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Unsuitable Material: Soil, organics, waste, or other material not complying with these

specifications or not capable of compaction to the specified density.

B. Pothole: Exploratory excavation to uncover buried utility, structure, or other feature to determine

location, elevation, size, and type of material.

C. Site Improvements: Manmade object, including portion on, over, and below surface of ground.




1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Samples: Submit minimum 50-pound sample for each material four business days prior to

delivering material to site.

C. Quality Assurance/Control Submittals.

1. Test Reports: Submit sieve analysis for each material.

2. Certificates:

a. WSDOT pit certification for each pit.

b. Disposal site operator certification that disposal site complies with local, state, and

federal regulations.


A. Qualifications:

1. Construction Crew Foreman: Minimum six years’ working experience and four years’

experience as foreman performing similar work.

B. Work and material shall comply with WSDOT Standard Specifications.

C. Comply with City of Lakewood standards.


A. Stockpiling:

1. Stockpile materials on site within clearing limits and at locations approved by Owner.

2. Direct surface water away from stockpile site to prevent erosion or deterioration of

materials. Comply with Section 015713 for control and disposal of stormwater runoff.

3. Remove stockpile and leave area in a clean and neat condition. Grade site surface to

prevent freestanding surface water.

4. Maintain toe of material at least 6 feet from edges of trenches and excavations. Pile so

surface water is prevented from flowing into excavations. Provide free access to fire

hydrants, water valves, meters; private driveways; and leave clearance to enable the free

flow of storm water in gutters, pipes, and watercourses.

1.7 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS

A. Existing Conditions: Existing on-site soils are moisture sensitive.


A. Maintain emergency access and access to adjacent park facilities.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Structural Fill:




1. Well graded crushed, partially crushed, or naturally occurring granular material. Free from

wood waste, organics, and other extraneous or unsuitable material, per WSDOT Standard

Specification Section 9-03.14(1), Gravel Borrow. Restrict fines to maximum 5 percent

passing US Standard Number 200 sieve.

2. Select On-site Material: On-site granular soils free of organic and other deleterious

material capable of being compacted as required for use. Particle size and gradation such

that required compaction can be attained. Moisture content such that required compaction

can be obtained. Maximum aggregate size 2 inches.

B. Stabilization Rock: 2-inch to 4-inch spalls. Less than 3 percent fines. Crushed or partially

crushed rock material.

2.2 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Tests and Inspection: Provide sieve analysis per ASTM D422 for each material type. Perform

tests and analyses of aggregate material per WSDOT Standard Specifications. If tests indicate

materials do not meet specified requirements, change material and retest.

B. Provide 50-pound bag of each material used. Deliver to Owner at job site.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Site Verification of Conditions:

1. Verify survey benchmarks, property corners, horizontal control and intended elevations for

the Work are as indicated.

2. Identify existing survey monuments, benchmarks, and survey control points that may be

disturbed by Work.

3. Verify vegetation to remain is protected and prominently marked.

4. Verify erosion control is in place and operating as specified.

5. Verify removal of abandoned utilities (where required) is complete.

6. Verify demolition is complete.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Protection:

1. Locate existing utilities; avoid damage or disturbance. For aid in utility location call “811”

service 48 hours (two days) prior to beginning construction.

2. Employ and pay for a locator service to locate and mark utilities in addition to the “811”

service.

3. Protect and maintain existing utilities that are to remain.

4. Identify existing and proposed structural foundations near excavations. Verify excavation

will not undermine footings or supports and cause damage to structures.

5. Protect plant life, lawns, and other features remaining as a portion of final landscaping or

interim erosion control.

6. Protect benchmarks, property corners, horizontal control, existing structures, sidewalks,

paving, and curbs.

7. Protect pavement or paved areas intended to remain from damage.




8. Prevent erosion of freshly graded areas during construction or until such time that

permanent drainage and erosion control measures are fully operational.

B. Preparation:

1. Survey and stake limits of clearing. Slope stake toes of fill.

2. Identify required lines, levels, contours, and datum. Should indicated figures conflict with

actual conditions, notify Owner and await direction before proceeding.

3. Identify on-site trees to be removed.

4. Identify trees to remain within clearing limit and within 10 feet outside clearing. Construct

and maintain orange protective fence with metal fence post around trees at drip line.

5. Verify existing grade elevations to be matched. Notify Owner where existing grades to be

matched creates an adverse effect, such as blocking grading, abrupt change in grade, and

slopes steeper than allowed.

3.3 CONSTRUCTION

A. Clearing, Grubbing, and Stripping:

1. Clearing and grubbing: Per Section 311100.

2. Strip topsoil, organics, and soft surficial soils to full depth within paving and building

footprint limits.

3. Do not strip more area than can be protected from moisture damage to underlying material.

4. Remove and dispose of debris and unsuitable soils.

B. Subgrade Preparation:

1. Comply with WSDOT Standard Specifications Section 2-06.

2. Following stripping and site excavation and prior to placing fill, proof roll exposed

subgrade of proposed paved areas with appropriate construction equipment approved by

the Owner. Make at least three passes of equipment over the exposed subgrade. In areas

where pumping or excessive subgrade movement occurs, scarify, aerate, and recompact

existing material as directed by the Owner.

3. Where subgrade soils are loose, remove to solid bearing and replace material in compacted

lifts.

4. Minimize traffic over prepared subgrade.

C. Control of Water:

1. Keep exposed soil free from standing water. Dewater as necessary.

2. Dewatering system shall be contractor designed, constructed, operated, and maintained.

3. Direct drainage away from subgrade, excavation, fill areas, and exposed soils.

4. Grade top perimeter of exposed soil to prevent surface water from draining onto exposed

soils.

D. Grading:

1. Shape subgrades to lines, grades, and cross sections indicated on Drawings. Remove and

replace soft or otherwise unsatisfactory material. Excavate rock encountered to a depth of

6 inches below finish subgrade elevations; bring low areas up to required elevations with

structural fill.

2. Grade areas adjacent to building and structures in a manner that provides positive drainage

away from structures and prevents ponding of water at building or structure.

E. Cutting and Filling:

1. Fill areas to contours and elevations with structural fill.




2. Place and compact fill materials in continuous layers not exceeding 8 inches loose depth.

3. Maintain optimum moisture content of fill materials to attain required compaction density.

4. Do not fill over ponded surface water or existing subgrade surfaces that are yielding,

disturbed, or softened.

5. Suspend placing fill when the weather conditions will not allow specified placement and

fill compaction.

6. Make grade changes gradually. Blend slope into level areas. Construct uniform grades

between spot elevations or contours shown.

7. Remove surplus fill materials from site to approved off-site permitted facility.

F. Compacting:

1. Compact backfill material using hoepacs, towed, or self-propelled compactors or

hand-operated compactors. Compact backfill within 6 feet of existing or new structures

with hand-operated vibratory or impact-type compactors. Do not operate heavy equipment

or compactors adjacent to structure walls.

2. Compact to a dense, unyielding state.

3. Fills under Pavement and Walks:

a. Within 2 feet of finish grade 95 percent per ASTM D1557.

b. Below 2 feet of finish grade 90 percent per ASTM D1557.

4. Fills in landscaped areas: 90 percent per ASTM D1557.

G. Condition existing soil to reduce moisture: Condition existing material to within 3 percent of

optimum moisture content for compacting. If moisture level is above optimum, aerate to dry and

reduce moisture. Process may include placing thinner lifts and allowing material to dry, blading

turning, and disking material, or other methods approved by Owner.

3.4 SITE TOLERANCES

A. Variation from true elevation: 1/2 inch.

B. No change in drainage pattern allowed.

3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL


B. Comply with City of Lakewood requirements.

C. Site Tests:

1. Owner will perform compaction test.

2. If tests indicate Work does not meet specified requirements, excavate failed area, repeat

backfill and compact, and retest.

D. Inspection: Owner will observe the Work at the following milestones:

1. Subgrade: Prior to placing fills.

2. Surface: After completion of cuts and fills and prior to placing topsoil, bases, or

pavements.

3.6 PROTECTION

A. Protect exposed site material and subgrade from damage due to excess moisture and trafficking.




B. Take necessary precautions to protect soils from excess moisture by such means necessary, which

may include:

1. Grading, rolling, and sealing surfaces prior to forecasted or anticipated storms, at end of

workday, or completion of Work during the day.

2. Stockpiling select on-site material.

3. Covering stockpiled material.

4. Covering exposed surfaces and soils.

5. Not exposing or stripping more area than can be worked, sealed, and protected.

6. Using structural fill material that is not moisture sensitive.

7. Completing permanent erosion control as work progresses. Permanent erosion control

includes construction such as pavements, gravel surfacing, soil armoring, and topsoil and

vegetation.

3.7 CLEANINGDispose of surplus or unsuitable material. Dispose of waste, surplus, and unsuitable

materials according to laws, regulations, and ordinances off site at site obtained by Contractor.


Fort Steilacoom Park – Trail Access Upgrades Asphalt Concrete Pavement


ASPHALT CONCRETE PAVEMENT 321216 - 1

SECTION 321216 – ASPHALT CONCRETE PAVEMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Soil sterilization.

2. Base courses.

3. Hot mix asphalt pavement.

4. Asphalt pavement pulverization.

5. Hot mix asphalt overlay.

B. Related Sections:

1. Section 015713 – Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control


1.2 REFERENCES

A. City of Lakewood Engineering Standards Manual, 2019 edition.

B. ANSI/ASTM D1557- Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using

Modified Effort (56,000 ft-lb./ft3).

C. ASTM D422 - Method for Particle Size Analysis of Soils.

D. ASTM D2922- Test Methods for Density of Soil and Soil-Aggregate in Place by Nuclear

Methods - (Shallow Depth).

E. ASTM D3017- Test Method for Moisture Content of Soil and Rock in Place by Nuclear Methods

(Shallow Depth).

F. WSDOT Standard Specifications - Washington State Department of Transportation 2018


1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data Submittals:

1. Soil residual herbicide, including hazardous waste data sheet.

2. Tack coat.

C. Quality Assurance/Control Submittals:

1. Design Data: Hot Mix Asphalt mix.

2. Test Reports: Sieve analysis for each aggregate.

3. Certifications:

a. Hot Mix Asphalt: Letter of certification from supplier.

b. Disposal site: operator certification that disposal site complies with local, state, and

federal regulations.




4. Contractor experience list.


A. Qualifications: Paving contractor and crew foreman to have minimum six years' experience with

projects of this type.


A. Comply with WSDOT Standard Specifications.

B. Comply with City of Lakewood standards.


A. Per WSDOT Standard Specifications Section 5-04.3(1).


A. Comply with provisions of Division 1.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIAL

A. Crushed Surfacing Base Course (CSBC): Per WSDOT Standard Specifications Section 9-03.9(3).

Restrict fines to maximum 5 percent passing Number 200 sieve (based on total percentage

passing ¾-inch sieve) if material will be placed, worked, or receive vehicle traffic during wet

weather.

B. Soil Residual Herbicide: Per WSDOT Standard Specifications Section 5-04.3(4)B. Use only

products approved by Owner.

C. Hot Mix Asphalt (HMA): HMA Cl, ½-inch PG 64-22, Per WSDOT Standard Specifications

Section 5-04.2.

D. Tack Coat: CSS-1 per WSDOT Standard Specifications Section 9-02.


A. Submit proposed mix design prior to commencement of Work.

B. Submit sieve analysis for CSBC per ASTM D422.

C. Tests and analyses of aggregate material: Per WSDOT Standard Specifications.

D. Certification: Letter from supplier certifying hot mix asphalt mix complies with the

specifications.

E. If tests indicate materials do not meet specified requirements, change material and retest.




PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify erosion control is in place and operating as specified.

B. Verify compacted subgrade is dry and ready to support paving and imposed loads and is

approved by Owner.

C. Verify base gradients and elevations are correct.

D. Verify subsurface Work is completed and no further excavation will be required within limits of

Work.

E. Verify demolition Work within or adjacent to the Work is complete.

F. Verify heavy construction traffic is as complete as possible and traffic remaining will not damage

or degrade the Work.

G. Verify Owner, fire and police departments have been advised of restrictions to site access during

Work.

H. Verify weather forecast during planned time of placement is within weather limitations.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Prepare and compact subgrade per WSDOT Standard Specifications Section 2-06.

B. Saw cut existing pavement at match lines with new pavement to form neat straight edges. Field

adjust saw cut edge to remove existing pavement that is damaged or cracked.

C. Water and mix subgrade thoroughly until optimum moisture content is obtained when deficiency

of moisture content exists. When excess moisture exists, rework and aerate subgrade until

optimum moisture content is obtained.

D. Adjust storm drainage frames and grates to grade immediately before paving. Adjust tops of

other manhole covers, valve boxes, and other structures to grade either immediately before

paving or after paving is complete.

E. Areas Receiving New Paving Section: Excavate, remove, and dispose of excess material. Fine

grade to maintain drainage and prepare subgrade. Apply herbicide to subgrade in new pavement

areas.

3.3 CONSTRUCTION

A. Base Courses:

1. Place per WSDOT Standard Specifications Section 4-04.3.

2. Spread aggregate over prepared substrate to a total compacted thickness as indicated on

Drawings.

3. Place aggregate in maximum 6 inches layers and compact to 95 percent per ASTM D1557.

4. Level and contour surfaces to elevations and gradients indicated.




5. Add small quantities of fine aggregate to coarse aggregate as appropriate to assist

compaction.

6. Add water as necessary to assist compaction. If excess water is apparent, remove aggregate

and aerate to reduce moisture content.

7. Use mechanical tamping equipment in areas inaccessible to compaction equipment.

B. Soil Sterilization:

1. Apply Soil Residual Herbicide per WSDOT Standard Specifications Section 5-04.3(4)B.

2. Protect surrounding area from effects of soil sterilization.

3. Do not allow toxic material to run off onto adjacent vegetation or to storm system.

C. Joints: Comply with WSDOT Standard Specification Section 5-04.3(12). Provide full depth

thickness at joint with adjacent paving. Sawcut exposed butt joint. Paint edge of joints with

asphalt for tack coat.

D. Hot Mix Asphalt:

1. Construct per the requirements of WSDOT Standard Specifications Section 5-04. Where

thickness of finished asphalt pavement will be 3 inches or less, place in one lift.

2. Apply tack to contact surfaces of curbs, catch basins, gutters, and cold pavement joints.

3. Perform hand tamping in areas not accessible to rolling equipment.

4. Ensure joints made during paving operations are straight, clean, vertical and free of broken

or loose material.

5. Seal contact joints between asphalt pavement joints, curbs, walls, and drains with CSS-1.

6. Back tamp exposed edges to 45 degrees.

7. Establish smooth grades with minor cuts or fills. Maintain proper drainage and correct low

spots.

E. Asphalt Pavement Pulverization:

1. Protect valve boxes and utility structure covers and grates to remain.

2. Pulverize existing pavement through full pavement depth.

3. Break asphalt pavement into various sizes in good gradation. Refer to Crushed Surfacing

Base Course (CSBC) per WSDOT Standard Specifications Section 9-03.9(3) for targeted

sizes and gradation. Maximum rubble size: 1.5 inches.

4. Remove pulverized pavement material from areas outside the proposed asphalt overlay

limits and spread onto adjacent areas to be overlaid.

5. Level and contour surfaces to elevations and gradients indicated.

6. Compact pulverized asphalt pavement material to 95 percent per ASTM D1557 for base of

asphalt overlay.

F. Asphalt Pavement Overlay:

1. Perform planning per WSDOT Standard Specifications Section 5-04.3(14).

2. Ensure the pulverized asphalt pavement rubbles are prepared and compact to receive

overlay.

3. Overlay asphalt pavement per WSDOT Specifications Section 5-04.

4. Ensure valve boxes and utility structure covers are adjusted to finish pavement elevations.

3.4 TOLERANCES

A. At abutting existing surfaces to be matched: Within 1/8 inches.

B. Per WSDOT Standard Specifications Section 5-04.3(13).




C. Variation from True Elevation: Within 0.5 inch, provided any such variation does not result in a

level or reverse slope.

3.5 PROTECTION

A. Do not allow vehicular traffic on newly paved areas until surface has cooled to atmospheric

temperature.

B. Protect pavements from heavy construction traffic and loads.

C. Protect surrounding area from effects of soil sterilization. Do not allow toxic material to run off

onto adjacent vegetation or into any storm system.

D. Protect pavements from damage resulting from stockpiling, chemical spills, and other

construction activities.


A. Comply with City of Lakewood Requirements.

B. Site Tests: Owner will perform following tests:

1. Subgrade density before placing bases and before paving.

2. Base course density, including pulverized asphalt being used for asphalt overlay base.

3. Hot mix asphalt density.

4. If tests indicate Work does not meet specified requirements, remove Work at failed area,

then replace and retest.

C. Inspection: Owner will observe the Work at the following milestones:

1. After completion of subgrade and before placing base course.

2. After placing base course and before placing asphalt.

3. After placing asphalt.

3.7 CLEANING

A. Clean surfaces within five calendar days of substantial completion.

B. Dispose of surplus, unsuitable, or waste materials according to laws, regulations, and ordinances

at a site obtained by Contractor.

C. Provide certification letter from disposal site operator stating that disposal site complies with

local, state, and federal regulations.


Fort Steilacoom Park – Trail Access Upgrades Concrete PavingMarch 16, 2020 Bid Set Section 321313

CONCRETE PAVING 321313 - 1

SECTION 321313 – CONCRETE PAVING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. Furnish all material, labor, services and related items required to complete concrete paving work indicated on drawings and/or specifications. The items of work to be performed shall include but are not necessarily limited to:1. Concrete flatwork, slabs, sidewalks, curbs, ramps, and associated work.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. This section references the latest revisions of the following documents. They are a part of this section as specified and modified. In case of conflict between the requirements of this section and those of the listed documents, the requirements of this section shall prevail. Other references are as follows:1. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO) “Standard

Specifications for Highway Materials and Methods of Sampling and Testing”

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. The Contractor shall submit to the Landscape Architect materials containing the following information:

B. Procedures to be used in the construction under this Section with regard to the division of labor and the responsibilities of the Contractor and all sub-contractors involved.

C. Furnish samples, manufacturer's product data, test reports, and materials certifications for Portland cement products, expansion joint materials, fillers, sealants, etc.

D. Provide mock-up of concrete finishes, colors, and joints on a sheet of plywood, minimum 48 inches square. Concrete mock up shall be provided for the Landscape Architect’s review a minimum of 48 hours in advance of concrete delivery.


A. The Contractor shall provide, at the request of the Landscape Architect, original supplier invoices for concrete. Concrete found not to be consistent with these specifications shall be removed from the project site(s) unless otherwise approved by the Landscape Architect. The Landscape Architect may copy the original invoices and then return them to the Contractor in a timely manner.

B. Prior to commencing the work of this Section, the Contractor shall verify the accuracy of layout and grading. Verify that all sub-grade and base course aggregate conditions are as specified. Notify the Landscape Architect of any discrepancies and coordinate the correction of those discrepancies with other trades as necessary.

C. Notify Landscape Architect a minimum of 48 hours prior to any concrete pour for inspection of base course aggregates, forms, reinforcing steel, and placement of joint materials. Anticipate pours to provide adequate time for inspection without causing delays to other trades.



D. Protect all finished work. Vandalized work will be rejected by the Landscape Architect and repaired/replaced by the Contractor at their expense, as directed by the Landscape Architect.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONCRETE MIXES

A. Non-Roadway Cement Concrete, High Strength concrete which shall have the characteristics as follows:

28 day compressive strength 3,000 psi94# Sacks Cement per Cubic Yard (see "Cement", below) 6dry Fine Aggregate (Type 6) (see "Aggregates", below)dry Coarse Aggregate (Type 5) (see "Aggregates", below)Max. Water / Cementitious Material ratio 0.49 %Fiberous Reinforcement 1.5 lb. per CYSlump (per ASTM C143) 2 – 3.5 inches

B. Portland Cement: Use only Type II Portland Cement, as specified in AASHTO M 85.

C. Aggregates

1. Fine Aggregate shall be Mineral Aggregate Type 6 (washed sand). Fine Aggregates shall consist of sand or other inert materials, or combinations thereof, having hard, strong, durable particles, free from an adherent coating. The Fine Aggregate shall be washed thoroughly to remove clay, loam, alkali, organic matter, or other deleterious matter. Mineral Aggregate Type 6 Particle Gradation shall be as follows:

Sieve Size % Passing#4 95 - 100#8 68 - 86#16 47 - 65#30 27 - 42#50 9 - 20#100 0 - 7#200 (wet) 0 - 2.5

2. Coarse Aggregate shall be Coarse Aggregate Type 5 (1” washed gravel). Coarse Aggregate shall consist of gravel, crushed stone, or other inert material or combination thereof having hard, strong, and durable pieces free from adherent coatings. Coarse Aggregate shall be washed to thoroughly remove clay, silt, bark, sticks, alkali, organic matter, or other deleterious material. Mineral Aggregate Type 5 Particle Gradation shall be as follows:

Sieve Size % Passing1-1/2” Square 1001" Square 95 - 1001/2" Square 25 - 60#4 0 - 10#8 0 - 5#200 0 -0.5



2.2 FORMS

A. Forms shall be made of steel, wood, or other suitable materials and shall be of size and strength to resist movement during concrete placement. Use straight forms, free of defects. Use flexible spring steel forms or laminated boards to form curved edges if specified.

2.3 STEEL REINFORCEMENT

A. Welded wire mesh to be installed only where called for in drawings unless approved by Landscape Architect. It shall be furnished in flat sheets not rolls, unless otherwise specified or approved. Gauge and opening size to be outlined per the Drawings. If not specified, wire mesh reinforcement should have the following characteristics:

Gauge range: 10 – 16Mesh Opening: 2” –6”

B. Reinforcing bars to be deformed steel bars, ASTM A 615, Grade 60, sized per the Drawings.

C. Concrete Landscape Architected Reinforcing Fibers

1. Fibermesh Company, 4019 industry Drive, Chattanooga, Tennessee 37416, per ASTM C1116-89, or approved equal.

2.6 EXPANSION JOINT MATERIALS: Only installed as isolation joints per project details.

A. Joint Filler: Pre-formed non-extruding resilient material; ASTM D1752, Type I, 3/8 inch wide by depth required to bring top surface within 1/2 inch of slab surface.

B. Joint Sealer: Self-leveling polyurethane; ASTM C920, Type M, Grade SL, Class 25 (color shall match concrete color).

2.7 CURING MATERIALS: Curing shall be per the WSDOT Standard Specifications (most recent edition), or as approved by the Landscape Architect.

2.9 UTILITY SLEEVES: Refer to the drawings and details for the locations of sleeves under paving. Sleeves shall be installed prior to placement of paving and shall be done as follows:

A. Sleeves required for utility lines located under paving (pathways and service roads within the park site) where vehicles are anticipated, shall be, Schedule 40 PVC or better. The inside diameter (I.D.) of the sleeve shall be twice (2 times) the outside diameter (O.D.) of the inserted pipe with a maximum of one (1) insert pipe per sleeve. All wiring shall be in its own separate Schedule 40 PVC sleeve, independent from the piping sleeves.

B. Sleeves under roadways (street rights-of-way, boulevards or parkways) where heavy vehicular traffic is anticipated, shall be ductile iron pipe. The inside diameter (I.D.) of the sleeve shall be at least twice (2 times) the outside diameter (O.D.) of the total inserted pipes with multiple pipes inserted per sleeve (only as directed by the Landscape Architect). All wiring shall be in separate Schedule 80 PVC electrical conduit (min. 2” O.D.) within the ductile iron pipe.

C. All sleeves shall be inspected and approved by the Landscape Architect after forms are set and before paving operations are executed.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 BARRIERS: The Contractor shall erect and maintain barricades, canopies, guards, lights and warning signs to the extent required by law and as is prudent for the protection of the public and protection of the work.

3.2 FORM CONSTRUCTION

A. Set forms to required grades and alignments rigidly braced and secured. Install sufficient quantity of forms to allow continuous progress of work and so that forms can remain in place at least 24 hours after concrete placement.

B. Check completed formwork for grade and alignment to following tolerances:1. Top of forms not more than 1/8” in 10 feet.2. Vertical faces, on longitudinal axis, not more than 1/4" in 10 feet.

C. Clean forms after each use and coat with form release agent as often as required to ensure separation from concrete without damage.

3.3 REINFORCEMENT

A. Locate and place reinforcement as indicated on the contract drawings. Support reinforcing steel or wire fabric with pre-cast concrete blocks at spacing that will ensure minimum deflection of the reinforcement.

B. Concrete Landscape Architected Reinforcing Fibers: Add reinforcing fibers to concrete mix per manufacturer's instructions for specified comprehensive concrete strength.

3.4 UTILITY SLEEVES

A. Pipe trenches located under areas of existing or new paving shall have sleeves installed. Sleeves shall extend 12” beyond the pavement on each side. Trenches shall be back-filled with sand (6 inches above and 4 inches below the pipe) and compacted in layers to 95% compaction, using manual or mechanical tamping devices. Trenches for piping shall be compacted to equal the compaction of the existing adjacent undisturbed soil and shall be left in firm unyielding condition. All trenches shall be left flush with the adjoining grade. The Contractor shall set in place; cap and pressure test all piping under paving prior to paving work.

B. All sleeves installed by the Contractor prior to and during the installation of the rest of the irrigation system shall be inspected by the Landscape Architect.

3.5 CONCRETE PLACEMENT

A. Do not place concrete until sub-base, forms, and reinforcement have been checked for line and grade. Moisten sub-base if required to provide a uniform dampened condition at time concrete is placed.

B. The concrete shall be placed and spread uniformly between the forms and thoroughly compacted with a steel shod strike-board.



C. After the concrete has been thoroughly compacted and leveled, it shall be floated with wood floats and finished at the proper time with a metal float.

3.6 JOINTS

A. All joints shall be edged with a quarter-inch (1/4") radius edger, and sidewalk edges with a half-inch (1/2") radius edger or saw cut as directed by the Landscape Architect in the field.

B. Provide Control Joints, dividing the concrete areas as indicated on the Drawings.1. Form Control Joints in fresh concrete by grooving top portion with a recommended cutting

tool and finishing edges with a jointer.2. Saw Control Joints into hardened concrete using power saws equipped with shatterproof

abrasive or diamond rimmed blades. Cut joints into concrete as soon as surface will not be torn, abraded, or otherwise damaged by cutting action.

3.7 CONCRETE FINISHING

A. After striking off and consolidating concrete, smooth surface by screening and floating. Use hand methods only where mechanical floating is not possible. Adjust floating to compact surface irregularities, and refloat repaired area to provide a continuous smooth finish.

B. After completion of floating and troweling when excess moisture or surface sheen has disappeared, complete finishing as follows:1. Broom Finishing

a. Medium-to-Fine-Textured Broom Finish: Draw a soft bristle broom across float-finished concrete surface, perpendicular to line of traffic to provide a uniform, fine line texture. The Landscape Architect’s decision will be final on acceptance of joint finishing details and surface finishes.

b. Medium-to-Course-Textured Broom Finish: Provide a coarse finish by striating float finished concrete surface 1/8 inch deep with a stiff-bristled broom, perpendicular to line of traffic.

3.8 CURING: Protect and cure finished concrete paving, complying with applicable requirements of the References specified in this Section. Use only pre-approved curing and sealing compound or moisture curing method.

3.9 CLEAN-UP

A. Repair and replace broken or defective concrete as directed by the Landscape Architect.

B. Protect concrete from damage until acceptance of work. Exclude traffic from pavement for at least fourteen (14) days after placement. When construction traffic is permitted, maintain pavement as clean as possible by removing surface stains and spillage of materials as they occur.

C. Sweep concrete pavement and wash free of stains, discoloration, dirt and other foreign material just prior to final inspection.


Fort Steilacoom Park – Trail Access Upgrades Crushed Rock PavingMarch 16, 2020 Bid Set Section 321540

CRUSHED ROCK PAVING 321540 - 1

SECTION 321540 – CRUSHED ROCK PAVING

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. Provide all labor, materials, and equipment to perform the following work of the Contract, including incidentals related to that work and other work specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents:1. Survey for horizontal and vertical control of all work of the Contract.2. Protection of Existing Features and Work in Progress.3. Construction of crushed rock pathways.4. Removing materials from the site which are in excess of that required.


A. Coordinate related work specified in other parts of the Project Manual, including but not limited to the following:

1. Section 32 93 00 – Landscape Planting

1.3 REFERENCES

A. This section references the latest revisions of the following documents. They are a part of this section as specified and modified. In case of conflict between the requirements of this section and those of the listed documents, the requirements of this section shall prevail.


A. The Contractor is responsible for verifying the quality of the work and shall perform compaction and density tests on request of the Landscape Architect to check compliance with these specifications. A copy of the test reports shall be furnished to the Landscape Architect.

B. The Landscape Architect's Testing Agency may perform compaction and density tests to check compliance with these specifications.

C. The Landscape Architect may require that an independent testing laboratory test imported materials at any time. If the material is found to be non-compliant with the Contract, the Contractor shall bear the cost of testing, removal of all non-compliant materials from the Project Site, and replacement of the materials with materials meeting the requirements of the Contract. If the materials tested are found to be compliant with



Sieve Size Percent Passing5/8” square sieve 100%1/4" square sieve 55 - 75%U.S. No. 40 sieve 8 - 24%

U.S. No. 200 sieve (wet) 10% Max. (wet)

D. the requirements of the Contract, the Owner will reimburse the Contractor for costs incurred for testing plus mark-ups as allowed for elsewhere in the Contract.

E. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to verify the accuracy of all survey information provided by the Owner prior to commencing excavations or filling operations. Commencement of these operations constitutes acceptance of the survey information as appropriate to meet the intent of the Contract.

F. Submittals: The Landscape Architect shall approve in principle all products used in the execution of this section prior to their importation to the Project Site. Submit a particle gradation analysis in graph and table form for each product specified. Approval of the Landscape Architect of an analysis does not constitute approval of the actual product, which may be subject to additional testing at any time per paragraph 1.04.C above.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL

A. Prior to the importation of any materials, the Contractor shall provide the Landscape Architect with a certified test lab report of the sieve analysis of the product. The Landscape Architect shall be the final determining factor in establishing compliance with sieve requirements. No material shall be brought onto the job site until the initial sieve analysis has been approved in writing.

B. During the course of importation of materials, the Contractor shall be responsible for continually checking the materials to insure that they continue to meet the Specifications.

2.2 CRUSHED ROCK BASE AND TOP COURSE AGGREGATES

A. Use as Base Course for pathways: 5/8” Minus Crushed Rock (Mineral Aggregate Type 1 – “Ledge Rock” Top Course Keystone), bearing no naturally occurring or worn surfaces Gradation of the base course shall be:



Sieve Size Percent Passing1/2” square sieve 100%3/8" square sieve 96-100%U.S. No. 10 sieve 45-65%U.S. No.40 sieve 15-25%U.S. No.80 sieve 10-20%

U.S. No. 100 sieve 10-18%U.S. No. 200 sieve (wet) 12% Min. (wet)

% Fracture 75% Min.Sand Equivalent 40% Min.

B. Use as Top Course for (less than 5% grades) pathways: 1/4" Minus Crushed Rock (#4 to Dust) shall consist of crushed ledge rock or talus bearing no naturally occurring or worn surfaces as produced by Cal Portland, or approved equal.

2.3 STABILIZER/BINDER

A. Stabilizer/Binder shall be used in conjunction with pathway construction where grades are steeper than 2% and/or as directed by the Landscape Architect through the design review process and shall be one of the following products:1. “Generic-CPX 2900 Series Generic Copolymer Resin Soil-Stabilizer Solution”, as supplied by

A.R. Smith Distributing Co., LLC, 303 33rd Avenue, Seattle, WA 98122, Ph. 206-650-0832, FAX: 206 219-4149, or [email protected] or [email protected].

2. “Stabilizer”, as supplied by Stabilizer Solutions, Inc., 33 South 28th Street, Phoenix, AZ 85034, Ph 800-336-2468, or www.stabilizersolutions.com.

3. “PolyPavement”, as supplied by PolyPavement, P.O. Box 36339, Los Angeles, CA 90036, Ph. 323-954-2240 or www.polypavement.com.

4. “NaturalPAVE”, as supplied by Soil Stabilization Products Company, Inc., 806 West 22nd Street, Merced, CA 95344, Ph. 209-383-7849 or www.sspco.com.

5. Or, approved equal.

2.4 GEO-TEXTILE FABRIC LINER

A. Geo-textile Fabric Liner shall be used in wet or soft site conditions, as directed by the Landscape Architect, through the design review process and shall be an Landscape Architected geo- synthetic, reinforced, woven product as supplied by Northwest Linings and Geotextile Products, Inc., 21000-77th Avenue South, Kent, WA 98032, Ph. 253- 872-0244, or www.northwestlinings.com, or, approved equal.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PROTECTION OF EXISTING FACILITIES

A. Utilities: The Contractor shall protect from damage private and public utilities. Verify the locations of underground utilities minimum 48 hours prior to excavation.

mailto:[email protected]

http://www.stabilizersolutions.com/

http://www.polypavement.com/

http://www.sspco.com/

http://www.northwestlinings.com/



B. Pavement: The Contractor shall protect from damage all pavement or paved areas including curbs and walks intended to remain. The Contractor shall be responsible for replacement if damage occurs to pavement or curbs.

C. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to protect all work in progress from damage due to extremes of cold, moisture, or drying, or mechanical damage from equipment traffic or foot traffic. Alert the Landscape Architect to the presence or likelihood of conditions that may adversely affect the quality of the work, the physical structure of soils, or transport of site soils off-site.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Establish sub-grades to a neat, smooth surface of uniform slope according to the plans.

B. Protect soils from excessive moisture.

C. Apply supplemental moisture to overly dry soils.

D. Do not work frozen soils.

3.3 GRADING

A. Removal of materials beyond indicated subgrade elevations or dimensions without specific direction of the Landscape Architect is not authorized. Unauthorized excavation, as well as remedial work directed by the Landscape Architect shall be at the Contractor's expense.

B. Uniformly grade areas within limits of grading under this section, including adjacent transition areas. Smooth finished surface within specified areas. Compact with uniform levels or slopes between points where elevations are shown, or between such points and existing grades. Finish surfaces free from irregular surface changes.

C. Material Storage: Stockpile satisfactory excavated materials where directed, until required for backfill or fill. Place the material, then grade and shape stockpiles to allow for proper drainage.

D. Locate and retain soil materials away from edge of excavations and drip lines of trees to remain.

E. Dispose of excess soil material and waste materials as herein specified.

3.4 COMPACTION

A. General: Control soil compaction during construction providing minimum percentage of density specified for area classification. Do not allow equipment traffic to overly compact areas beyond specified percentages. Remediate over compaction as directed by the Landscape Architect including ripping, regrading and re-compaction or over-excavation and in-kind replacement per plan.

B. Percentage of Maximum Density Requirements: Compact soil to not less than the following percentages for maximum density for soils which exhibit a well-defined moisture density relationship (cohesive soils) determined in accordance with ASTM D1557; and not less than the following percentages of relative density; determined in accordance with ASTM 2049, for soils which will not exhibit a well defined moisture density relationship (cohesionless soils).1. Import aggregate base material for Crushed Rock Path - 95%.2. Crushed Rock Path Top Course - 95%

C. Moisture Control:



1. Where sub-grade or lift of soil material must be moisture conditioned before compaction, uniformly apply water to surface of subgrade, or layer of soil material, to prevent free water appearing on surface during or subsequent to compaction operations.

2. Before compaction, moisten or aerate each layer as necessary to provide optimum content. Compact each layer to required percentages of maximum dry density or relative dry density for each area classification.

3. Do not perform compaction operations on excessively wetted soils.

3.5 CRUSHED ROCK BASE COURSE

A. Provide a minimum 4” compacted lift of specified Crushed Rock Base Aggregate true to the elevations either described or implied in the Contract Drawings or as required to match adjacent existing pavements, and a minimum of 4” beyond the horizontal layout lines of pavement as indicated on the Contract Drawings.

3.6 CRUSHED ROCK TOP COURSE

A. Provide a 2” compacted lift of specified Crushed Rock Top Course true to the elevations either described or implied by the Contract Drawings or as required by the Landscape Architect.

B. Shape the pathway or trail to the desired width and grades and shape before applying the stabilizer product. For both base and surfacing courses, slightly crown or pitch the surface (2% max. cross-slope) so as to provide natural runoff and drainage. Compact until surface is hard and dense. Repair or replace soft spots, ruts or other damage that may occur prior to the final acceptance by the Landscape Architect at no additional cost to the Owner. Depth as shown on the plans and details is always compacted depth.

C. After placement, water in the surface, then compact by rolling or using plate compacter. Repeat as needed to provide uniform thickness, compacted surface to meet ADA requirements.

D. Apply stabilizer product mixture and compact for a semi-permeable but stabilized pathway with loose top material per manufacturer’s recommendations.

3.7 DISPOSAL OF EXCESS AND WASTE MATERIALS

A. Remove from the Owner's property all waste materials, including unacceptable excavated material, trash and debris, and dispose of it off site in a legal manner. Provide dump receipts from an approved dumpsite.


Fort Steilacoom Park – Trail Access Upgrades Cement Concrete Curbs


CEMENT CONCRETE CURBS 321610- 1

SECTION 321610 - CEMENT CONCRETE CURBS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Cement concrete curb.


1. Section 015713 – Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control.

2. Section 312000 – Earth Moving.

3. Section 321216 – Asphalt Paving.

1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. WSDOT Standard Specifications – Washington State Department of Transportation 2018


B. City of Lakewood Engineering Standards Manual.

C. ACI 301 – Specifications for Structural Concrete for Building.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit under provisions of Section 013300.

B. Product Data:

1. Admixtures.

2. Portland cement.

3. Curing compound.

4. Pre-molded joint filler, joint sealant, and bond breaker.

C. Quality Assurance/Control Submittals.

1. Design Data: Concrete mix design.

2. Test Reports: Sieve analysis for each aggregate.

3. Certifications: Letter of certification from supplier.

4. Contractor crew foreman experience project list.


A. Qualifications:

1. Crew Foreman: Minimum six years’ working experience and four years’ experience as

foreman performing similar work.

B. Regulatory Requirements: Work and material shall be in accordance with WSDOT 2018

Standard Specifications.

C. The color within concrete from separate pours shall remain consistent with minimum deviation in

appearance from concrete in approved concrete sample panels.




1.5 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Requirements: WSDOT Standard Specifications Section 5-05.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONCRETE MATERIALS

A. Portland Cement: Type II conforming to WSDOT Standard Specifications Section 9-01.

B. Aggregates for Cement Concrete: WSDOT Standard Specifications Section 9-03.1.

C. Water: Clean and free from injurious amounts of oil, alkali, organic matter, or other deleterious

material.

D. Admixtures: Air-entrained concrete: WSDOT Standard Specification Section 6-02.3(3).

2.2 CONCRETE MIX

A. Cement Concrete Mix: WSDOT Standard Specifications Section 5-05.3(1). Mix and proportion

to produce minimum 4,000 psi concrete at 28 days with 5 percent air entrainment. Where area

must return to service as soon as possible, use three-day mix. Slump range 2 inches to 3-1/2

inches maximum.

B. Use accelerating admixtures in cold weather only when acceptable to Owner. Use of admixtures

shall not relax cold weather placement requirements.

C. Use set-retarding admixtures during hot weather only when acceptable to Owner.

2.3 FORMWORK AND ACCESSORIES

A. Formwork: Matched, tight fitting, and adequately stiffened to support weight of concrete without

deflection detrimental to tolerances and appearance of concrete. Conform to ACI 301.

B. Concrete Curing Compound: Chlorinated rubber type; clear color; Type I, per WSDOT Standard

Specifications Section 9-23.2.

C. Joint Filler: Minimum 3/8-inch-thick asphaltic impregnated fiberboard, WSDOT Standard

Specifications Section 9-04.1. Color: Gray.

2.4 BONDING AGENT

A. Bonding Agent: WSDOT Standard Specification Section 9-26.1.


A. Submit proposed mix design for review prior to commencement of Work.

B. Tests and analysis of aggregate material will be performed in accordance with WSDOT Standard

Specifications.




C. Certification: Letter from supplier certifying Portland cement concrete mix complies with

Specifications.

D. If tests indicate materials do not meet specified requirements, change material and retest.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Site Verification of Conditions:

1. Verify erosion control is in place and operating as specified.

2. Verify compacted subgrade is dry and ready to support paving and imposed loads and is

approved by Owner.

3. Verify base gradients and elevations are correct.

4. Verify subsurface Work is complete and no further excavation will be required within

limits of Work.

5. Verify demolition Work within or adjacent to Work is complete.

6. Verify heavy construction traffic is as complete as possible and traffic remaining will not

damage or degrade Work.

7. Verify weather forecast during planned time of placement is within weather limitations.

3.2 CONSTRUCTION

A. Forming:

1. Place and secure forms to correct location, dimension, and profile.

2. Assemble formwork to permit easy stripping and dismantling without damaging concrete.

3. Place joint fillers vertical in position in straight lines. Secure to formwork during concrete

placement.

B. Placing Concrete:

1. In accordance with WSDOT Standard Specifications Section 5-05.

2. Hot weather placement: ACI 305.

3. Cold weather placement: ACI 306.

4. Place concrete, screed, and wood float surfaces so smooth and uniform, free of open

texturing and exposed aggregate.

5. Round edges, including edges of joints, with 1/2-inch-radius edging tool.

6. Bevel ends of curb at 45 degrees. Truncate bottom of bevel with vertical face 1 inch tall.

C. Joints:

1. Maximum joint spacing: 12 feet.

D. Surface Finishing:

1. Light broom.

E. Curing: WSDOT Standard Specifications Section 5-05.3(13). Use curing method that preserves

surface finish.




3.3 PROTECTION

A. Immediately after placement, protect concrete from premature drying, excessive hot or cold

temperatures, and damage.


Fort Steilacoom Park – Trail Access Upgrades Pavement Markings


PAVEMENT MARKINGS 321723 - 1

SECTION 321723 – PAVEMENT MARKINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Preparation for painting pavements.

2. Painting parking stalls and insignias.


1. Section 321216 – Asphalt Concrete Pavement

1.2 REFERENCES

A. City of Lakewood Engineering Standards Manual, current edition.

B. MUTCD - Latest edition of Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices for Streets and

Highways with latest revisions per WSDOT.

C. WSDOT Standard Specifications - 2018 Standard Specifications for Road, Bridge and Municipal

Construction, prepared by Washington State Department of Transportation and APWA.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Paint and colors.


A. Comply with WSDOT Standard Specification.

B. Comply with City of Lakewood standards.


A. Pavement must be clean and dry.

B. Comply with manufacturer’s recommendations.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PAINT

A. Non-reflectorized traffic line paint for parking stalls per WSDOT Standard Specifications

Section 8-22.2.

Fort Steilacoom Park – Trail Access Upgrades Pavement Markings


PAVEMENT MARKINGS 321723 - 2

B. Color:

1. Parking stalls: White.

2. Fire Lane Markings: Comply with City of Lakewood Requirements.

3. ADA markings: Comply with state and federal standards.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify paving and curbing is complete and surface is ready to receive striping.

B. Verify distance between curbs to insure adequate width for the indicated number of stalls.

C. Verify weather forecast during planned time of placement is within weather limitations.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean and prepare surface for receiving paint per WSDOT Standard Specification

Section 8-22.3(2).

B. Layout lines to spacing and locations shown on Drawings.

3.3 CONSTRUCTION

A. Painting: Per WSDOT Standard Specifications Section 8-22.3(3).

B. Handicap Parking Striping:

1. Comply with State and Federal Requirements.

2. Size and location as shown on Drawings.

3.4 PROTECTION

A. Protect painted surfaces until dry.


Fort Steilacoom Park – Trail Access Upgrades Metal Vehicular GatesMarch 16, 2020 Bid Set Section 323119

METAL VEHICULAR GATES 323119 - 1

SECTION 323119 – METAL VEHICULAR GATES

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY


1. Vehicular Swing gates.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for concrete bases for gate and hold open posts.

1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product.

B. Shop Drawings: For gates. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, hold open post attachment, footing reinforcement and footings.

1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Maintenance Data: For gate operators to include in maintenance manuals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Provide Knox Box key boxes at all gates where required by the City Fire Department.

2.2 SWING GATES

A. Gate Configuration: As indicated.

B. Gate Frame Height: As indicated.



C. Gate Opening Width: As indicated.

D. Steel Frames and Bracing: Fabricate members from Schedule 40 Steel pipe or as indicated. Hot dip galvanize all exposed steel.

E. Finish exposed welds to comply with NOMMA Guideline 1, Finish #3 - partially dressed weld with splatter removed.

F. Galvanizing: For all gate items other than hardware that are indicated to be galvanized, hot-dip galvanize to comply with ASTM A 123/A 123M. For hardware items, hot-dip galvanize to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M.

2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy welded.

B. Concrete: Normal-weight, air-entrained, ready-mix concrete complying with requirements in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" with a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi , 3-inch slump, and 1-inch maximum aggregate size or dry, packaged, normal-weight concrete mix complying with ASTM C 387/C 387M mixed with potable water according to manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Nonshrink Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107/C 1107M and specifically recommended by manufacturer for exterior applications.

2.4 GROUNDING MATERIALS

A. Grounding Conductors: Bare, solid wire for No. 6 AWG and smaller; stranded wire for No. 4 AWG and larger.

1. Material above Finished Grade: Copper.2. Material on or below Finished Grade: Copper.3. Bonding Jumpers: Braided copper tape, 1 inch wide, woven of No. 30 AWG bare copper

wire, terminated with copper ferrules.

B. Grounding Connectors and Grounding Rods: Comply with UL 467.

1. Connectors for Below-Grade Use: Exothermic-welded type.2. Grounding Rods: Copper-clad steel.

a. Size: 5/8 by 96 inches.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for site clearing, earthwork, pavement work, construction layout, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.



B. Do not begin installation before final grading is completed unless otherwise permitted by Architect.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Stake locations of gates and hold open posts. Indicate adjacent locations of utilities, underground structures, benchmarks, and property monuments.

3.3 GATE INSTALLATION

A. Install gates according to manufacturer's written instructions, level, plumb, and secure for full opening without interference. Attach hardware using tamper-resistant or concealed means. Install ground-set items in concrete for anchorage. Adjust hardware for smooth operation and lubricate where necessary.

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Gates: Adjust gates to operate smoothly, easily, and quietly, free of binding, warp, excessive deflection, distortion, nonalignment, misplacement, disruption, or malfunction, throughout entire operational range. Confirm that latches and locks engage accurately and securely without forcing or binding.

B. Lubricate hardware, gate operators, and other moving parts.

3.5 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain gates.


Fort Steilacoom Park – Trail Access Upgrades Wood FencesMarch 16, 2020 Bid Set 323129

WOOD FENCES 323129 - 1

SECTION 323129 – WOOD FENCES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:1. Split Rail Wood Fence

B. Related Requirements:

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Boards: Lumber of less than 2 inches nominal in thickness and 2 inches nominal or greater in width.

B. Dimension Lumber: Lumber of 2 inches nominal or greater but less than 5 inches nominal in least dimension.

C. Timber: Lumber of 5 inches nominal or greater in least dimension.

D. Lumber grading agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the following:

1. NeLMA: Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers' Association.2. NLGA: National Lumber Grades Authority.3. WCLIB: West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau.4. WWPA: Western Wood Products Association.

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For preservative-treated wood products. Include chemical treatment manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, installing, and finishing treated material.


A. Store materials under cover and protected from weather and contact with damp or wet surfaces. Stack lumber flat with spacers between each bundle to provide air circulation. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 LUMBER, GENERAL

A. Comply with DOC PS 20 and with grading rules of lumber grading agencies certified by ALSC's Board of Review as applicable. If no grading agency is indicated, comply with the applicable rules of any rules-writing agency certified by ALSC's Board of Review.

1. Factory mark each item with grade stamp of grading agency.2. For items that are exposed to view in the completed Work, omit grade stamp and provide

certificates of grade compliance issued by grading agency.3. Where nominal sizes are indicated, provide actual sizes required by DOC PS 20 for

moisture content specified. Where actual sizes are indicated, they are minimum dressed sizes for dry wood products.

B. Maximum Moisture Content:

1. Boards: 15 percent.2. Dimension Lumber: 15 percent for 2-inch nominal thickness or less; 19 percent for more

than 2-inch nominal thickness.3. Timber. 19 percent.

2.2 LUMBER

A. Hand select wood for wood fences for freedom from characteristics on exposed surfaces and edges, that would impair finish appearance, and durability, including decay, honeycomb, knot holes, shake, and wane.

B. Where indicated in the Drawings, provide peeled split and solid lengths of lumber and diameter noted.

1. Material: Cedar

2.3 PRESERVATIVE TREATMENT FOR FRAMING LUMBER

A. Pressure treat boards and dimension lumber with waterborne preservative according to AWPA U1; Use Category UC3b for exterior construction not in contact with the ground, and Use Category UC4a for items in contact with the ground.

B. Pressure treat timber with waterborne preservative according to AWPA U1; Use Category UC4a.

C. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Do not use chemicals containing arsenic or chromium.

D. Use process for boards and dimension lumber that includes water-repellent treatment.

E. Use process that does not include water repellents or other substances that might interfere with application of indicated finishes.



F. After treatment, re-dry to 19 percent maximum moisture content.

G. Mark treated wood with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by ALSC's Board of Review.

H. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings.

2.4 FASTENERS

A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and that comply with requirements specified in this article for material and manufacture. Provide nails or screws, in sufficient length, to penetrate not less than 1-1/2 inches into wood substrate.

1. Use stainless steel unless otherwise indicated.2. For pressure-preservative-treated wood, use stainless-steel fasteners.

B. Wood Screws and Lag Screws: ASME B18.2.1, ASME B18.6.1, or ICC-ES AC233.

C. Stainless-Steel Bolts: ASTM F 593, Alloy Group 2; with ASTM F 594, Alloy Group 2 hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers.

2.5 METAL ACCESSORIES

A. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666, Type 316.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Set work to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit work to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit.

B. Framing Standard: Comply with AF&PA WCD1 unless otherwise indicated.

C. Install metal framing anchors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

D. Do not splice structural members between supports unless otherwise indicated.

E. Do not rip bench boards to fit dimensions. Notify Architect if board dimensions are in conflict with design drawings or require boards to be cut to width.

F. Provide blocking and framing as indicated and as required to support facing materials, fixtures, specialty items, and trim.

G. Sort and select lumber so that natural characteristics do not interfere with installation or with fastening other materials to lumber. Do not use materials with defects that interfere with function of members or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement.



H. Securely attach exterior rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, complying with the following:1. "Fastening Schedule" in ICC's International Building Code.


Fort Steilacoom Park – Trail Access Upgrades Soil PreparationMarch 16, 2020 Bid Set Section 329115

SOIL PREPARATION 329115 - 1

SECTION 329115 – SOIL PREPARATION

PART 1 -GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:1. Soil specifications and amendments for on-grade applications.


1. Section 01 56 39 "Tree and Plant Protection" for protecting, trimming, pruning, repairing, and replacing existing trees to remain that interfere with, or are affected by, execution of the Work.

2. Section 31 00 00 "Earthwork" for excavation, filling, and rough grading and for subsurface aggregate drainage and drainage backfill materials.

3. Section 32 93 00 “Landscape Planting” for exterior plants and mulch.

C. References: The following specifications and standards of the organizations and documents listed in this paragraph form a part of the Specification to the extent required by the references thereto. In the event that the requirements of the following referenced standards and specification conflict with this specification section the requirements of this specification shall prevail. In the event that the requirements of any of the following referenced standards and specifications conflict with each other the more stringent requirement shall prevail.1. ASTM: American Society of Testing Materials cited section numbers.2. U.S. Department of Agriculture, Natural Resources Conservation Service, 2003. National

Soil Survey Handbook, title 430-VI. Available Online.3. US Composting Council www.compostingcouncil.org and

http://compostingcouncil.org/admin/wp-content/plugins/wp-pdfupload/pdf/191/LandscapeArch_Specs.pdf.

4. Methods of Soil Analysis, as published by the Soil Science Society of America (http://www.soils.org/).

5. Up by Roots: healthy soils and trees in the built environment. 2008. J. Urban. International Society of Arboriculture, Champaign, IL.

http://www.compostingcouncil.org/

http://compostingcouncil.org/admin/wp-content/plugins/wp-pdfupload/pdf/191/LandscapeArch_Specs.pdf

http://www.soils.org/



1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Acceptable drainage: Drainage rate is sufficient for the plants to be grown. Not too fast and not too slow. Typical rates for installed Planting Soil are between 1 - 5 inches per hour. In natural undisturbed soil a much lower drainage rate, as low as 1/8th inch per hour can still support good plant growth. Wetland plants can grow on top of perched water layers or even within seasonal perched water layers, but could become unstable in high wind events.

B. Amendment: material added to Topsoil to produce Planting Soil Mix. Amendments are classified as general soil amendments, fertilizers, biological, and pH amendments.

C. Biological Amendment: Amendments such as Mycorrhizal additives, compost tea or other products intended to change the soil biology.

D. Compacted soil: soil where the density of the soil is greater that the threshold for root limiting, and further defined in this specification.

E. Compost: well decomposed stable organic material as defined by the US Composting Council and further defined in this specification.

F. Drainage: The rate at which soil water moves through the soil transitioning the soil from saturated condition to field capacity. Most often expressed as saturated hydraulic conductivity (Ksat; units are inches per hour).

G. End of Warranty Acceptance: The date when the Owner’s Representative accepts that the plants and work in this section meet all the requirements of the warranty. It is intended that the materials and workmanship warranty for Planting, Planting Soil, and Irrigation (if applicable) work run concurrent with each other, and further defined in this specification.

H. Existing Soil: Mineral soil existing at the locations of proposed planting after the majority of the construction within and around the planting site is completed and just prior to the start of work to prepare the planting area for soil modification and/or planting, and further defined in this specification.

I. Fertilizer: amendment used for the purpose of adjusting soil nutrient composition and balance.

J. Fine grading: The final grading of the soil to achieve exact contours and positive drainage, often accomplished by hand rakes or drag rakes other suitable devices, and further defined in this specification, and further defined in this specification.

K. Finished grade: surface or elevation of Planting Soil after final grading and 12 months of settlement of the soil, and further defined in this specification.

L. Graded soil: Soil where the A horizon has been stripped and relocated or re-spread; cuts and fills deeper than 12 inches, and further defined in this specification.

M. Installed soil: Planting soil and existing site soil that is spread and or graded to form a planting soil, and further defined in this specification.



N. Minor disturbance: Minor grading as part of agricultural work that only adjusts the A horizon soil, minor surface compaction in the top 6 inches of the soil, applications of fertilizers, installation of utility pipes smaller than 18 inches in diameter thru the soil zone.

O. Owner’s Representative: The person or entity, appointed by the Owner to represent their interest in the review and approval of the work and to serve as the contracting authority with the Contractor. The Owner’s Representative may appoint other persons to review and approve any aspects of the work.

P. Ped: a clump or clod of soil held together by a combination of clay, organic matter, and fungal hyphae, retaining the original structure of the harvested soil.

Q. Planting Soil: Topsoil, or Planting Soil Mixes which are imported or existing at the site, or made from components that exist at the site, or are imported to the site; and further defined in this specification.

R. Poor drainage: Soil drainage that is slower than that to which the plants can adapt. This is a wide range of metrics, but generally if the soil is turning grey in color it is reasonable preferable to either to plant moisture adaptive plants at smaller sizes that are young in age with shallow root balls or look at options to improve the drainage

S. Scarify: Loosening and roughening the surface of soil and sub soil prior to adding additional soil on top, and further defined in this specification.

T. Soil Fracturing: Deep loosening the soil to the depths specified by using a back hoe, and further defined in this specification.

U. Soil Horizons: as defined in the USDA National Soil Survey Handbook:

http://www.nrcs.usda.gov/wps/portal/nrcs/detail/soils/scientists/?cid=nrcs142p2_054242.

V. Soil Ripping: Loosening the soil by dragging a ripping shank or chisel thru the soil to the depths and spacing specified, and further defined in this specification.

W. Soil Tilling: Loosening the surface of the soil to the depths specified with a rotary tine tilling machine, roto tiller, (or spade tiller), and further defined in this specification.

X. Soil trenching: Cutting narrow trenches thru the soil at the depths and spacing specified to loosen the soil profile, and further defined in this specification.

Y. Subgrade: surface or elevation of subsoil remaining after completing excavation, or top surface of a fill or backfill, before placing Planting Soil.

Z. Substantial Completion Acceptance: The date at the end of the Planting, Planting Soil, and Irrigation installation (if applicable) where the Owner’s Representative accepts that all work in these sections is complete and the Warranty period has begun. This date may be different than the date of substantial completion for the other sections of the project, and further defined in this specification.

AA. Topsoil: naturally produced and harvested soil from the A horizon or upper layers or the soil as further defined in this specification.



BB. Undisturbed soil: Soils with the original A horizon intact that have not been graded or compacted. Soils that have been farmed, subjected to fire or logged but not graded, and natural forested land will be considered as undisturbed.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product data and certificates: For each type of manufactured product, submit data and certificates that the product meets the specification requirements, signed by the product manufacturer, and complying with the following:1. Submit manufacturers or supplier’s product data and literature certified analysis for

standard products and bulk materials, complying with testing requirements and referenced standards and specific requested testing.a. For each Compost product submit the following analysis by a recognized

laboratory:1) pH2) Salt concentration (electrical conductivity)3) Particle size % passing a selected mesh size, dry weight basis4) Stability carbon dioxide evolution rate mg CO2-C per g OM per day5) Physical contaminants (inerts) %, dry weight basis6) US EPA Class A standard, 40CFR § 503.13, Tables 1 and 3 levels Chemical

Contaminants mg/kg (ppm)b. For Coarse Sand product submit the following analysis by a recognized laboratory:

1) pH2) Particle size distribution

B. Samples: Submit samples of each product and material, where required by Part 2 of the specification, to the Owner’s Representative for approval. Label samples to indicate product, characteristics, and locations in the work. Samples will be reviewed for appearance only. 1. Samples of all Topsoil, Coarse Sand, Compost and Planting Soil shall be submitted at the

same time as the particle size and physical analysis of that material.

C. Soil testing for Imported Topsoil and Planting Soil Mixes.1. Topsoil and Planting Soil Mix testing: Submit soil test analysis report for each sample of

Topsoil and Planting Soil from an approved soil-testing laboratory and where indicated in Part 2 of the specification as follows:a. Submit Topsoil, Planting Soil, Compost, and Coarse Sand for testing at least 8

weeks before scheduled installation of Planting Soil Mixes. Submit Planting Soil Mix test no more than 2 weeks after the approval of the Topsoil, Compost and Coarse Sand. Do not submit to the testing laboratory, Planting Soil Mixes, for testing until all Topsoil, Compost and Coarse Sand have been approved.

b. If tests fail to meet the specifications, obtain other sources of material, retest and resubmit until accepted by the Owner’s Representative.

c. All soil testing will be at the expense of the Contractor.2. Provide a particle size analysis (% dry weight) and USDA soil texture analysis. Soil

testing of Planting Soil Mixes shall also include USDA gradation (percentage) of gravel, coarse sand, medium sand, and fine sand in addition to silt and clay.

3. Provide the following other soil properties:a. pH and buffer pH.b. Percent organic content by oven dried weight.



c. Nutrient levels by parts per million including: phosphorus, potassium, magnesium, manganese, iron, zinc and calcium. Nutrient test shall include the testing laboratory recommendations for supplemental additions to the soil for optimum growth of the plantings specified.

d. Soluble salt by electrical conductivity of a 1:2 soil water sample measured in Milliohm per cm.

e. Cation Exchange Capacity (CEC).

1.5 OBSERVATION OF THE WORK

A. The Owner’s Representative may observe the work at any time. They may remove samples of materials for conformity to specifications. Rejected materials shall be immediately removed from the site and replaced at the Contractor's expense. The cost of testing materials not meeting specifications shall be paid by the Contractor.

B. The Owner’s Representative shall be informed of the progress of the work so the work may be observed at the following key times in the construction process. The Owner’s Representative shall be afforded sufficient time to schedule visit to the site. Failure of the Owner’s Representative to make field observations shall not relieve the Contractor from meeting all the requirements of this specification. 1. EXCAVATION REVIEW: Observe each area of excavation prior to the installation of

any Planting Soil.2. SUBGRADE PREPARATION REVIEW: Upon completion of the subgrade preparation

and prior to the installation of any Planting Soil.3. COMPLETION of SOIL MODIFICATIONS REVIEW: Upon completion of all soil

modification and installation of planting soil.4. COMPLETION OF FINE GRADING AND SURFACE SOIL MODIFICATIONS

REVIEW: Upon completion of all surface soil modifications and fine grading but prior to the installation of shrubs, ground covers, or lawns.


A. Schedule a pre-construction meeting with the Owner’s Representative at least seven (7) days before beginning work to review any questions the Contractor may have regarding the work, administrative procedures during construction and project work schedule.


A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified landscape Installer whose work has resulted in successful establishment of plants.1. Experience: Submit statement and outline of qualifications showing five years'

experience in landscape installation and a minimum of five projects that are similar in scale and complexity in addition to requirements in Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements."

2. Installer's Field Supervision: Require Installer to maintain an experienced full-time supervisor on Project site when work is in progress.



B. Soil-Testing Laboratory Qualifications: an independent laboratory, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated and that specializes in USDA agricultural soil testing, Planting Soil Mixes, and the types of tests to be performed. Geotechnical engineering testing labs shall not be used.

C. All delivered and installed Planting Soil shall conform to the approved submittals sample color, texture and approved test analysis.1. The Owner’s Representative may request samples of the delivered or installed soil be

tested, at the cost of the Contractor, for analysis to confirm the Planting Soil conforms to the approved material.

2. All testing shall be performed by the same soil lab that performed the original Planting Soil testing.

3. Testing results shall be within 10% plus or minus of the values measured in the approved Planting Soil Mixes.

4. Any Planting Soil that fails to meet the above criteria, if requested by the Owner’s Representative, shall be removed and new soil installed.

1.8 SITE CONDITIONS

A. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to be aware of all surface and subsurface conditions, and to notify the Owner’s Representative, in writing, of any circumstances that would negatively impact the health of plantings. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.1. Should subsurface drainage or soil conditions be encountered which would be

detrimental to growth or survival of plant material, the Contractor shall notify the Owner’s Representative in writing, stating the conditions and submit a proposal covering cost of corrections. If the Contractor fails to notify the Owner’s Representative of such conditions, they shall remain responsible for plant material under the warrantee clause of the specifications.

2. This specification requires that all Planting Soil and Irrigation work be completed and accepted prior to the installation of any plants.

B. Environmental Requirements:1. Plant or install materials during normal planting seasons for each type of planting

required.2. Planting shall not be permitted during the following conditions:

a. Cold weather: less than 32o F.b. Hot weather: greater than 90o F.c. Wet weather: saturated soil.d. Windy weather: wind velocity greater than 30 m.p.h.

3. Prepare soil only when topsoil is not saturated, muddy or frozen.

1.9 SOIL COMPACTION – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Except where more stringent requirements are defined in this specification, the following parameters shall define the general description of the threshold points of soil compaction in existing, modified or installed soil and subsoil.1. Standard Proctor Method ASTM D 698



B. The following are threshold levels of compaction as determined by each method.1. Acceptable Compaction: Good rooting anticipated, but increasing settlement expected as

compaction is reduced and/or in soil with a high organic matter content.a. Standard Proctor Method – 75-85%; soil below 75% is unstable and will settle

excessively.2. Root limiting Compaction: Root growth is limited with fewer, shorter and slower

growing roots.a. Standard Proctor Method – above approximately 85%.

3. Excessive Compaction: Roots not likely to grow but can penetrate soil when soil is above field capacity.a. Standard Proctor Method – Above 90%.


A. Weather: Do not mix, deliver, place or grade soils when frozen or with moisture above field capacity.

B. Protect soil and soil stockpiles, including the stockpiles at the soil blender’s yard, from wind, rain and washing that can erode soil or separate fines and coarse material, and contamination by chemicals, dust and debris that may be detrimental to plants or soil drainage. Cover stockpiles with plastic sheeting or fabric at the end of each workday.

C. All manufactured packaged products and material shall be delivered to the site in unopened containers and stored in a dry enclosed space suitable for the material and meeting all environmental regulations. Biological additives shall be protected from extreme cold and heat. All products shall be freshly manufactured and dated for the year in which the products are to be used.

D. Deliver all chemical amendments in original, unopened containers with original labels intact and legible, which state the guaranteed chemical analysis. Store all chemicals in a weather protected enclosure.

E. Bulk material: Coordinate delivery and storage with Owner’s Representative and confine materials to neat piles in areas acceptable to Owner’s Representative.

1.11 EXCAVATING AND GRADING AROUND UTILITIES

A. Contractor shall carefully examine the civil, record, and survey drawings to become familiar with the existing underground conditions before digging.

B. Determine location of underground utilities and perform work in a manner that will avoid damage. Hand excavate as required. Maintain grade stakes set by others until parties concerned mutually agree upon removal.

C. Notification of the local utility locator service is required for all planting areas. The Contractor is responsible for knowing the location and avoiding utilities that are not covered by the local utility locator service.



1.12 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Installer agrees to warrant all work for one year from the date of Final Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 IMPORTED TOPSOIL

A. For all planting areas (if necessary as soil replacement, assume 9” depth): “Bioretention Mix”, as available from Walrath Soil Technologies, (253) 606-4101:1. A Mix of Sand, and Compost. The approximate Mix ratio shall be:

Mix component % by moist volumeUtility Sand 60-70%Medium Compost 30-40%

2. Final tested organic matter between 4.0 and 7.0% (by dry weight).3. Conductivity in mmhs/cm <24. pH shall be 6.0-7.55. CEC shall be 5-10 meq/100g6. Soluble salt content shall be less than 3.0 mmhos/cm.7. At the time of final grading, add fertilizer if required to the Planting Soil at rates

recommended by the testing results for the plants to be grown and only with approval from Landscape Architect.

2.2 COMPOST

A. Composted material must be in compliance with WA Department of Ecology’s specifications, which appear in WAC Chapter 173-350 Section 220; plus the following additional requirements:1. The carbon to nitrogen ratio of the compost shall be below 35:1.2. The compost shall have an organic matter content of 35% to 65% as determined by “loss

on ignition” test method.

B. Compost feedstocks shall be:98% landscape waste (Type I) 2% food waste (Type III)

C. Compost shall meet the following particle size distribution:Sieve Percent passing1 inch (9.5 mm) 99-1005/8 inch (9.5 mm) 90-1001/4 inch (9.5 mm) 40-90

D. pH shall be between 5.5 and 8.0.

E. Manufactured inert material shall be less than 1% percent by dry weight.



F. Organic matter content shall be between 45 and 65 percent by dry weight.

G. Soluble salt content less than 6.0 mmhos/cm.

H. Maturity shall be over 80% per TMECC 05.05-A, “Germination and Vigor.”

I. Stability shall be 7 or below per TMECC method 05.08-B.

J. Yard waste shall be from a permitted composting facility.

K. Provide a two gallon sample with manufacturer’s literature and material certification that the product meets the requirements.

2.3 COARSE SAND

A. Clean, washed, sand, free of toxic materials1. Coarse concrete sand, ASTM C-33 Fine Aggregate, with a Fines Modulus Index of 2.8

and 3.2.2. Coarse Sands shall be clean, sharp, natural Coarse Sands free of limestone, shale and

slate particles. Manufactured Coarse Sand shall not be permitted.3. pH shall be lower than 7.0.4. Provide Coarse Sand with the following particle size distribution:

Sieve Percent passing3/8 inch (9.5 mm) 100No 4 (4.75 mm) 95-100No 10 (2.36 mm) 75-90No 40 (.30 mm) 25-40No 100 (.15 mm) 4-10No 200 (0.75 mm) 2-5

B. Efforts should be made to use aggregate with gradation meeting Coefficient of Uniformity equal to 4 or above; and Coefficient of Curve of 1 to 3.

C. Provide a two gallon sample with manufacturer’s literature and material certification that the product meets the requirements.

PART 3 -EXECUTION

3.1 SITE EXAMINATION

A. Prior to installation of Planting Soil, examine site to confirm that existing conditions are satisfactory for the work of this section to proceed.1. Confirm that the subgrade is at the proper elevation and compacted as required. Subgrade

elevations shall slope as shown on the drawings.2. Confirm that surface of all areas to be filled with Planting Soil are free of construction

debris, refuse, compressible or biodegradable materials, soil crusting films of silt or clay



that reduces or stops drainage from the Planting Soil into the subsoil; and/or standing water. Remove unsuitable material from the site.

3. Confirm that subgrade has been prepared.4. Confirm that no adverse drainage conditions are present.5. Confirm that no conditions are present which are detrimental to plant growth.6. Confirm that utility work has been completed per the drawings.7. Confirm that irrigation work, which is shown to be installed below prepared soil levels,

has been completed.

B. If unsatisfactory conditions are encountered, notify the Owner’s Representative immediately to determine corrective action before proceeding.

3.2 COORDINATION WITH PROJECT WORK

A. The Contractor shall coordinate with all other work that may impact the completion of the work.

B. Prior to the start of work, prepare a detailed schedule of the work for coordination with other trades.

C. Coordinate the relocation of any irrigation lines, heads or the conduits of other utility lines that are in conflict with tree locations. Root balls shall not be altered to fit around lines. Notify the Owner’s Representative of any conflicts encountered.

3.3 GRADE AND ELEVATION CONTROL

A. Provide grade and elevation control during installation of Planting Soil. Utilize grade stakes, surveying equipment, and other means and methods to assure that grades and contours conform to the grades indicated on the plans.

3.4 SITE PREPARATION

A. Refer to drawings for special instructions pertaining to work around existing trees and root enhancement zones.

B. Excavate to the proposed subgrade. Maintain all required angles of repose of the adjacent materials as shown on the drawings or as required by this specification. Do not over excavate compacted subgrades of adjacent pavement or structures. Maintain a supporting 1:1 side slope of compacted subgrade material along the edges of all paving and structures where the bottom of the paving or structure is above the bottom elevation of the excavated planting area.

C. Remove all construction debris and material including any construction materials from the subgrade.

D. Confirm that the subgrade is at the proper elevation and compacted as required. Subgrade elevations shall slope approximately parallel to the finished grade as shown on the drawings.



E. In areas where Planting Soil is to be spread, confirm subgrade has been scarified.

F. Protect adjacent walls, walks and utilities from damage or staining by the soil. Use 1/2 inch plywood and or plastic sheeting as directed to cover existing concrete, metal and masonry work and other items as directed during the progress of the work.1. At the end of each working day, clean up any soil or dirt spilled on any paved surface.2. Any damage to the paving or site features or work shall be repaired at the Contractor’s

expense.

3.5 SOIL MOISTURE

A. Volumetric soil moisture level, in both the Planting Soil and the root balls of all plants, prior to, during and after planting shall be above permanent wilt point and below field capacity for each type of soil texture within the following ranges.

Soil texture Permanent wilting point Field capacity

Sand, Loamy sand, Sandy loam 5-8% 12-18%

Loam, Sandy clay, Sandy clay loam

14-25% 27-36%

Clay loam, Silt loam 11-22% 31-36%

Silty clay, Silty clay loam 22-27% 38-41%

B. If moisture is too low, the planting holes shall be filled with water and allowed to drain before starting any planting operations. If the moisture is too high, suspend planting operations until the soil moisture drains to below field capacity.

3.6 PLANTING SOIL AND PLANTING SOIL MIX INSTALLATION

A. Prior to installing any amendments or Planting Soil Mixes blended off site, the Owner’s Representative shall approve the condition of the subgrade and the previously installed subgrade preparation and the installation of subsurface drainage.

B. All equipment utilized to install or grade Planting Soils shall be wide track or balloon tire machines rated with a ground pressure of 4 psi or less. All grading and soil delivery equipment shall have buckets equipped with 6 inch long teeth to scarify any soil that becomes compacted.

C. In areas of soil installation above existing subsoil, scarify the subgrade material prior to installing Planting Soil.1. Scarify the subsoil of the subgrade to a depth of 6-12 inches with the teeth of the back

hoe or loader bucket, tiller or other suitable device. Scarification depth is dependent on amendment quantities, should be a full 12” from finished grades.

2. Immediately install the Planting Soil. Protect the loosened area from traffic. DO NOT allow the loosened subgrade to become compacted.



3. In the event that the loosened area becomes overly compacted, loosen the area again prior to installing the Planting Soil.

D. Install the Planting Soil in 12 - 18 inch lifts to the required depths, where depths are greater than 12”. Apply compacting forces to each lift as required to attain the required compaction. Scarify the top of each lift prior to adding more Planting Soil by dragging the teeth of a loader bucket or backhoe across the soil surface to roughen the surface.

E. Phase work such that equipment to deliver or grade soil does not have to operate over previously installed Planting Soil. Work in rows of lifts the width of the extension of the bucket on the loader. Install all lifts in one row before proceeding to the next. Work out from the furthest part of each bed from the soil delivery point to the edge of the each bed area.

F. Where possible place large trees first and fill Planting Soil around the root ball.

G. Where travel over installed soil is unavoidable, limit paths of traffic to reduce the impact of compaction in Planting Soil. Each time equipment passes over the installed soil it shall reverse out of the area along the same path with the teeth of the bucket dropped to scarify the soil. Comply with the paragraph “Compaction Reduction” (section 3.9) in the event that soil becomes over compacted.

H. The depths and grades shown on the drawings are the final grades after settlement and shrinkage of the compost material. The Contractor shall install the Planting Soil at a higher level to anticipate this reduction of Planting Soil volume, taking into account the displacement of root balls and container stock. A minimum settlement of approximately 10 - 15% of the soil depth is expected. All grade increases are assumed to be as measured prior to addition of surface Compost till layer, mulch, or sod.

3.7 COMPACTION REQUIREMENTS FOR INSTALLED PLANTING SOIL

A. Compact installed Planting Soil to the compaction rates indicated and using the methods approved for the soil mockup. Compact each soil lift as the soil is installed.

B. Maintain moisture conditions within the Planting Soil during installation or modification to allow for satisfactory compaction. Suspend operations if the Planting Soil becomes wet. Apply water if the soil is overly dry.

C. Provide adequate equipment to achieve consistent and uniform compaction of the Planting Soils. Use the smallest equipment that can reasonably perform the task of spreading and compaction. Use the same equipment and methods of compaction used to construct the Planting Soil mockup.

D. Do not pass motorized equipment over previously installed and compacted soil except as authorized below. 1. Light weight equipment such as trenching machines or motorized wheel barrows is

permitted to pass over finished soil work. 2. If work after the installation and compaction of soil compacts the soil to levels greater

than the above requirements, follow the requirements of the paragraph "Over Compaction Reduction" below.



3.8 OVER COMPACTION REDUCTION

A. Any soil that becomes compacted to a density greater than the specified density and/or the density in the approved mockup shall be dug up and reinstalled. This requirement includes compaction caused by other sub-contractors after the Planting Soil is installed and approved.

B. Surface roto tilling shall not be considered adequate to reduce over compaction at levels 6 inches or greater below finished grade.

3.9 INSTALLATION OF CHEMICAL ADDITIVES

A. Following the installation of each soil and prior to fine grading and installation of mulch layer, apply chemical additives as recommended by the soil test, and appropriate to the soil and specific plants to be installed.

B. Types, application rates and methods of application shall be approved by the Owner’s Representative prior to any applications.

3.10 FINE GRADING

A. The Owner’s Representative shall approve all rough grading prior to fine grading, planting, and mulching.

B. Grade the finish surface of all planted areas to meet the grades shown on the drawings, allowing the finished grades to remain higher (10 – 15% of depth of soil modification) than the grades on the grading plan, as defined in paragraph Planting Soil Installation, to anticipate settlement over the first year.

C. Utilize hand equipment, small garden tractors with rakes, or small garden tractors with buckets with teeth for fine grading to keep surface rough without further compaction. Do not use the flat bottom of a loader bucket to fine grade, as it will cause the finished grade to become overly smooth and or slightly compressed.

D. Provide for positive drainage from all areas toward the existing inlets, drainage structures and or the edges of planting beds. Adjust grades as directed to reflect actual constructed field conditions of paving, wall and inlet elevations. Notify the Owner’s Representative in the event that conditions make it impossible to achieve positive drainage.

E. Provide smooth, rounded transitions between slopes of different gradients and direction. Modify the grade so that the finish grade before adding mulch and after settlement is one or two inches below all paving surfaces or as directed by the drawings.

F. Fill all dips and remove any bumps in the overall plane of the slope. The tolerance for dips and bumps in shrub and ground cover planting areas shall be a 2 inch deviation from the plane in 10 feet. The tolerance for dips and bumps in lawn areas shall be a 1 inch deviation from the plane in 10 feet.



3.11 CLEAN-UP

A. During installation, keep the site free of trash, pavements reasonably clean and work area in an orderly condition at the end of each day. Remove trash and debris in containers from the site no less than once a week.1. Immediately clean up any spilled or tracked soil, fuel, oil, trash or debris deposited by the

Contractor from all surfaces within the project or on public right of ways and neighboring property.

B. Once installation is complete, wash all soil from pavements and other structures. Ensure that mulch is confined to planting beds and that all tags and flagging tape are removed from the site. 1. Make all repairs to grades, ruts, and damage to the work or other work at the site.2. Remove and dispose of all excess Planting Soil, subsoil, mulch, plants, packaging, and

other material brought to the site by the Contractor.

3.12 PLANTING SOIL PROTECTION

A. The Contractor shall protect installed Planting Soil from damage including contamination and over compaction due to other soil installation, planting operations, and operations by other Contractors or trespassers. Maintain protection during installation until acceptance. Utilize fencing and matting as required or directed to protect the finished soil work. Treat, repair or replace damaged Planting Soil immediately.

B. Loosen compacted Planting Soil and replace Planting Soil that has become contaminated as determined by the Owner’s Representative. Planting Soil shall be loosened or replaced at no expense to the Owner.1. Till and restore grades to all soil that has been driven over or compacted during the

installation of plants.

3.13 PROTECTION DURING CONSTRUCTION

A. The Contractor shall protect planting and related work and other site work from damage due to planting operations, operations by other Contractors or trespassers.1. Maintain protection during installation until the date of plant acceptance (see

specifications section – Planting). Treat, repair or replace damaged work immediately.2. Provide temporary erosion control as needed to stop soil erosion until the site is stabilized

with mulch or plantings.

B. Damage done by the Contractor, or any of their sub-contractors to existing or installed plants, or any other parts of the work or existing features to remain, including large existing trees, soil, paving, utilities, lighting, irrigation, other finished work and surfaces including those on adjacent property, shall be cleaned, repaired or replaced by the Contractor at no expense to the Owner. The Owner’s Representative shall determine when such cleaning, replacement or repair is satisfactory. Damage to existing trees shall be assessed by a certified arborist.



3.14 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION ACCEPTANCE

A. Upon written notice from the Contractor, the Owners Representative shall review the work and make a determination if the work is substantially complete.

B. The date of substantial completion of the planting soil shall be the date when the Owner’s Representative accepts that all work in Planting, Planting Soil, and Irrigation installation sections is complete.

3.15 FINAL ACCEPTANCE / SOIL SETTLEMENT

A. At the end of the plant warranty and maintenance period, (see Specification section 329300 Plants) the Owner’s Representative shall observe the soil installation work and establish that all provisions of the contract are complete and the work is satisfactory.1. Restore any soil settlement and or erosion areas to the grades shown on the drawings.

When restoring soil grades remove plants and mulch and add soil before restoring the planting. Do not add soil over the root balls of plants or on top of mulch.

B. Failure to pass acceptance: If the work fails to pass final acceptance, any subsequent observations must be rescheduled as per above. The cost to the Owner for additional observations will be charged to the Contractor at the prevailing hourly rate of the Owner’s Representative.


Fort Steilacoom Park – Trail Access Upgrades Turf and GrassesMarch 16, 2020 Bid Set Section 329200

TURF AND GRASSES 032900 - 1

SECTION 0329200 – TURF AND GRASSES

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions in the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes:1. Prairie Seeding. Both graminoid and forb species are included here.

B. Related Sections: 1. Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for excavation, filling and backfilling, and rough

grading.2. Division 32 “Soils” for preparation and installation of planting soils.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Duff Layer: The surface layer of native topsoil that is composed of mostly decayed leaves, twigs, and detritus.

B. Finish Grade: Elevation of finished surface, which is top of mulch for planting areas, top of planting soil for hydroseeding and seeding areas, and top of sod for sod areas.

C. Manufactured Topsoil: Soil produced off-site by homogeneously blending mineral soils or sand with stabilized organic soil amendments to produce topsoil or planting soil.

D. Pesticide: A substance or mixture intended for preventing, destroying, repelling, or mitigating a pest. This includes insecticides, miticides, herbicides, fungicides, rodenticides, and molluscicides. It also includes substances or mixtures intended for use as a plant regulator, defoliant, or desiccant.

E. Pests: Living organisms that occur where they are not desired or that cause damage to plants, animals, or people. These include insects, mites, grubs, mollusks (snails and slugs), rodents (gophers, moles, and mice), unwanted plants (weeds), fungi, bacteria, and viruses.

F. Planting Soil: Standardized topsoil; existing, native surface topsoil; existing, in-place surface soil; imported topsoil; or manufactured topsoil that is modified with soil amendments and perhaps fertilizers to produce a soil mixture best for plant growth.

G. Subgrade: Surface or elevation of subsoil remaining after excavation is complete, or top surface of a fill or backfill before planting soil is placed.

H. Subsoil: All soil beneath the topsoil layer of the soil profile and typified by the lack of organic matter and soil organisms.



I. Surface Soil: Soil that is present at the top layer of the existing soil profile at the Project site. In undisturbed areas, the surface soil is typically topsoil, but in disturbed areas such as urban environments, the surface soil can be subsoil.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Certification of Seed: From seed vendor for each seed mixture stating the botanical and common names, percentage by weight of each species and variety, and percentage of purity, germination, and weed seed. Include a statement about the genetic provenance of source plants. Include the year of production and date of packaging.

C. Qualification Data: For qualified landscape Installer other than preapproved installer.

D. Product Certificates: For soil amendments, fertilizers and jute mesh, from manufacturer.

E. Maintenance Instructions: Recommended procedures to be established by Owner for maintenance of Prairie during a calendar year. Submit before expiration of required initial maintenance periods.


A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified landscape Installer whose work has resulted in successful native prairie/Prairie establishment.1. Experience: Five years' experience in native prairie/meadow installation in addition to

requirements in Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements."2. Installer's Field Supervision: Require Installer to maintain an experienced supervisor on

Project site when work is in progress.3. Preapproved Installer:

Center for Natural Lands Management, South Puget Sound ProgramSierra Smith, Conservation Nursery Program Manager120 Union Ave. SE #215, Olympia, WA [email protected]

B. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.


A. Seed and Other Packaged Materials: Deliver packaged materials in original, unopened containers showing weight, certified analysis, name and address of manufacturer, and indication of conformance with state and federal laws, as applicable.

B. Bulk Materials:1. Do not dump or store bulk materials near structures, utilities, walkways and pavements, or

on existing turf areas or plants.2. Provide erosion-control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of bulk materials,

discharge of soil-bearing water runoff, and airborne dust reaching adjacent properties, water conveyance systems, or walkways.



3. Accompany each delivery of bulk fertilizers, lime, and soil amendments with appropriate certificates.

1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Seeding may proceed only between September 1st and November 15th.

B. Weather Limitations: Proceed with planting only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit planting to be performed when beneficial and optimum results may be obtained. Apply products during favorable weather conditions according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1.8 SEQUENCING/SCHEDULING

A. Provide the following notices to the Owner’s Representative:1. Before Owner is to assume maintenance responsibility: 5 days.2. In advance of final surface preparation prior to planting operations: 5 days.3. Before time requested for inspection for Substantial Completion: 5 days.4. Owner’s Representative may choose to waive or shorten the required lead time for project

reviews, at their discretion.

1.9 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Installer agrees to repair or replace plantings and accessories that fail in materials, workmanship, or germination and growth within specified warranty period.1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Death and unsatisfactory growth, except for defects resulting from abuse, lack of adequate maintenance, or neglect by Owner, or incidents that are beyond Contractor's control.

2. The warranty of plant materials will extend one year from the date of Final Completion for all work under this contract.

3. Include the following remedial actions as a minimum:a. Immediately remove dead plants and replace unless required to plant in the

succeeding planting season.b. Replace plants that are more than 25 percent dead or in an unhealthy condition at end

of warranty period.c. A limit of one replacement of each plant will be required except for losses or

replacements due to failure to comply with requirements.4. Another inspection will be conducted at the end of the extended warranty period if any, to

determine acceptance or rejection.

1.10 MAINTENANCE SERVICE

Initial Prairie Maintenance Service: Provide full maintenance by skilled employees of landscape Installer. Maintain as required in Part 3. Begin maintenance immediately after each area is planted and continue until acceptable Prairie is established but for not less than the following periods:

1. 1-year from date of Final Completion.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PRAIRIE SEED

A. Grass and Forb Seed: Fresh, clean, dry, new-crop seed complying with AOSA’s “Journal of Seed Technology; Rules for Testing Seeds” for purity and germination tolerances.

B. Prairie Mix per Plant Schedule, available from the Center for Natural Lands Management:1. Sierra Smith

Center for Natural Lands Management, South Puget Sound ProgramConservation Nursery Program Manager120 Union Ave. SE #215, Olympia, WA [email protected]

2. All seed shall have South Puget Sound genetic provenance.

2.2 SEED CARRIER

A. Sawdust: Fresh, light-colored, natural wood, free of preservatives, dyes or other additives.

2.3 JUTE MESH

A. Jute Mesh: Jute mesh shall be a uniform, open, plain weave cloth of undyed and unbleached single jute yarn. The yarn shall be of a loosely twisted construction and it shall not vary in thickness more than one-half its normal diameter. Jute mesh shall be furnished in rolled strips and shall meet the following requirements: Width - 48 inches, plus or minus one inch 78 warp - ends per width of cloth, 41 weft - ends per yard. Weight shall average 1.22 pounds per linear yard with a tolerance of plus or minus 5%.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas to be planted for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance.1. Verify that no foreign or deleterious material or liquid such as paint, paint washout,

concrete slurry, concrete layers or chunks, cement, plaster, oils, gasoline, diesel fuel, paint thinner, turpentine, tar, roofing compound, sandblast media, or acid has been deposited in soil within a planting area.

2. Do not mix or place soils and soil amendments in frozen, wet, or muddy conditions.3. Suspend soil spreading, grading, and tilling operations during periods of excessive soil

moisture until the moisture content reaches acceptable levels to attain the required results.4. Uniformly moisten excessively dry soil that is not workable and which is too dusty.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.



C. If contamination by foreign or deleterious material or liquid is present in soil within a planting area, remove the soil and contamination as directed by Owner’s Representative and replace with new planting soil.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities, trees, shrubs, and plantings from damage caused by planting operations.1. Protect adjacent and adjoining areas from seeding operations.2. Protect grade stakes set by others until directed to remove them.

B. Install erosion-control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of soils and discharge of soil-bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways.

3.3 PRAIRIE SEEDING

A. Sow seed by broadcasting with a spreader. Do not broadcast or drop seed when wind velocity exceeds 5 mph.1. Before sowing, mix seed with dampened sawdust at a ratio of not less than two parts seed

carrier to one part seed.2. Evenly distribute seed by sowing equal quantities in two directions at right angles to each

other.3. Do not use wet seed or seed that is moldy or otherwise damaged.

B. Sow seed at rate recommended by seed supplier.

C. Lightly rake seed into top 1/16 inchof graded and prepared soil, and water with fine spray.

D. Cover all seeded areas evenly with jute mesh, secured with wooden stakes.

E. Water newly planted areas and keep moist until Prairie is established.

3.4 PRAIRIE MAINTENANCE

A. Maintain and establish Prairie by watering, weeding, mowing, trimming, replanting, and performing other operations as required to establish a healthy, viable Prairie. Regrade and replant bare or eroded areas. Provide materials and installation the same as those used in the original installation.1. Fill in as necessary soil subsidence that may occur because of settling or other processes.

Replace materials and Prairie damaged or lost in areas of subsidence.2. Apply treatments as required to keep Prairie and soil free of pests and pathogens or disease.3. Plants installed outside the seeding window shall be nursery-grown plug stock,

representative of the species, quantities and genetic provenance of the specified seed mix.

B. Protect seeded areas from predation by wildlife.

C. Watering: Schedule watering to prevent wilting, puddling, erosion, and displacement of seed or mulch.

D. Water Prairie with fine spray at a minimum rate of 1 inch per week unless rainfall precipitation is adequate.



E. Remove all weeds from the site before they flower.

3.5 SATISFACTORY PRAIRIE

A. Prairie installations shall meet the following criteria as determined by Owner’s Representative:1. Satisfactory Seeded Prairie: At end of maintenance period, a healthy, uniform, close stand

of forbs and grasses has been established, free of weeds and surface irregularities, with coverage exceeding 90 percent over any 10 sq. ft. and bare spots not exceeding 5 by 5 inches. Established plants should be representative of specified mix in species and proportion.

B. Use specified materials to reestablish Prairie that does not comply with requirements and continue maintenance until establishment is satisfactory.1. Plants installed outside the seeding window shall be nursery-grown plug stock,

representative of the species, quantities and genetic provenance of the specified seed mix.

3.6 CLEANUP AND PROTECTION

A. Promptly remove soil and debris created by Prairie work from paved areas. Clean wheels of vehicles before leaving site to avoid tracking soil onto roads, walks, or other paved areas.

B. Erect temporary fencing or barricades and warning signs as required to protect newly planted areas from traffic. Maintain fencing and barricades throughout initial maintenance period and remove after plantings are established.

C. Protect from wildlife predation and disturbance.

D. Remove nondegradable erosion-control measures after plant establishment period.

3.7 MAINTENANCE SERVICES

A. Prairie Maintenance Service: Provide full maintenance by skilled employees of landscape Installer. Maintain as required in "Prairie Maintenance" Article. Begin maintenance immediately after each area is planted and continue until acceptable Prairie is established, but for not less than maintenance period below.1. Maintenance Period: 1-year from date of Substantial Completion.


Fort Steilacoom Park – Trail Access Upgrades Landscape PlantingMarch 16, 2020 Bid Set Section 329300

LANDSCAPE PLANTING 329300 - 1

SECTION 329300 – LANDSCAPE PLANTING

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. The scope of work includes all labor, materials, appliances, tools, equipment, facilities, transportation and services necessary for, and incidental to performing all operations in connection with furnishing, delivery, and installation of plant (also known as "landscaping”) complete as shown on the drawings and as specified herein.

B. The scope of work in this section includes, but is not limited to, the following:1. Locate, purchase, deliver and install all specified plants.2. Water all specified plants.3. Mulch, fertilize, stake, and prune all specified plants.4. Maintenance of all specified plants until the beginning of the warranty period. 5. Plant warranty.6. Clean up and disposal of all excess and surplus material. 7. Maintenance of all specified plants during the warranty period.

1.2 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

A. Shall consist of specifications and general conditions and the construction drawings. The intent of these documents is to include all labor, materials, and services necessary for the proper execution of the work. The documents are to be considered as one. Whatever is called for by any parts shall be as binding as if called for in all parts.

1.3 RELATED DOCUMENTS AND REFERENCES

A. Related Documents:1. Drawings and general provisions of contract including general and supplementary

conditions and Division I specifications apply to work of this section2. Related Specification Sections

a. Section - Planting Soilb. Section - Irrigationc. Section - Tree Protection and Plant Protection

B. References: The following specifications and standards of the organizations and documents listed in this paragraph form a part of the specification to the extent required by the references thereto. In the event that the requirements of the following referenced standards and specification conflict with this specification section the requirements of this specification shall prevail. In the event that the requirements of any of the following referenced standards and specifications conflict with each other the more stringent requirement shall prevail or as determined by the Owners Representative.1. ANSI Z60.1 American Standard for Nursery Stock, most current edition.2. ANSI A 300 – Standard Practices for Tree, Shrub and other Woody Plant Maintenance,

most current edition and parts.3. Interpretation of plant names and descriptions shall reference the following documents.

Where the names or plant descriptions disagree between the several documents, the most current document shall prevail.a. USDA - The Germplasm Resources Information Network (GRIN) http://www.ars-

http://www.ars-grin.gov/npgs/aboutgrin.html

http://www.ars-grin.gov/npgs/searchgrin.html



grin.gov/npgs/searchgrin.htmlb. Manual of Woody Landscape Plants; Michael Dirr; Stipes Publishing, Champaign,

Illinois; Most Current Edition.c. The New Sunset Western Garden Book, Oxmoor House, most current edition.

4. Pruning practices shall conform to recommendations “Structural Pruning: A Guide For The Green Industry” most current edition; published by Urban Tree Foundation, Visalia, California.

5. Glossary of Arboricultural Terms, International Society of Arboriculture, Champaign IL, most current edition.

1.4 VERIFICATION

A. All scaled dimensions on the drawings are approximate. Before proceeding with any work, the Contractor shall carefully check and verify all dimensions and quantities, and shall immediately inform the Owner’s Representative of any discrepancies between the information on the drawings and the actual conditions, refraining from doing any work in said areas until given approval to do so by the Owner’s Representative.

B. In the case of a discrepancy in the plant quantities between the plan drawings and the plant call outs, list or plant schedule, the number of plants or square footage of the planting bed actually drawn on the plan drawings shall be deemed correct and prevail.

1.5 PERMITS AND REGULATIONS

A. The Contractor shall obtain and pay for all permits related to this section of the work unless previously excluded under provision of the contract or general conditions. The Contractor shall comply with all laws and ordinances bearing on the operation or conduct of the work as drawn and specified. If the Contractor observes that a conflict exists between permit requirements and the work outlined in the contract documents, the Contractor shall promptly notify the Owner’s Representative in writing including a description of any necessary changes and changes to the contract price resulting from changes in the work.

B. Wherever references are made to standards or codes in accordance with which work is to be performed or tested, the edition or revision of the standards and codes current on the effective date of this contract shall apply, unless otherwise expressly set forth.

C. In case of conflict among any referenced standards or codes or between any referenced standards and codes and the specifications, the more restrictive standard shall apply or Owner’s Representative shall determine which shall govern.

1.6 PROTECTION OF WORK, PROPERTY AND PERSON

A. The Contractor shall adequately protect the work, adjacent property, and the public, and shall be responsible for any damages or injury due to his/her actions.

1.7 CHANGES IN THE WORK

A. The Owner’s Representative may order changes in the work, and the contract sum should be adjusted accordingly. All such orders and adjustments plus claims by the Contractor for extra compensation must be made and approved in writing before executing the work involved.

http://www.ars-grin.gov/npgs/searchgrin.html



B. All changes in the work, notifications and contractor’s request for information (RFI) shall conform to the contract general condition requirements.

1.8 CORRECTION OF WORK

A. The Contractor, at their own cost, shall re-execute any work that fails to conform to the requirements of the contract and shall remedy defects due to faulty materials or workmanship upon written notice from the Owner’s Representative, at the soonest as possible time that can be coordinated with other work and seasonal weather demands.

1.9 DEFINITIONS

All terms in this specification shall be as defined in the “Glossary of Arboricultural Terms” or as modified below.

A. Boxed trees: A container root ball package made of wood in the shape of a four-sided box.

B. Container plant: Plants that are grown in and/or are currently in a container including boxed trees.

C. Defective plant: Any plant that fails to meet the plant quality requirement of this specification.

D. End of Warranty Final Acceptance: The date when the Owner’s Representative accepts that the plants and work in this section meet all the requirements of the warranty. It is intended that the materials and workmanship warranty for Planting, Planting Soil, and Irrigation work run concurrent with each other.

E. Field grown trees (B&B): Trees growing in field soil for at least 12 months prior to harvest.

F. Healthy: Plants that are growing in a condition that expresses leaf size, crown density, color; and with annual growth rates typical of the species and cultivar’s horticultural description, adjusted for the planting site soil, drainage and weather conditions.

G. Kinked root: A root within the root package that bends more than 90 degrees.

H. Maintenance: Actions that preserve the health of plants after installation and as defined in this specification.

I. Maintenance period: The time period, as defined in this specification, which the Contractor is to provide maintenance.

J. Normal: the prevailing protocol of industry standard(s).

K. Reasonable and reasonably: When used in this specification relative to plant quality, it is intended to mean that the conditions cited will not affect the establishment or long term stability, health or growth of the plant. This specification recognizes that it is not possible to produce plants free of all defects, but that some accepted industry protocols and standards result in plants unacceptable to this project.

L. When reasonable or reasonably is used in relation to other issues such as weeds, diseased, insects, it shall mean at levels low enough that no treatment would be required when applying recognized Integrated Plant Management practices.



M. This specification recognizes that some decisions cannot be totally based on measured findings and that professional judgment is required. In cases of differing opinion, the Owner’s Representative’s expert shall determine when conditions are judged as reasonable.

N. Root ball: The mass of roots including any soil or substrate that is shipped with the tree within the root ball package.

O. Root ball package. The material that surrounds the root ball during shipping. The root package may include the material in which the plant was grown, or new packaging placed around the root ball for shipping.

P. Root collar (root crown, root flare, trunk flare, flare): The region at the base of the trunk where the majority of the structural roots join the plant stem, usually at or near ground level.

Q. Shrub: Woody plants with mature height approximately less than 15 feet.

R. Spade harvested and transplanted: Field grown trees that are mechanically harvested and immediately transplanted to the final growing site without being removed from the digging machine.

S. Stem: The trunk of the tree.

T. Substantial Completion Acceptance: The date at the end of the Planting, Planting Soil, and Irrigation installation where the Owner’s Representative accepts that all work in these sections is complete and the Warranty period has begun. This date may be different than the date of substantial completion for the other sections of the project.

U. Stem girdling root: Any root more than ¼ inch diameter currently touching the trunk, or with the potential to touch the trunk, above the root collar approximately tangent to the trunk circumference or circling the trunk. Roots shall be considered as Stem Girdling that have, or are likely to have in the future, root to trunk bark contact.

V. Structural root: One of the largest roots emerging from the root collar.

W. Tree: Single and multi-stemmed plants with mature height approximately greater than 15 feet.

1.10 SUBMITTALS

A. See contract general conditions for policy and procedure related to submittals.

B. Submit all product submittals 8 weeks prior to installation of plantings.

C. Product data: Submit manufacturer product data and literature describing all products required by this section to the Owner’s Representative for approval. Provide submittal eight weeks before the installation of plants.

D. Plant growers’ certificates: Submit plant growers’ certificates for all plants indicating that each meets the requirements of the specification, including the requirements of tree quality, to the Owner’s Representative for approval. Provide submittal eight weeks before the installation of plants.



E. Samples: Submit samples of each product and material where required by the specification to the Owner’s Representative for approval. Label samples to indicate product, characteristics, and locations in the work. Samples will be reviewed for appearance only. Compliance with all other requirements is the exclusive responsibility of the Contractor.

F. Plant sources: Submit sources of all plants as required by Article – “Selection of Plants” to the Owner’s Representative for approval.

G. Close out submittals: Submit to the Owner’s Representative for approval.1. Plant maintenance data and requirements.

H. Warranty period site visit record: If there is no maintenance during the warranty period, after each site visit during the warranty period, by the Contractor, as required by this specification, submit a written record of the visit, including any problems, potential problems, and any recommended corrective action to the Owner’s Representative for approval.

1.11 OBSERVATION OF THE WORK

A. The Owner’s Representative may observe the work at any time. They may remove samples of materials for conformity to specifications. Rejected materials shall be immediately removed from the site and replaced at the Contractor's expense. The cost of testing materials not meeting specifications shall be paid by the Contractor.

B. The Owner’s Representative shall be informed of the progress of the work so the work may be observed at the following key times in the construction process. The Owner’s Representative shall be afforded sufficient time to schedule visit to the site. Failure of the Owner’s Representative to make field observations shall not relieve the Contractor from meeting all the requirements of this specification. 1. SITE CONDITIONS PRIOR TO THE START OF PLANTING: review the soil and

drainage conditions.2. COMPLETION OF THE PLANT LAYOUT STAKING: Review of the plant layout.3. PLANT QUALITY: Review of plant quality at the time of delivery and prior to

installation. Review tree quality prior to unloading where possible, but in all cases prior to planting.

4. COMPLETION OF THE PLANTING: Review the completed planting.


A. Schedule a pre-construction meeting with the Owner’s Representative at least seven (7) days before beginning work to review any questions the Contractor may have regarding the work, administrative procedures during construction and project work schedule.


A. Substantial Completion Acceptance - Acceptance of the work prior to the start of the warranty period:1. Once the Contractor completes the installation of all items in this section, the Owner’s

Representative will observe all work for Substantial Completion Acceptance upon written request of the Contractor. The request shall be received at least ten calendar days before the anticipated date of the observation.



2. Substantial Completion Acceptance by the Owner’s Representative shall be for general conformance to specified size, character and quality and not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for full conformance to the contract documents, including correct species.

3. Any plants that are deemed defective as defined under the provisions below shall not be accepted.

B. The Owner’s Representative will provide the Contractor with written acknowledgment of the date of Substantial Completion Acceptance and the beginning of the warranty period and plant maintenance period (if plant maintenance is included).

C. Contractor’s Quality Assurance Responsibilities: The Contractor is solely responsible for quality control of the work.

D. Installer Qualifications: The installer shall be a firm having at least 5 years of successful experience of a scope similar to that required for the work, including the handling and planting of large specimen trees in urban areas. The same firm shall install planting soil (where applicable) and plant material.1. The bidders list for work under this section shall be approved by the Owner’s

Representative.2. Installer Field Supervision: When any planting work is in progress, installer shall

maintain, on site, a full-time supervisor who can communicate in English with the Owner’s Representative.

3. Installer’s field supervisor shall have a minimum of five years experience as a field supervisor installing plants and trees of the quality and scale of the proposed project.

4. The installer’s crew shall have a minimum of 3 years experienced in the installation of Planting Soil, Plantings, and Irrigation (where applicable) and interpretation of soil plans, planting plans and irrigation plans.

5. Submit references of past projects, employee training certifications that support that the Contractors meets all of the above installer qualifications and applicable licensures.

1.14 PLANT WARRANTY

A. Plant Warranty:1. The Contractor agrees to replace defective work and defective plants. The Owner’s

Representative shall make the final determination if plants meet these specifications or that plants are defective.

2. Plants warranty shall begin on the date of Substantial Completion Acceptance and continue for the following periods, classed by plant type: a. Trees – 2 Years.b. Shrubs – 1 Year.c. Ground cover, grasses and perennial flower plants – 1 Year.d. Bulbs, annual flower and seasonal color plants – for the period of expected bloom or

primary display.3. When the work is accepted in parts, the warranty periods shall extend from each of the

partial Substantial Completion Acceptances to the terminal date of the last warranty period. Thus, all warranty periods for each class of plant warranty, shall terminate at one time.

4. All plants shall be warrantied to meet all the requirements for plant quality at installation in this specification. Defective plants shall be defined as plants not meeting these requirements. The Owner’s representative shall make the final determination that plants are defective.



5. Plants determined to be defective shall be removed immediately upon notification by the Owner’s Representative and replaced without cost to the Owner, as soon as weather conditions permit and within the specified planting period.

6. Any work required by this specification or the Owner’s Representative during the progress of the work, to correct plant defects including the removal of roots or branches, or planting plants that have been bare rooted during installation to observe for or correct root defects shall not be considered as grounds to void any conditions of the warranty. In the event that the Contractor decides that such remediation work may compromise the future health of the plant, the plant or plants in question shall be rejected and replaced with plants that do not contain defects that require remediation or correction.

7. The Contractor is exempt from replacing plants, after Substantial Completion Acceptance and during the warranty period, that are removed by others, lost or damaged due to occupancy of project, lost or damaged by a third party, vandalism, or any natural disaster.

8. Replacements shall closely match adjacent specimens of the same species. Replacements shall be subject to all requirements stated in this specification. Make all necessary repairs due to plant replacements. Such repairs shall be done at no extra cost to the Owner.

9. The warranty of all replacement plants shall extend for an additional one-year period from the date of their acceptance after replacement. In the event that a replacement plant is not acceptable during or at the end of the said extended warranty period, the Owner’s Representative may elect one more replacement items or credit for each item. These tertiary replacement items are not protected under a warranty period.

10. During and by the end of the warranty period, remove all tree wrap, ties, labels, and guying unless agreed to by the Owner’s Representative to remain in place. All trees that do not have sufficient caliper to remain upright, or those requiring additional anchorage in windy locations, shall be staked or remain staked, if required by the Owner's Representative.

B. End of Warranty Final Acceptance - Acceptance of plants at the end of the warranty period.1. At the end of the warranty period, the Owner’s Representative shall observe all warranted

work, upon written request of the Contractor. The request shall be received at least ten calendar days before the anticipated date for final observation.

2. End of Warranty Final Acceptance will be given only when all the requirements of the work under this specification and in specification sections Planting Soil and Irrigation have been met.

1.15 SELECTION AND OBSERVATION OF PLANTS

A. The Owner’s Representative may review all plants subject to approval of size, health, quality, character, etc. Review or approval of any plant during the process of selection, delivery, installation and establishment period shall not prevent that plant from later rejection in the event that the plant quality changes or previously existing defects become apparent that were not observed.

B. Plant Selection: The Owner’s Representative reserves the right to select and observe all plants at the nursery prior to delivery and to reject plants that do not meet specifications as set forth in this specification. If a particular defect or substandard element can be corrected at the nursery, as determined by the Owner’s Representative, the agreed upon remedy may be applied by the nursery or the Contractor provided that the correction allows the plant to meet the requirements set forth in this specification. Any work to correct plant defects shall be at the contractor’s expense.



1. The Owner’s Representative may make invasive observation of the plant’s root system in the area of the root collar and the top of the root ball in general in order to determine that the plant meets the quality requirements for depth of the root collar and presence of roots above the root collar. Such observations will not harm the plant.

2. Corrections are to be undertaken at the nursery prior to shipping.

C. The Contractor shall bear all cost related to plant corrections.

D. All plants that are rejected shall be immediately removed from the site and acceptable replacement plants provided at no cost to the Owner.

E. Submit to the Owner’s Representative, for approval, plant sources including the names and locations of nurseries proposed as sources of acceptable plants, and a list of the plants they will provide. The plant list shall include the botanical and common name and the size at the time of selection. Observe all nursery materials to determine that the materials meet the requirements of this section.

F. Trees shall be purchased from the growing nursery. When re-wholesale suppliers are utilized, the Contractor shall submit the name and location of the growing nursery from where the trees were obtained by the re-wholesale seller. The re-wholesale nursery shall be responsible for any required plant quality certifications.

G. The Contractor shall require the grower or re-wholesale supplier to permit the Owner’s Representative to observe the root system of all plants at the nursery or job site prior to planting including random removal of soil or substrate around the base of the plant. Observation may be as frequent and as extensive as needed to verify that the plants meet the requirements of the specifications and conform to requirements.

H. Where requested by the Owner’s Representative, submit photographs of plants or representative samples of plants. Photographs shall be legible and clearly depict the plant specimen. Each submitted image shall contain a height reference, such as a measuring stick. The approval of plants by the Owner’s Representative via photograph does not preclude the Owner’s Representative's right to reject material while on site.

1.16 PLANT SUBSTITUTIONS FOR PLANTS NOT AVAILABLE

A. Submit all requests for substitutions of plant species, or size to the Owner’s Representative, for approval, prior to purchasing the proposed substitution. Request for substitution shall be accompanied with a list of nurseries contacted in the search for the required plant and a record of other attempts to locate the required material. Substitutions will be considered only after demonstrating a thorough search of nurseries in Washington, Oregon, California and British Columbia, Canada. Requests shall also include sources of plants found that may be of a smaller or larger size, or a different shape or habit than specified, or plants of the same genus and species but different cultivar origin, or which may otherwise not meet the requirements of the specifications, but which may be available for substitution.



1.17 SITE CONDITIONS

A. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to be aware of all surface and sub-surface conditions, and to notify the Owner’s Representative, in writing, of any circumstances that would negatively impact the health of plantings. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

1. Should subsurface drainage or soil conditions be encountered which would be detrimental to growth or survival of plant material, the Contractor shall notify the Owner’s Representative in writing, stating the conditions and submit a proposal covering cost of corrections. If the Contractor fails to notify the Owner’s Representative of such conditions, he/she shall remain responsible for plant material under the warranty clause of the specifications.

B. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to be familiar with the local growing conditions, and if any specified plants will be in conflict with these conditions. Report any potential conflicts, in writing, to the Owner’s Representative.

C. This specification requires that all Planting Soil and Irrigation (if applicable) work be completed and accepted prior to the installation of any plants.1. Planting operations shall not begin until such time that the irrigation system is completely

operational for the area(s) to be planted, and the irrigation system for that area has been preliminarily observed and approved by the Owner’s Representative.

D. Actual planting shall be performed during those periods when weather and soil conditions are suitable in accordance with locally accepted horticultural practices.1. Do not install plants into saturated or frozen soils. Do not install plants during inclement

weather, such as rain or snow or during extremely hot, cold or windy conditions.

1.18 PLANTING AROUND UTILITIES

A. Contractor shall carefully examine the civil, record, and survey drawings to become familiar with the existing underground conditions before digging.

B. Determine location of underground utilities and perform work in a manner that will avoid possible damage. Hand excavate, as required. Maintain grade stakes set by others until parties concerned mutually agree upon removal.

C. Notification of Local Utility Locator Service is required for all planting areas: The Contractor is responsible for knowing the location and avoiding utilities that are not covered by the Local Utility Locator Service.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 PLANTS: GENERAL

A. Standards and measurement: Provide plants of quantity, size, genus, species, and variety or cultivars as shown and scheduled in contract documents.



1. All plants including the root ball dimensions or container size to trunk caliper ratio shall conform to ANSI Z60.1 “American Standard for Nursery Stock” latest edition, unless modified by provisions in this specification. When there is a conflict between this specification and ANSI Z60.1, this specification section shall be considered correct.

2. Plants larger than specified may be used if acceptable to the Owner’s Representative. Use of such plants shall not increase the contract price. If larger plants are accepted the root ball size shall be in accordance with ANSI Z-60.1. Larger plants may not be acceptable if the resulting root ball cannot be fit into the required planting space.

3. If a range of size is given, no plant shall be less than the minimum size and not less than 50 percent of the plants shall be as large as the maximum size specified. The measurements specified are the minimum and maximum size acceptable and are the measurements after pruning, where pruning is required.

B. Proper Identification: All trees shall be true to name as ordered or shown on planting plans and shall be labeled individually or in groups by genus, species, variety and cultivar.

C. Compliance: All trees shall comply with federal and state laws and regulations requiring observation for plant disease, pests, and weeds. Observation certificates required by law shall accompany each shipment of plants.

D. Plant Quality: 1. General: Provide healthy stock, grown in a nursery and reasonably free of die-back,

disease, insects, eggs, bores, and larvae. At the time of planting all plants shall have a root system, stem, and branch form that will not restrict normal growth, stability and health for the expected life of the plant

2. Plant quality above the soil line: a. Plants shall be healthy with the color, shape, size and distribution of trunk, stems,

branches, buds and leaves normal to the plant type specified. Tree quality above the soil line shall comply with the project Crown Acceptance details and the following:1.) Crown: The form and density of the crown shall be typical for a young specimen

of the species or cultivar pruned to a central and dominant leader. a.) Crown specifications do not apply to plants that have been specifically trained

in the nursery as topiary, espalier, multi-stem, clump, or unique selections such as contorted or weeping cultivars.

2.) Leaves: The size, color, and appearance of leaves shall be typical for the time of year and stage of growth of the species or cultivar. Trees shall not show signs of prolonged moisture stress or over watering as indicated by wilted, shriveled, or dead leaves.

3.) Branches: Shoot growth (length and diameter) throughout the crown should be appropriate for the age and size of the species or cultivar. Trees shall not have dead, diseased, broken, distorted, or otherwise injured branches.a.) Main branches shall be distributed along the central leader not clustered

together. They shall form a balanced crown appropriate for the cultivar/species.

b.) Branch diameter shall be no larger than two-thirds (one-half is preferred) the diameter of the central leader measured 1 inch above the branch union.

c.) The attachment of the largest branches (scaffold branches) shall be free of included bark.

4.) Trunk: The tree trunk shall be relatively straight, vertical, and free of wounds that penetrate to the wood (properly made pruning cuts, closed or not, are acceptable and are not considered wounds), sunburned areas, conks (fungal fruiting bodies),



wood cracks, sap leakage, signs of boring insects, galls, cankers, girdling ties, or lesions (mechanical injury).

5.) Temporary branches, unless otherwise specified, can be present along the lower trunk below the lowest main (scaffold) branch, particularly for trees less than 1 inch in caliper. These branches should be no greater than 3/8-inch diameter. Clear trunk should be no more than 40% of the total height of the tree.

b. Trees shall have one central leader. If the leader was headed, a new leader (with a live terminal bud) at least one-half the diameter of the pruning cut shall be present. 1.) All trees are assumed to have one central leader trees unless a different form is

specified in the plant list or drawings.c. All graft unions, where applicable, shall be completely closed without visible sign of

graft rejection. All grafts shall be visible above the soil line.d. Trunk caliper and taper shall be sufficient so that the lower five feet of the trunk

remains vertical without a stake. Auxiliary stake may be used to maintain a straight leader in the upper half of the tree.

3. Plant quality at or below the soil line:a. Plant roots shall be normal to the plant type specified. Root observations shall take

place without impacting tree health. Root quality at or below the soil line shall comply with the project Root Acceptance details and the following:1.) The roots shall be reasonably free of scrapes, broken or split wood. 2.) The root system shall be reasonably free of injury from biotic (e.g., insects and

pathogens) and abiotic (e.g., herbicide toxicity and salt injury) agents. Wounds resulting from root pruning used to produce a high quality root system are not considered injuries.

3.) A minimum of three structural roots reasonably distributed around the trunk (not clustered on one side) shall be found in each plant. Root distribution shall be uniform throughout the root ball, and growth shall be appropriate for the species.

a.) Plants with structural roots on only one side of the trunk (J roots) shall be rejected.

4.) The root collar shall be within the upper 2 inches of the substrate/soil. Two structural roots shall reach the side of the root ball near the top surface of the root ball. The grower may request a modification to this requirement for species with roots that rapidly descend, provided that the grower removes all stem girdling roots above the structural roots across the top of the root ball.

5.) The root system shall be reasonably free of stem girdling roots over the root collar or kinked roots from nursery production practices.a.) Plant Grower Certification: The final plant grower shall be responsible to

have determined that the plants have been root pruned at each step in the plant production process to remove stem girdling roots and kinked roots, or that the previous production system used practices that produce a root system throughout the root ball that meets these specifications. Regardless of the work of previous growers, the plant’s root system shall be modified at the final production stage, if needed, to produce the required plant root quality. The final grower shall certify in writing that all plants are reasonably free of stem girdling and kinked roots as defined in this specification, and that the tree has been grown and harvested to produce a plant that meets these specifications.

6.) At time of observations and delivery, the root ball shall be moist throughout. Roots shall not show signs of excess soil moisture conditions as indicated by stunted, discolored, distorted, or dead roots.



E. Submittals: Submit for approval the required plant quality certifications from the grower where plants are to be purchased, for each plant type. The certification must state that each plant meets all the above plant quality requirements. 1. The grower’s certification of plant quality does not prohibit the Owner’s Representative

from observing any plant or rejecting the plant if it is found to not meet the specification requirements.

2.2 ROOT BALL PACKAGE OPTIONS: The following root ball packages are permitted. Specific root ball packages shall be required where indicated on the plant list or in this specification. Any type of root ball packages that is not specifically defined in this specification shall not be permitted.

A. Balled and Burlapped Plants1. All Balled and Burlapped Plants shall be field grown, and the root ball packaged in a

burlap and twine and/or burlap and wire basket package.2. Plants shall be harvested with the following modifications to standard nursery practices.

a. Prior to digging any tree that fails to meet the requirement for maximum soil and roots above the root collar, carefully removed the soil from the top of the root ball of each plant, using hand tools, water or an air spade, to locate the root collar and attain the soil depth over the structural roots requirements. Remove all stem girdling roots above the root collar. Care must be exercised not to damage the surface of the root collar and the top of the structural roots.

b. Trees shall be dug for a minimum of 4 weeks and a maximum of 52 weeks prior to shipping. Trees dug 4 to 52 weeks prior to shipping are defined as hardened-off. Digging is defined as cutting all roots and lifting the tree out of the ground and either moving it to a new location in the nursery or placing it back into the same hole. Tress that are stored out of the ground shall be placed in a holding area protected from extremes of wind and sun with the root ball protected by covering with mulch or straw and irrigated sufficiently to keep moisture in the root ball above wilt point and below saturation

c. Twine and burlap used for wrapping the root ball package shall be natural, biodegradable material. If the burlap decomposes after digging the tree then the root ball shall be re-wrapped prior to shipping if roots have not yet grown to keep root ball intact during shipping.

B. Spade Harvested and Transplanted1. Spade Harvested and Transplanted Plants shall meet all the requirements for field grown

trees. Root ball diameters shall be of similar size as the ANSI Z60.1 requirements for Balled and Burlapped plants.

2. Trees shall be harvested prior to leafing out (bud break) in the spring or during the fall planting period except for plants know to be considered as fall planting hazards. Plants that are fall planting hazards shall only be harvested prior to leafing out in the spring.

3. Trees shall be moved and planted within 48 hours of the initial harvesting and shall remain in the spade machine until planted.

C. Container (including above-ground fabric containers and boxes) Plants 1. Provide plants shall be established and well rooted in removable containers. 2. Container class size shall conform to ANSI Z60.1 for container plants for each size and

type of plant.

D. IN-GROUND FABRIC BAG-GROWN



1. Provide plants established and well rooted.

2.3 PLANTING SOIL

A. Planting Soil as used in this specification means the soil at the planting site, or imported as modified and defined in specification Section Planting Soil.

2.4 MULCH

A. Mulch shall be Bio Mulch, available from Walrath, (253.531.7499), or approved equal.

B. Submit supplier’s product specification data sheet and a one gallon sample for approval.

2.5 TREE STAKING AND GUYING MATERIAL

A. Tree guying to be flat woven polypropylene material, 3/4 inch wide, and 900 lb. break strength. Color to be Green. Product to be ArborTie manufactured by Deep Root Partners, L.P. or approved equal.

B. Stakes shall be lodge pole stakes free of knots and of diameters and lengths appropriate to the size of plant as required to adequately support the plant.

C. Below ground anchorage systems to be constructed of 2 x 2 dimensional untreated wood securing (using 3 inch long screws) horizontal portions to 4 feet long vertical stakes driven straight into the ground outside the root ball.

D. Submit manufacturer’s product data for approval.

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.1 SITE EXAMINATION

A. Examine the surface grades and soil conditions to confirm that the requirements of the Specification Section – Planting Soil - and the soil and drainage modifications indicated on the Planting Soil Plan and Details (if applicable) have been completed. Notify the Owner’s Representative in writing of any unsatisfactory conditions.

3.2 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Protect materials from deterioration during delivery and storage. Adequately protect plants from drying out, exposure of roots to sun, wind or extremes of heat and cold temperatures. If planting is delayed more than 24 hours after delivery, set plants in a location protected from sun and wind. Provide adequate water to the root ball package during the shipping and storage period. 1. All plant materials must be available for observation prior to planting.2. Using a soil moisture meter, periodically check the soil moisture in the root balls of all

plants to assure that the plants are being adequately watered. Volumetric soil moisture shall be maintained above wilting point and below field capacity for the root ball substrate or soil.

B. Do not deliver more plants to the site than there is space with adequate storage conditions. Provide a suitable remote staging area for plants and other supplies.



1. The Owner’s Representative or Contractor shall approve the duration, method and location of storage of plants.

C. Provide protective covering over all plants during transporting.

3.3 PLANTING SEASON

A. Planting shall only be performed when weather and soil conditions are suitable for planting the materials specified in accordance with locally accepted practice, unless otherwise approved in writing by the Owner’s Representative. In the event that the Contractor request planting outside the dates of the planting season, approval of the request does not change the requirements of the warranty.

3.4 ADVERSE WEATHER CONDITIONS

A. No planting shall take place during extremely hot, dry, windy or freezing weather.

3.5 COORDINATION WITH PROJECT WORK

A. The Contractor shall coordinate with all other work that may impact the completion of the work.

B. Prior to the start of work, prepare a detailed schedule of the work for coordination with other trades.

C. Coordinate the relocation of any irrigation lines, heads or the conduits of other utility lines that are in conflict with tree locations. Root balls shall not be altered to fit around lines. Notify the Owner’s Representative of any conflicts encountered.

3.6 LAYOUT AND PLANTING SEQUENCE

A. Relative positions of all plants and trees are subject to approval of the Owner’s Representative.

B. Notify the Owner’s Representative, one (1) week prior to layout. Layout all individual plant locations. Place plants above surface at planting location or place a labeled stake at planting location. Layout bed lines with paint for the Owner’s Representative’s approval. Secure the Owner’s Representative’s acceptance before digging and start of planting work.

C. When applicable, plant trees before other plants are installed.

D. It is understood that plants are not precise objects and that minor adjustments in the layout will be required as the planting plan is constructed. These adjustments may not be apparent until some or all of the plants are installed. Make adjustments as required by the Owner’s Representative including relocating previously installed plants.

3.7 SOIL PROTECTION DURING PLANT DELIVERY AND INSTALLATION

A. Protect soil from compaction during the delivery of plants to the planting locations, digging of planting holes and installing plants.



1. Where possible deliver and plant trees that require the use of heavy mechanized equipment prior to final soil preparation and tilling. Where possible, restrict the driving lanes to one area instead of driving over and compacting a large area of soil.

2. Till to a depth of 6 inches, all soil that has been driven over during the installation of plants.

3.8 SOIL MOISTURE

A. Volumetric soil moisture level, in both the planting soil and the root balls of all plants, prior to, during and after planting shall be above permanent wilting point and below field capacity for each type of soil texture within the following ranges.

Soil type Permanent wilting point

Field capacity

Sand, Loamy sand, Sandy loam 5-8% 12-18%Loam, Sandy clay, Sandy clay loam

14-25% 27-36%

Clay loam, Silt loam 11-22% 31-36%Silty clay, Silty clay loam 22-27% 38-41%

1. Volumetric soil moisture shall be measured with a digital moisture meter. The meter shall be the Digital Soil Moisture Meter, DSMM500 by General Specialty Tools and Instruments, or approved equivalent.

B. The Contractor shall confirm the soil moisture levels with a moisture meter. If the moisture is too high, suspend planting operations until the soil moisture drains to below field capacity.

3.9 INSTALLATION OF PLANTS: GENERAL

A. Observe each plant after delivery and prior to installation for damage of other characteristics that may cause rejection of the plant. Notify the Owner’s Representative of any condition observed.

B. No more plants shall be distributed about the planting bed area than can be planted and watered on the same day.

C. The root system of each plant, regardless of root ball package type, shall be observed by the Contractor, at the time of planting to confirm that the roots meet the requirements for plant root quality in Part 2 Products: Plants General: Plant Quality. The Contractor shall undertake at the time of planting, all modifications to the root system required by the Owner’s Representative to meet these quality standards.1. Modifications, at the time of planting, to meet the specifications for the depth of the root

collar and removal of stem girdling roots and circling roots may make the plant unstable or stress the plant to the point that the Owner’s Representative may choose to reject the plant rather than permitting the modification.

2. Any modifications required by the Owner’s Representative to make the root system conform to the plant quality standards outlined in Part 2 Products: Plants General: Quality, or other requirements related to the permitted root ball package, shall not be considered as grounds to modify or void the plant warranty.



3. The resulting root ball may need additional staking and water after planting. The Owner’s Representative may reject the plant if the root modification process makes the tree unstable or if the tree is not healthy at the end of the warranty period. Such plants shall still be covered under the warranty

4. The Contractor remains responsible to confirm that the grower has made all required root modifications noted during any nursery observations.

D. Container and Boxed Root Ball Shaving: The outer surfaces of ALL plants in containers and boxes, including the top, sides and bottom of the root ball shall be shaved to remove all circling, descending, and matted roots. Shaving shall be performed using saws, knives, sharp shovels or other suitable equipment that is capable of making clean cuts on the roots. Shaving shall remove a minimum of one inch of root mat or up to 2 inches as required to remove all root segments that are not growing reasonably radial to the trunk.

E. Exposed Stem Tissue after Modification: The required root ball modifications may result in stem tissue that has not formed trunk bark being exposed above the soil line. If such condition occurs, wrap the exposed portion of the stem in a protective wrapping with a white filter fabric. Secure the fabric with biodegradable masking tape. DO NOT USE string, twine, green nursery ties or any other material that may girdle the trunk if not removed.

F. Excavation of the Planting Space: Using hand tools or tracked mini-excavator, excavate the planting hole into the Planting Soil to the depth of the root ball measured after any root ball modification to correct root problems, and wide enough for working room around the root ball or to the size indicated on the drawing or as noted below. 1. For trees and shrubs planted in soil areas that are NOT tilled or otherwise modified to a

depth of at least 12 inches over a distance of more than 10 feet radius from each tree, or 5 feet radius from each shrub, the soil around the root ball shall be loosened as defined below or as indicated on the drawings. a. The area of loosening shall be a minimum of 3 times the diameter of the root ball at

the surface sloping to 2 times the diameter of the root ball at the depth of the root ball.b. Loosening is defined as digging into the soil and turning the soil to reduce the

compaction. The soil does not have to be removed from the hole, just dug, lifted and turned. Lifting and turning may be accomplished with a tracked mini excavator, or hand shovels.

2. If an auger is used to dig the initial planting hole, the soil around the auger hole shall be loosened as defined above for trees and shrubs planted in soil areas that are NOT tilled or otherwise modified.

3. The measuring point for root ball depth shall be the average height of the outer edge of the root ball after any required root ball modification.

4. If motorized equipment is used to deliver plants to the planting area over exposed planting beds, or used to loosen the soil or dig the planting holes, all soil that has been driven over shall be tilled to a depth of 6 inches.

G. For trees to be planted in prepared Planting Soil that is deeper than the root ball depth, compact the soil under the root ball using a mechanical tamper to assure a firm bedding for the root ball. If there is more than 12 inches of planting soil under the root ball excavate and tamp the planting soil in lifts not to exceed 12 inches.

H. Set top outer edge of the root ball at the average elevation of the proposed finish. Set the plant plumb and upright in the center of the planting hole. The tree graft, if applicable, shall be visible above the grade. Do not place soil on top of the root ball.



I. The Owner’s Representative may request that plants orientation be rotated when planted based on the form of the plant.

J. Backfill the space around the root ball with the same planting soil or existing soil that was excavated for the planting space. See Specification Section Planting Soil, for requirements to modify the soil within the planting bed.

K. Brace root ball by tamping Planting Soil around the lower portion of the root ball. Place additional Planting Soil around base and sides of ball in six-inch (6") lifts. Lightly tamp each lift using foot pressure or hand tools to settle backfill, support the tree and eliminate voids. DO NOT over compact the backfill or use mechanical or pneumatic tamping equipment. Over compaction shall be defined as greater than 85% of maximum dry density, standard proctor or greater than 250 psi as measured by a cone penetrometer when the volumetric soil moisture is lower than field capacity. 1. When the planting hole has been backfilled to three quarters of its depth, water shall be

poured around the root ball and allowed to soak into the soil to settle the soil. Do not flood the planting space. If the soil is above field capacity, allow the soil to drain to below field capacity before finishing the planting. Air pockets shall be eliminated and backfill continued until the planting soil is brought to grade level.

L. Where indicated on the drawings, build a 4 inch high, level berm of Planting Soil around the outside of the root ball to retain water. Tamp the berm to reduce leaking and erosion of the saucer.

M. Thoroughly water the Planting Soil and root ball immediately after planting.

N. Remove all nursery plant identification tags and ribbons as per Owner’s Representative instructions. The Owner’s Representative’s seals are to remain on plants until the end of the warranty period.

O. Remove corrugated cardboard trunk protection after planting.

P. Follow additional requirements for the permitted root ball packages.

3.10 PERMITTED ROOT BALL PACKAGES AND SPECIAL PLANTING REQUIREMENTS

A. The following are permitted root ball packages and special planting requirements that shall be followed during the planting process in addition to the above General planting requirements.

B. Balled and Burlapped Plants1. After the root ball has been backfilled, remove all twine and burlap from the top of the

root ball. Cut the burlap away; do not fold down onto the Planting Soil. 2. Earth root balls shall be kept intact except for any modifications required by the Owner’s

Representative to make root package comply with the requirement in Part 2 Products.

C. Container (including boxed and above-ground fabric containers) Plants1. This specification assumes that most container plants have significant stem girdling and

circling roots, and that the root collar is too low in the root ball. 2. Remove the container. 3. Perform root ball shaving as defined in Installation of Plants: General above.



4. Remove all roots and substrate above the root collar and the main structural roots according to root correction details so root system conforms to root observations detail.

5. Remove all substrate at the bottom of the root ball that does not contain roots.6. Using a hose, power washer or air excavation device, wash out the substrate from around

the trunk and top of the remaining root ball and find and remove all stem girdling roots within the root ball above the top of the structural roots.

D. In-Ground Fabric Containers1. Remove the fabric container from the root ball. Cut roots at the edge of the container as

needed to extract the fabric from the roots. Make clean cuts with sharp tools; do not tear roots away from the fabric.

2. Observe the root system after the container is removed to confirm that the root system meets the quality standards.

3.11 GROUND COVER, PERENNIAL AND ANNUAL PLANTS

A. Assure that soil moisture is within the required levels prior to planting. Irrigation, if required, shall be applied at least 12 hours prior to planting to avoid planting in muddy soils.

B. Assure that soil grades in the beds are smooth and as shown on the plans.

C. Plants shall be planted in even, triangularly spaced rows, at the intervals called out for on the drawings, unless otherwise noted. The first row of Annual flower plants shall be 6 inches from the bed edge unless otherwise directed.

D. Dig planting holes sufficiently large enough to insert the root system without deforming the roots. Set the top of the root system at the grade of the soil.

E. Schedule the planting to occur prior to application of the mulch. If the bed is already mulched, pull the mulch from around the hole and plant into the soil. Do not plant the root system in the mulch. Pull mulch back so it is not on the root ball surface.

F. Press soil to bring the root system in contact with the soil.

G. Spread any excess soil around in the spaces between plants.

H. Apply mulch to the bed being sure not to cover the tops of the plants with or the tops of the root ball with mulch.

I. Water each planting area as soon as the planting is completed. Apply additional water to keep the soil moisture at the required levels. Do not over water.

3.12 STAKING AND GUYING

A. Do not stake or guy trees unless specifically required by the Contract Documents, or in the event that the Contractor feels that staking is the only alternative way to keep particular trees plumb. 1. The Owner’s Representative shall have the authority to require that trees are staked or to

reject staking as an alternative way to stabilize the tree. 2. Trees that required heavily modified root balls to meet the root quality standards may

become unstable. The Owner’s Representative may choose to reject these trees rather than utilize staking to temporarily support the tree.



B. Trees that are guyed shall have their guys and stakes removed after one full growing season or at other times as required by the Owner’s Representative.

C. Tree guying shall utilize the tree staking and guying materials specified. Guying to be tied in such a manner as to create a minimum 12-inch loop to prevent girdling. Refer to manufacturer’s recommendations and the planting detail for installation. 1. Plants shall stand plumb after staking or guying. 2. Stakes shall be driven to sufficient depth to hold the tree rigid.

3.13 STRAIGHTENING PLANTS

A. Maintain all plants in a plumb position throughout the warranty period. Straighten all trees that move out of plumb including those not staked. Plants to be straightened shall be excavated and the root ball moved to a plumb position, and then re-backfilled.

B. Do not straighten plants by pulling the trunk with guys.

3.14 INSTALLATION OF FERTILIZER AND OTHER CHEMICAL ADDITIVES

A. Do not apply any soluble fertilizer to plantings during the first year after transplanting unless soil test determines that fertilizer or other chemical additives is required. Apply chemical additives only upon the approval of the Owner’s Representative.

B. Controlled release fertilizers shall be applied according to the manufacturer’s instructions and standard horticultural practices.

3.15 PRUNING OF TREES AND SHRUBS

A. Prune plants as directed by the Owner’s Representative. Pruning trees shall be limited to addressing structural defects as shown in details; follow recommendations in “Structural Pruning: A Guide For The Green Industry” published by Urban Tree Foundation, Visalia CA.

B. All pruning shall be performed by a person experienced in structural tree pruning.

C. Except for plants specified as multi-stemmed or as otherwise instructed by the Owner’s Representative, preserve or create a central leader.

D. Pruning of large trees shall be done using pole pruners or if needed, from a ladder or hydraulic lift to gain access to the top of the tree. Do not climb in newly planted trees. Small trees can be structurally pruned by laying them over before planting. Pruning may also be performed at the nursery prior to shipping.

E. Remove and replace excessively pruned or malformed stock resulting from improper pruning that occurred in the nursery or after.

F. Pruning shall be done with clean, sharp tools.

G. No tree paint or sealants shall be used.



3.16 MULCHING OF PLANTS

A. Apply 3 inches of mulch before settlement, covering the entire planting bed area. Install no more than 1 inch of mulch over the top of the root balls of all plants. Taper to 2 inches when abutting pavement.

B. For trees planted in lawn areas the mulch shall extend to a 5 foot radius around the tree or to the extent indicated on the plans.

C. Lift all leaves, low hanging stems and other green portions of small plants out of the mulch if covered.

D. Seeded

3.17 PLANTING BED FINISHING

A. After planting, smooth out all grades between plants before mulching.

B. Separate the edges of planting beds and lawn areas with a smooth, formed edge cut into the turf with the bed mulch level slightly lower, 1 and 2 inches, than the adjacent turf sod or as directed by the Owner’s Representative. Bed edge lines shall be a depicted on the drawings.

3.18 WATERING

A. The Contractor shall be fully responsible to ensure that adequate water is provided to all plants from the point of installation until the date of Substantial Completion Acceptance. The Contractor shall adjust the automatic irrigation system, if available, and apply additional or adjust for less water using hoses as required.

B. Hand water root balls of all plants to assure that the root balls have moisture above wilt point and below field capacity. Test the moisture content in each root ball and the soil outside the root ball to determine the water content.

3.19 CLEAN-UP

A. During installation, keep the site free of trash, pavements reasonably clean and work area in an orderly condition at the end of each day. Remove trash and debris in containers from the site no less than once a week.1. Immediately clean up any spilled or tracked soil, fuel, oil, trash or debris deposited by the

Contractor from all surfaces within the project or on public right of ways and neighboring property.

B. Once installation is complete, wash all soil from pavements and other structures. Ensure that mulch is confined to planting beds and that all tags and flagging tape are removed from the site. The Owner’s Representative’s seals are to remain on the trees and removed at the end of the warranty period.

C. Make all repairs to grades, ruts, and damage by the plant installer to the work or other work at the site.



D. Remove and dispose of all excess planting soil, subsoil, mulch, plants, packaging, and other material brought to the site by the Contractor.

3.20 PROTECTION DURING CONSTRUCTION

A. The Contractor shall protect planting and related work and other site work from damage due to planting operations, operations by other Contractors or trespassers. Maintain protection during installation until Substantial Completion Acceptance. Treat, repair or replace damaged work immediately.

B. Damage done by the Contractor, or any of their sub-contractors to existing or installed plants, or any other parts of the work or existing features to remain, including roots, trunk or branches of large existing trees, soil, paving, utilities, lighting, irrigation, other finished work and surfaces including those on adjacent property, shall be cleaned, repaired or replaced by the Contractor at no expense to the Owner. The Owner’s Representative shall determine when such cleaning, replacement or repair is satisfactory.

3.21 PLANT MAINTENANCE PRIOR TO SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION ACCEPTANCE

A. During the project work period and prior to Substantial Completion Acceptance, the Contractor shall maintain all plants.

B. Maintenance during the period prior to Substantial Completion Acceptance shall consist of pruning, watering, cultivating, weeding, mulching, removal of dead material, repairing and replacing of tree stakes, tightening and repairing of guys, repairing and replacing of damaged tree wrap material, resetting plants to proper grades and upright position, and furnishing and applying such sprays as are necessary to keep plantings reasonably free of damaging insects and disease, and in healthy condition. The threshold for applying insecticides and herbicide shall follow established Integrated Pest Management (IPM) procedures. Mulch areas shall be kept reasonably free of weeds, grass.

3.22 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION ACCEPTANCE

A. Upon written notice from the Contractor, the Owners Representative shall review the work and make a determination if the work is substantially complete.1. Notification shall be at least 7 days prior to the date the contractor is requesting the

review.

B. The date of substantial completion of the planting shall be the date when the Owner’s Representative accepts that all work in Planting, Planting Soil, and Irrigation installation sections is complete.

C. The Plant Warranty period begins at date of written notification of substantial completion from the Owner’s Representative. The date of substantial completion may be different than the date of substantial completion for the other sections of the project.

3.23 MAINTENANCE DURING THE WARRANTY PERIOD BY THE PLANT INSTALLER

A. During the warranty period, provide all maintenance for all plantings to keep the plants in a healthy state and the planting areas clean and neat.



B. General requirements:1. All work shall be undertaken by trained planting crews under the supervision of a foreman

with a minimum of 5 years experience supervising commercial plant maintenance crews.2. All chemical and fertilizer applications shall be made by licensed applicators for the type

of chemicals to be used. All work and chemical use shall comply with all applicable local, provincial and federal requirements.

3. Assure that hoses and watering equipment and other maintenance equipment does not block paths or be placed in a manner that may create tripping hazards. Use standard safety warning barriers and other procedures to maintain the site in a safe manner for visitors at all times.

4. All workers shall wear required safety equipment and apparel appropriate for the tasks being undertaken.

5. The Contractor shall not store maintenance equipment at the site at times when they are not in use unless authorized in writing by the Owner’s Representative.

6. Maintenance vehicles shall not park on the site including walks and lawn areas at any time without the Owner’s Representative’s written permission.

7. Maintain a detailed log of all maintenance activities including types of tasks, date of task, types and quantities of materials and products used, watering times and amounts, and number of each crew. Periodically review the logs with the Owner’s Representative, and submit a copy of the logs at the end of each year of the maintenance agreement.

8. Meet with the Owner’s Representative a minimum of three times a year to review the progress and discuss any changes that are needed in the maintenance program. At the end of the warranty period attend a hand over meeting to formally transfer the responsibilities of maintenance to the Owner’s Representative. Provide all information on past maintenance activities and provide a list of critical tasks that will be needed over the next 12 months. Provide all maintenance logs and soil test data. Make the Contractor’s supervisor available for a minimum of one year after the end of the warranty period to answer questions about past maintenance.

C. Provide the following maintenance tasks:1. Watering; Provide all water required to keep soil within and around the root balls at

optimum moisture content for plant growth.a. Maintain all watering systems and equipment and keep them operational.b. Monitor soil moisture to provide sufficient water. Check soil moisture and root ball

moisture with a soil moisture meter on a regular basis and record moisture readings. Do not over water.

2. Soil nutrient levels: Take a minimum of 4 soil samples from around the site in the spring and fall and have them tested by an accredited agricultural soil testing lab for chemical composition of plant required nutrients, pH, salt and % organic matter. Test results shall include laboratory recommendations for nutrient applications. Apply fertilizers at rates recommended by the soil test.a. Make any other soil test and/or plant tissue test that may be indicated by plant

conditions that may not be related to soil nutrient levels such as soil contaminated by other chemicals or lack of chemical uptake by the plant.

3. Plant pruning: Remove cross over branching, shorten or remove developing co dominant leaders, dead wood and winter-damaged branches. Unless directed by the Owner’s Representative, do not shear plants or make heading cuts.

4. Restore plants: Reset any plants that have settled or are leaning as soon as the condition is noticed.

5. Guying and staking: Maintain plant guys in a taught position. Remove tree guys and staking after the first full growing season unless directed by Owner’s Representative.



6. Weed control: Keep all beds free of weeds. Hand-remove all weeds and any plants that do not appear on the planting plan. Chemical weed control is permitted only with the approval of the Owner’s Representative. Schedule weeding as needed but not less 12 times per year. At no point shall weeds be allowed to set flower.

7. Trash removal: Remove all trash and debris from all planting beds and maintain the beds in a neat and tidy appearance. The number of trash and debris removal visits shall be no less than 12 times per year and may coincide with other maintenance visits.

8. Plant pest control: Maintain disease, insects and other pests at manageable levels. Manageable levels shall be defined as damage to plants that may be noticeable to a professional but not to the average person. Use least invasive methods to control plant disease and insect outbreaks. a. The Owner’s Representative must approve in advance the use of all chemical pesticide

applications.9. Plant replacement: Replace all plants that are defective as defined in the warranty

provisions, as soon as the plant decline is obvious and in suitable weather and season for planting as outlined in above sections. Plants that become defective during the maintenance period shall be covered and replaced under the warranty provisions.

10. Mulch: Refresh mulch once a year to maintain complete coverage but do not over mulch. At no time shall the overall mulch thickness be greater than 3 inches. Do not apply mulch within 6 inches of the trunks or stems of any plants. Replacement mulch shall meet the requirements of the original approved material. Mulch shall be no more than one inch on top of the root ball surface.

11. Bed edging: Check and maintain edges between mulch and lawn areas in smooth neat lines as originally shown on the drawings.

12. Leaf, fruit and other plant debris removal: Remove fall leaf, spent flowers, fruit and plant part accumulations from beds and paved surfaces. Maintain all surface water drains free of debris. Debris removal shall be undertaken at each visit to weed or pick up trash in beds.

13. Damage from site use: Repair of damage by site visitors and events, beyond normal wear, are not part of this maintenance. The Owner’s Representative may request that the Contractor repair damage beds or plantings for an additional cost. All additional work shall be approved in advance by the Owner’s Representative.

3.24 END OF WARRANTY FINAL ACCEPTANCE / MAINTENANCE OBSERVATION

A. At the end of the Warranty and Maintenance period the Owner’s Representative shall observe the work and establish that all provisions of the contract are complete and the work is satisfactory.1. If the work is satisfactory, the maintenance period will end on the date of the final

observation.2. If the work is deemed unsatisfactory, the maintenance period will continue at no additional

expense to the Owner until the work has been completed, observed, and approved by the Owner’s Representative.

B. Failure to Pass Observation: If the work fails to pass final observation, any subsequent observations must be rescheduled as per above. The cost to the Owner for additional observations will be charged to the Contractor at the prevailing hourly rate of the Owners Representative.


Fort Steilacoom Park – Trail Access Upgrades Storm Drainage Utilities


Storm Drainage Utilities 334000 - 1

SECTION 334000 – STORM DRAINAGE UTILITIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Storm drains.

2. Manholes and catch basins.

3. Infiltration trench.

4. Bioretention system.


1. Section 015713 – Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control


1.2 REFERENCES

A. City of Lakewood Engineering Standards Manual, 2019 edition.

B. ADA - Americans with Disabilities Act.

C. ASTM D1527 Standard Specification for Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS) Pipe,

Schedules 40 & 80.

D. WSDOT Standard Specifications - Washington State Department of Transportation 2018


1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit under provisions of Section 013300.

B. Product Data: Catalog cuts and specifications for pipe, fittings, catch basins, and accessories.

C. Manufacturers’ Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures required to install products

specified.

D. Samples: Submit minimum 50-pound sample to Owner at site for rain garden soil mixture five

business days prior to placing material.

E. Quality Assurance/Control Submittals:

1. Test Reports: Sieve analysis for each material.

2. Certificates: WSDOT pit certification for each pit.

F. Record Documents:

1. Submit under provisions of Section 017700.

2. Record actual locations of pipe runs, connections, and invert elevations.

3. Identify and describe unexpected variations to subsoil conditions or discovery of uncharted

utilities.

4. Comply with City of Lakewood requirements.





A. Qualifications:

1. Crew Foreman: Minimum six years’ working experience and four years’ experience as

foreman performing similar work.

2. Surveyor: Land surveyor licensed in state of Washington with experience on similar

projects.

B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with City of Lakewood standards.


A. Maintain accesses to adjacent facilities.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 AGGREGATE

A. Pipe Bedding: Per WSDOT Standard Specifications Section 9-03.12(3).

B. Structural Fill: Per Section 312000.

2.2 STORM DRAIN PIPE

A. Pipe and Coupling Bands: Per WSDOT Standard Specifications Section 9-05.

B. Acceptable Pipe Materials: PVC, WSDOT Section 9-05.12(1).

2.3 PERFORATED PIPE

A. Pipe and Coupling Bands: Per WSDOT Standard Specifications Section 9-05. 2.

B. Acceptable Pipe Materials:

1. PVC, WSDOT Section 9-05. 2(6). ASTM D3034, SDR 35.

2. ABS, ASTM D1527, Schedule 40.

C. Perforations: 1/2-inch-diameter holes on 60 degree radial lines, 8 inches on center.

2.4 CATCH BASIN

A. Type 1 Catch Basins: City of Lakewood Standard Plan Number SW-06.

B. Load Ratings: HS20.

2.5 METAL CASTINGS

A. Comply with WSDOT Standard Specifications Section 9-05.15.

B. Load ratings: HS20.

C. Locking type.




D. Frame (for grate or solid cover): City of Lakewood Standard Plan SW-04.

E. Solid Cover: City of Lakewood Standard Plan Number SW-03.

2.6 GEOTEXTILE

A. WSDOT Standard Specifications Section 9-33, Table 2-Geotextile for Underground Drainage

Filtration.

2.7 BIORETENTION SOIL MIXTURE

A. Free of stones, roots, and objects larger than 1 inch.

B. 60 percent to 65 percent mineral aggregate and 35 percent to 40 percent fine compost.

C. Organic matter content: 5 to 8 percent by weight.

D. Cation Exchange Capacity: minimum 5 milliequivalents per 100 gram dry soil.

E. Fine compost: WSDOT Standard Specifications Section 9-14.4(8), fine compost gradation.

F. Mineral Aggregate Gradation:

Sieve Size Percent Passing

3/8-inch 100

US No. 4 95-100

US No. 10 75-90

US No. 40 25-40

US No. 100 4-10

US No. 200 2-5

Maximum clay content: less than 2 percent.

G. Compost: WSDOT Standard Specifications Section 9-14.4(8), coarse compost gradation.

2.8 CONCRETE

A. WSDOT Standard Specifications Section 6-02.3(2)A.

B. Minimum 3,000 psi.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify excavation is ready to receive Work; and excavations, dimensions, and elevations are as

indicated on Drawings.

B. Verify existing utilities are marked.




C. Verify erosion control is in place and operating as specified.

D. Verify inverts at points of connection. Pothole, expose pipes, determine invert elevations, pipe

material, and diameter. Verify with design, and inform Owner of deviations affecting design

before mobilizing crews and beginning construction.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Protect elements surrounding Work from damage or disfiguration.

B. Protect existing utilities from damage and disturbance.

C. Provide shoring to support existing utilities and their support prism or remove and replace

utilities where shoring is not practical.

D. Field locate and mark existing utilities, whether shown or not, before construction and avoid

damage or disturbance. Protect, maintain, and repair, where damaged. For aid in utility location,

call “811” services 48 hours (two working days) before beginning construction.

E. Employ and pay for a locator service to locate and mark utilities in addition to “811” service.

F. Field stake alignment and grade.

G. Maintain existing drainage during construction. Provide temporary ditches, drains, pipe, sumps,

and pumps as required.

3.3 CONSTRUCTION

A. Excavation:

1. Perform trench excavation in conformance with requirements of WSDOT Standard

Specifications Section 7-08.3(1)A.

2. Remove large stones or other hard matter that could damage piping or impede consistent

backfilling or compaction.

B. Pipe:

1. Install per manufacturer’s recommended procedures, ASTM standards, and WSDOT

Standard Specifications.

2. Maintain line and grade per Drawings.

3. Join pipe per manufacturer’s recommended procedures and WSDOT Standard

Specifications.

4. Bed Pipe: Per WSDOT Standard Specifications Section 7-08.3(1)C.

C. Catch Basins:

1. Comply with WSDOT Section 7-05.

2. Form bottom of excavation clean and smooth to correct elevation.

3. Place base sections on 12 inches minimum compacted thickness bedding. Smooth and

level to ensure uniform contact and support. Where subgrade cannot be compacted due to

excess moisture, provide lean concrete pad minimum 12 inches thick.

4. Extend bedding to limits of excavation. Compact bedding to 95 percent of maximum

density per ASTM D1557.

5. Verify alignment and elevation of entering pipes.




6. Construct structures plumb and level.

7. Make completed manhole rigid, true to dimensions, and water tight.

8. Backfill evenly around structure to prevent displacement and unequal stresses.

9. Wet lift holes and fill with mortar inside and out.

10. Smooth and point structure joints inside and out. Ensure water tightness.

11. Remove loops flush with inside wall surface after manhole is completed for precast

manhole elements where steel loops are provided in lieu of lift holes.

12. Remove sharp cutoff protrusions. If concrete spalling occurs as a result of loop removal,

restore spalled area to a uniform smooth surface with cement mortar.

D. Geotextile:

1. Install at locations shown on Drawings.

2. Overlap joints minimum 1 foot.

3. Lap against wall at top and bottom, minimum 1 foot.

E. Backfilling: Comply with WSDOT Standard Specifications Section 7-08.3(3).



B. Compaction Testing: Owner will perform compaction tests. If tests indicate Work does not meet

specified requirements, recompact and retest, or remove and replace and retest at direction of

Owner.

C. Owner Inspection: After completion of pipe, manholes, flow splitters, and bedding, and before

backfilling.

3.5 CLEANING

A. Before final acceptance, flush accumulated construction debris and remove other foreign matter

from storm drains. Do not allow flushed material to enter downstream system. Remove filter

fabric from orifice in control catch basin.
